Tips Category RSS Feed | Tips RSS Feed on en Launch Media Network Octopath Traveler Guide: Best Weapons to Make Your Party More Powerful Fri, 20 Jul 2018 15:37:07 -0400 Zack Palm

It's true that you can craft the most balanced party in Octopath Traveler and make it to the end of the game, but they're going to struggle if you don't equip them with the right weapons. The weapons you're looking aren't just any sword or spear -- they drasticly improve the strength of your characters during combat.

Unfortunately, you can't find a weapon early in the game and take it with you through your the end of your journey. Along the way, you'll need to pick up new ones as you face more fearsome foes.

Here's a break down of some of the higher quality weapons you should go out of your way to find!

Best Early Game Weapons

The Golden Axe

There's a powerful starting axe you can receive in the first few levels. The bad part about acquiring this weapon is you have to start the game in a specific order. As it stands, you want to start with H'aanit, and then unlock Therion, followed by going to Alfyn's starting town.

When you start out as H'aanit, continue through her story as you typically would. Once you've finished up things, make your way to Bolderfall so you can go to unlock Therion for your party. Complete the prologue and continue through as if you were playing the game normally.

After you've completed Therion's tale, head down toward Clearbrook as if you were to unlock Alfyn. You do not want to start unlocking Alfyn when you enter town. Do not interact with him. Instead, when you enter town, look for a woman with a speech bubble standing in front of a doorway. Once you've found this woman, provoke her and defeat her in combat. It's good to know she's weak to swords.

With the woman defeated, you can freely enter the house and you should see an old man wandering around inside. At this point you're going to want to save the game. The reason? The old man is holding the golden axe and you must steal it from him. However, you only have a 3% success rate. Better to reload each time you fail than to gain too much negative reputation.

The stats of the golden axe are:

  • Phys. Atk: +265
  • Critical: +100

An Octopath Traveler Menu Shows the Old Man's Possessions and the Chance of Stealing the Game's Golden Axe

Captain's Sword

In Olberic's starting town, Cobbleston, you can provoke the Captain of the Watch to a fight and win his sword. Some players have reported they can beat him immediately after finishing Olberic's first chapter between Levels 8 and 10, but doing this is extremely difficult and takes a lot of healing items. The Captain of the Watch is classified as a Strength 4 opponent.

A good strategy is returning to Cobbleston between Level 13 to 15 to acquire this item. The Captain of the Watch won't be as difficult and the sword should serve as a great addition to your inventory.

The stats of the captain's sword are:

  • Attack: +60
  • Speed: +40
  • Notes: Occasionally decreases target defense
Elusive Shield

To locate this shield, you're going to need to travel to Atlasdam. When you arrive, head to the city's palace and go to the bottom floor. When you reach the bottom, search for a boy and you'll have the option to purchase the item from him.

However, if you have Therion, you have the opportunity to steal it from him. Make sure to save before you attempt to take it, as you only have a 3% chance to take it, much like the golden axe.

The stats of the elusive shield are:

  • Phys. Def: +21
  • Elem. Def: +24
  • Evasion: +56
Composite Staff

There are two locations you can grab this item. The first is from the boy at the bottom level of the Atlasdam Palace, the one who was holding the elusive shield. Again, prior from taking this item make sure you save your progress. Unless you want to purchase it.

The second location is in Flamesgrace. Head to the town's Weapon Shop and you should see a character called the Witness. They'll have this item in their inventory and if you want to steal it, you'll have a 3% chance to grab it. 

The stats of the composite staff are:

  • Phys. Atk: +18
  • Elem. Atk: +44
  • Notes: Occasionally puts target to sleep

Best Regular Mid-Game Weapon

Wizard's Rod

You can find this weapon in two locations. The first is in Goldshore; an NPC is holding it who is standing outside of the church. You'll have a 3% to steal it, so be sure you're saving before you do so; you can also purchase it for around 60,000.

The second location is in the Archmagus shrine, in a purple chest. This is a Level 45 area and may prove difficult, even for characters at this level. You will need Therion to open the purple chests, you cannot do it with a character who has the thief subclass.

The stats of the wizard's rod are:

  • Phys. Atk: +113
  • Elem. Atk: +300
  • Notes: Occasionally poisons the target

Best Mid-Game Forbidden Weapons

These unique weapons appear in shops roughly around the second chapter. They have incredible stats for your party, though they come at a small cost. Each one comes with an additional stat intended to benefit your opponents. 

Do not let this deter you as these items boost your party's mid game fighting. Unfortunately, you cannot steal any of these items from NPCs. You can only purchase them.

The Forbidden Sword

You can find the forbidden sword in Stonegard. Proceed to the lower part of the town and you should find three shops alongside one another. The shopkeeper in the middle will have the weapon

The stats of the forbidden sword are:

  • Phys. Atk: +310
  • Speed: +120
  • Notes: Occasionally increases the target's Phys. Atk.

A blond boy wearing a tan tunic stands outside of a shop that has a sword sign above its door

The Forbidden Spear

This weapon is located in Quarrycrest. You do not have to purchase this item, but you do need to defeat a guard to obtain this weapon. When you arrive in Quarrycrest, go to the lower level of the town and seek out an individual standing outside a house. You must defeat him to gain access inside, and once you do you'll find the weapon inside.

The stats of the forbidden spear are:

  • Phys. Atk: +320
  • Elem. Atk: +303
  • Speed: -98
The Forbidden Dagger

You will find this weapon in Stillsnow. Much like the first forbidden weapon, you will need to purchase it from an NPC. She's located inside of a small home to the right of the town. You can pick her out by the clothing she's wearing as her attire is similar to Primrose's dancer outfit. 

The stats of the forbidden dagger are:

  • Phys. Atk: 285
  • Elem. Atk: +155
  • Notes: Reduces fire and dark damage dealt
The Forbidden Axe

Head on over to Wellspring to locate this weapon. In order to get this weapon you're going to have to use Olberic. When you arrive in the northern section of the town, seek out a guard standing outside of a home. You will have to defeat him to gain access to the home. When you gain access to the establishment, you can purchase it off the NPC. 

The stats of the forbidden axe are:

  • Phys. Atk: +391
  • Accuracy: -50
  • Speed: +80

A guard with a bubble above his head stands outside a house in Octopath Traveler

The Forbidden Bow

You're going to need to be in Goldshore to find this item. You shouldn't spend too much time seeking out this forbidden weaponAll you need to do is proceed to the bridge to head to the second part of the town. When you load across, the woman on the bridge will have the item for sale.

The stats of the forbidden bow are:

  • Phys. Atk: +282
  • Critical: +121
  • Notes: Increases the chance of encountering enemies
The Forbidden Staff

The final forbidden weapon! You can find it in Saintsbridge. All you need to do is head to the town's Cathedral and on the right side you should see a Cleric. Speak to them and you can buy the item.

Note: You may want to forgo grabbing this item as the Wizard's rod, listed above, comes with superior stats with none of the drawbacks.

The stats of the forbidden staff are:

  • Phys. Atk: -100
  • Elem. Atk: +285
  • Critical: -50

Best Late-Game Weapons (Battle-tested Weapons)

Now we're getting to the good stuff! These weapons will prove invaluable when you attempt to take on Octopath Traveler's final dungeon and boss (once you've gone past the game's credits).

These weapons are the best in the game. You can only acquire these weapons from purchasing them from NPCs or stealing them using Therion. When you purchase any of these weapons, bring Tressa along with you to increase your chances of getting a discount.

Battle-Tested Staff

You'll find this staff in Saintsbridge, located in the town's Cathedral. Go inside and speak to Bishop Bartolo. He should have the item listed for sale.

The stats of the battle-tested staff are:

  • Phys. Atk: +212
  • Elem. Atk: +388
  • Notes: Occasionally slows your target

A map shows the town of Saintsbridge highlighted in gold

Battle-Tested Axe

We're going to the Woodlands and traveling to Victors Hollow for the axe. Head to the town's Arena Gate and look for Ned. He is located at the bottom of the first set of stairs you go down.

The stats of the battle-tested axe are:

  • Phys. Atk: +350
  • Elem. Atk: +250
  • Notes: Increases lightning and ice damage dealt
Battle-Tested Dagger

Run on over to Atlasdam to find the dagger! Instead of finding the weapon in town, you need to leave it to go through East Atlasdam Flats, down to North Rippletide Coast, into the Undertow Cove. Inside of this area you should find the NPC Vanessa Hysel, located to the right of the save point, who has the dagger.

The stats of the battle-tested dagger are:

  • Phys. Atk: +380
  • Evasion: +140
  • Notes: Occasionally decreases target's accuracy
Battle-Tested Blade

You will locate the blade in Wellspring. When you arrive in town, go to the left and keep going until you go down, and then continue left only a short distance. The NPC on the right inside of the establishment will have the blade.

The stats of the battle-tested blade are:

  • Phys. Atk: +400
  • Critical: +150
  • Notes: Augments your character's physical abilities
Battle-Tested Bow

To find the bow you're going to need to travel to S'warkii. When you travel into town go down, to the left and go until you reach the last house to speak to Z'aanta. He should have the item listed for sale.

The stats of the battle-tested bow are:

  • Phys. Atk: +385
  • Critical: +186
  • Notes: Occasionally decreases the target's physical defense
Battle-Tested Shield

You're headed to Marsalim for this shield. Upon arriving in town, head up the stairs to your left and speak to the first guard, located to the right of the stairs. You should be able to purchase this item from them.

The stats of the battle-tested shield are:

  • Phys. Def: +132
  • Evasion: -88
  • Notes: Restores your character's HP and SP following every action
Battle-Tested Spear:

The final battle-tested item is in Noblecourt! When you enter town, proceed directly to the right and keep going under you go down to the set of stairs to arrive to the house next to them. Go inside of the house and start the side quest called Mikk and Makk Make Good. Once you complete it, proceed to the city of Rippletide and locate Leon, the NPC you beat in the quest, and purchase the spear from them.

The stats of the battle-tested spear are:

  • Phys. Atk: +390
  • Critical: +148
  • Notes: Occasionally blinds your target

A well-armored character stands on a dock in Octopath Traveler

Those are some of the greatest weapons you can give your characters to make your party more powerful! Using them should help your party's progress as they continue through Orsterra.

Be sure to check out our other Octopath Traveler Guides while you're here! 

Might & Magic Elemental Guardians Ultimate Farming Guide Thu, 19 Jul 2018 14:24:29 -0400 Ty Arthur

Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians is all about the gacha grind as you farm locations for better glyphs, more seals to spend, extra crystals and potions for upgrades, and books to evolve your team.

With a limited supply of energy on hand (for those who aren't spending real world money), farming efficiently is absolutely critical if you don't want to waste your time.

Below we cover everything you need to know to farm Elemental Guardians areas and get the most rewards for the least amount of effort.

Elemental Guardians Region Farming

To get the most out of region farming, you want to earn achievements for completing X number of stages in a region with a team composed of 3, 2, or even just 1 creature, rather than a full team of 4. At the same time, combine these with stages that have specific enemies for the kill X number of creatures achievements to earn double the rewards.

While you should build up a core group of 4 creatures to unlock the advanced and nightmare stages of each region, your focus should be on 1 ~ 3 creatures that can solo any given stage to farm achievements.

Which creature you pick will depend on the random nature of summons, but these are all solid options for solo farming contenders (either due to powerful debuff abilities, self-shielding, ability to attack repeatedly, etc.):

  • Air Stone Guard
  • Water Stone Guard
  • Water Daimyo
  • Angel Zealot
  • Earth Ninja
  • Wind Ebon Knight
  • Fire Deva
  • Earth Treant
  • Water Treant
  • Water Raksasha
  • Air Succubus
  • Fire Succubus
  • Water Ghost
  • Earth Ghost
  • Earth Minotaur

If you are looking for heal buffing creatures or creatures that can mitigate damage, there are to places in particular to play. The Air Mini Golem is farmable in Sunken City advanced stages, while the Water Arcane Bird is farmable in the Mystic Forest advanced stages. Their drop rates are low, but by farming these areas you are guaranteed to eventually get them.

Without question, the single most efficient stage to farm is Sunken City stage 6 on normal, as it gets you 4 Masaru Monks, 1 Evolved Monk, 4 Ninjas, and 1 Samurai all in one battle for only 5 energy. 

 This stage offers most bang for buck when farming achievements

By completing the achievements for those creatures, you will earn more seals, shards, and summons than in any other stage. Wasteland stage 6 on normal also offers a ton of ghosts and spectres all at once for those creature killing achievements, although the Wasteland is difficult to complete solo.

If you want to farm other creature / stage achievements, use the following table to find the most efficient paths:

Creature Location Number Appearing
Arcane Bird   Floating Islands Normal Stage 6  1
Arcane Eagle  Floating Islands Nightmare Stage 2  1
Simurgh  Floating Islands Nightmare Stage 3  2
Goblin Hunter  Wastelands Normal Stage 1  6
Goblin Trickster  Colossus Desert Normal Stage 6  3
Crossbowman Gnoll  Fire Maze Nightmare Stage 4  4
Gnoll Mages  Fire Maze Normal Stage 4  3
 Lizardman Archer   Sunken City Normal Stage 1  4
Lizardman Shaman   Floating Islands Nightmare Stage 4  3
Lizardman Warrior   Volcano Nightmare Stage 1  4
 Lizardman Warrior  Sunken City Advanced Stage 4  4
 Elemental  Fire Maze Normal Stage 2  5
 Evolved Elemental   Sunken City Nightmare Stage 2   5
 Djinn  Colossus Desert Advanced Stage 3  3
Evolved Djinn   Colossus Desert Nightmare Stage 4  4
Harpy  Floating Islands Normal Stage 6  3
 Furies  Floating Island Nightmare Stage 7  2
 Dragonflies  Ice Caves Nightmare Stage 7  2
 Serpentflies  Ice Caves Nightmare Stage 1  3
 Snakeflies  Ice Caves Normal Stage 4  2
 Young Griffins  Volcano Normal Stage 2  2
 Griffins  Volcano Nightmare Stage 3  3
 Evolved Griffins  Volcano Nightmare Stage 6  2
 Spirit Cubs  Mystic Forest Advanced Stage 1  2
 Spirit Foxes  Mystic Forest Nightmare Stage 3  3
 Kitsunes  Mystic Forest Nightmare Stage 6  2
 Centaurs  Mystic Forest Advanced Stage 3  3
 Evolved Centaurs  Mystic Forest Nightmare Stage 7  2
 Ninja  Sunken City Normal Stage 6  4
Samurai   Sunken City Normal Stage 7   2
 Evolved Samurai  Sunken City Advanced Stage 7  2
 Masaru Monks  Sunken City Normal Stage 6  4
 Unicorn Foals World Tree Mountain Advanced Stage 2  3
 Unicorns World Tree Mountain Normal Stage 5  4
Evolved Unicorns  World Tree Mountain Nightmare Stage 7  3
 Shieldguards Fire Maze Normal Stage 3  4
 Rune Sentinels Fire Maze Normal Stage 2  2
 Ghosts Wasteland Advanced Stage 3  6
 Stalkers Wasteland Normal Stage 6  6
 Spectres Wasteland Normal Stage 6  6
 Soulless Striders Wasteland Normal Stage 3  4
 Skeleton Warrior Wasteland Normal Stage 2  2
 Skeleton Mage Wasteland Normal Stage 3  2
 Wolf Cub Mystic Forest Normal Stage 1  3
Wolf    Mystic Forest Normal Stage 4  4
Silverback  Mystic Forest Advanced Stage 6  4


Elemental Guardians Book Farming

Getting a steady supply of books from the Elemental Towers or Tower Of Houses areas in the Dragonmists Isles is critical to evolving your creatures to their next level and then upgrading their skills so you can have an edge in PvP.

Fire Tower and Water Tower are often the easiest to farm because their end bosses don't use as many special abilities that drag the fights on longer. You don't usually need a specialized team or specific glyph combos to farm these areas.

On the other end, you absolutely need heal blockers (such as Water Felicore or Wind Gargoyle Whelp) for Earth Tower in order to overcome the dragon's constant self-healing. High resistance creatures or creatures with full immunity glyph sets are more useful for Air Tower to avoid the constant negative status effects in later stages.

The skill book drop rate starts at a measly 1% at stage 3 of the Towers, meaning you will get a book about 1 out of every 100 battles, which isn't helpful at all considering the energy cost to farm these areas. The drop rate then increases to:

  • 2% at stage 5
  • 3% at stage 7
  • 5% at stage 9
  • 6% at stage 10

In other words, there's no point in farming the 4, 6, or 8 stages of the Elemental Towers, since they are harder then previous stages without offering any increase in the chance to get a book for upgrading skills and evolving creatures.

When you run out of energy and need to head to the Arena, there's more opportunity for book farming if you play carefully. Getting 25 consecutive Arena wins results in an immediate 3 skill book bonus, which essentially means you automatically get to evolve your best creature.

25 wins with no losses in between sounds like a next to impossible proposition, unless you game the system. To get this achievement, make constant use of the ability to switch to the next player until you find someone with an extremely weak defense.

Be on the lookout for someone with all 3 star or low level 4 star creatures, or even someone who has recently ranked up their creatures and only has 1 creature positioned in their defense. If you are picky and use some seals to refresh the player list after rotating through 5 options, getting to 25 Arena wins doesn't take too long.

 By spending seals and seeking out weak players, you can get to 25 wins easily

More Elemental Guardians Tips & Guides

Looking to master every element of this gacha game and dominate in PvP or help out your guild with active quest completion? Check out our Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians guides here:

Fortnite End Game Guide: Tips on How the Pros Win Wed, 18 Jul 2018 20:23:20 -0400 Ty Arthur

You're finally at the point where you manage to consistently make it to the top 10 - 20 ranked spots in a Fortnite match, but now the question arises: how do you actually win during the end game?

This is what sets the amateurs and wannabees from the pros in Battle Royale matches as they learn to adapt quickly to other player strategies and stay alive as the storm circle closes.

If you find yourself struggling to be the last combatant alive and always manage to get killed in the Fortnite end game, we've got all the tips and strategies you need to finally snag that elusive Victory Royale.

How To Win In Fortnite

Fortnite is all about making it to the #1 position as the last player standing, and not about racking up the most kills. Sure, you can level up and gain bragging rights by getting kills with specific weapons, but that doesn't help you actually win.

If you get 98 kills and are sniped by the last player hiding as a bush, you still lose. It's entirely possible to win a match with 1 kill, or even with 0 kills if you manage to get the second to last player standing to accidentally kill themselves.

To reach that #1 Victory Royale position you need to be thinking sneakily and defensively (until the very end game, anyway, at which point it's time to go full aggressive). Not being seen at all is much better than getting into a firefight and coming out the victor with reduced health and ammo.

To make it to the end game, either land in an unmarked location to stay away from the early fire fights, or land in a marked location that gets significantly less foot traffic and has more cover, like Wailing Woods.  

While waiting for the storm to shrink for the end game, make sure to throw up walls before healing, but even more important, just throw them up the second you hear gunfire in the late game. Better safe than sorry. If you go for a supply drop, always box yourself in with walls first as well.

Pro players assign the wall, stairs, and floor building bindings to various mouse buttons for instantaneous building so you don't have to be struggling to find the F1 - F5 keys while getting shot at. You could even bind the wall building to the spacebar key, as it's frankly more useful than jumping. 

 Key bindings are critical to getting that half second edge over the enemy

This is critical because in most circumstances, height means winning. Ramp rushing in particular can be the difference between victory and defeat, especially in the end game when both players have tons of weaponry.

When in a fire fight you can't avoid, throw up two staircases and a floor platform (particularly if the other player is currently reloading), then hit them from above on the high ground while they scramble to find find cover. Unless you are facing off against an expert builder, they won't be able to make a fort quickly enough to defend themselves.

This strategy changes slightly when you are in a sniper fight, however. In this instance, building wider rather than taller to make it harder for the sniper to guess where you will pop out next.

While making your way to the final circle for the end game battle, always try to pick up explosives along the way, which are critical to the end game as there will almost certainly be forts involved (or barring explosives, hope for a minigun to take out their walls quickly instead).

End Game Building Strategy

However you get there, one of the most effective strategies to dominating in the end game is to simply wait in the final circle and barricade yourself as much as possible. This isn't as exciting as going full aggro across the entire match, but it's much more likely you will survive this way.

While waiting for the final opponents to arrive as the storm shrinks, take the time to reload everything so you don't have to lose any precious seconds when the final fire fight arrives.

While building your final fort, you can get sneaky by building on top of an existing structure if one is present, or instead just build a large and obvious heavily fortified position if you have the resources. Once constructed, wait in an inconspicuous corner of your fort and let the last player come to you.

If you have the time and resources, building multiple bases and using the launch pad to move between them is an excellent strategy for keeping clear line of sight and hitting enemies from above as they enter the final circle. 

Countering End Game Builders

You will very likely find yourself in a situation having to counter another player utilizing the exact same end game tactic. There are two ways to handle this.

The first is with the aforementioned explosives. C4, stickies, grenades, rocket launchers, etc. can take down walls quickly (or you can use a minigun if you got lucky and found one). You can run into a problem here, however, if you get a player really good at spamming walls, and then it all comes down to the luck of the draw of who gets off the first shot. 

The second way is to not even bother trying to destroy the walls, but just instead build stairs and go above the fort, as many players don't often think of building full roof tiles for complete coverage. If you have healing items, you can even wait till the storm shrinks and hang out inside the damaging portion of the storm to fire down and force them into a choke point in their own fort.

If you know they are hiding in their fort and you have a structure to prevent line of sight (like a large building) make sure to use it to your advantage to quietly build above their fort without them noticing and then hit hard and fast from above.

In this instance, an extremely effective tactic is to build above them, jump down towards the enemy fort, fire off a rocket launcher round as you are falling to destroy their cover, then switch immediately to a shotgun or other high powered weapon as you land to fire as soon as they break from cover.

Be careful when utilizing this strategy and keep in mind the recent Fortnite shotgun nerf. You can no longer employ the tactic of switching between shotguns repeatedly in your inventory for instant firing without having to reload, so keep other weapons handy, especially if they have a high rate of fire.

 While still useful, this is no longer the be-all, end-all of Fortnite weapons

For those who manage to consistently win, what do you think of our end game Fortnite strategies, and what tips would you offer to players who are finally making it into the top 10 but struggle to win? Sound off in the comments section below! 

Still getting the hang of the 100 player Battle Royale matches? Be sure to peruse these other Fortnite guides so you can get up to speed and earn a #1 Victory Royale:

Fear The Wolves Guide: Best Drop Locations Wed, 18 Jul 2018 16:37:00 -0400 Zack Palm

The key to winning a battle royale game goes beyond knowing about the weapons at your disposal. You have to find the best locations to land to get a head start of the competition. In Fear The Wolves, having an ideal starting location can mean the difference between being sent back to the main menu and advancing to the top 10.

Because the circle works a little differently in Fear The Wolves than other battle royale games you need to remain on your toes. Here's a break down of some of the best starting locations you can land at to give yourself the best start!

The Northern Portion

North of Yanov

When your helicopter's path starts out at the northwest point of the map, think about hitting this location. If you land around here you can run towards the small village to north, grab some decent gear, and then dash to the village to the east or the one to the south, closest to Yanov. While you glide down to this position you can watch your competition and make any brass decisions, such as making a hard turn to Yanov, Denisovichi, or Chistogalovka.

Though, be warned you're going to need radiation equipment to enter Yanov. You may want to hit this city after you've already acquired some gear.

South of Chistogalovka

This location is for when you're feeling bold. Because of the river to your east, if you drop here you're left with fewer options of where you can choose to land. When you land near this location, try to prioritize items and gear that protect you against radiation. This way you can travel towards to the west Shepelichi or the east to RLS "Duga" to find some high quality gear, giving you an even further edge against your competitors. 

Though, don't be surprised if you find three or four other players dropping with you. This location has proven to be quite popular.

West of NovoShepelichi

Unfortunately, if you want to land here you'll only be able to do in special cases. When your plane starts you out on the northwest portion of the map, you can confidently choose this area. However, keep in mind other players may have the same idea as you and will drop with you. You're going to rush into buildings if you want to survive here. The option is if your plane ends near here.

The great part about choosing this location is you can immediately rush into NovoShepelichi, or wrap around it to the smaller villages before heading south.

West of Rudnia

This area mirrors the first location, though a number of small clustered homes are spread out. Ideally, you'd want to have your plane route coming from the northwest point and heading down, southeast. You'll have enough distance to hit the middle village, grab what you can, and decide if you want to rush to Rudnia or Rechitsa. The problem with going to Rechitsa is the fact the radiation may already be closing in, cutting you off from this town.

You can risk going to the smaller villages around it to enter the city. There's plenty of decisions when you plan to aim for this area. Don't let the red outlines frighten you! This may deter other players, but you can use it to your advantage to find the best loot.

West of Kopachi

The final location for the northern portion of the map focuses on giving you the chance to run into an enemy far sooner than some of the other options. You can choose to land in Kopachi, or stick to the outskirts to find useful gear in one of the nearby villages. You can confidently change your choice based on how many other players are flying to land near you. Though you may want to land closer to them so you get in as many early kills as you can.

Of the northern locations, this is likely the most risky. If you're not the first person to land, you may find yourself without equipment and back on the main menu waiting for another queue!

The Southern Portion

West of Korogod

This is a great starting location that provides you with plenty of options. When you aim for this place, based on the amount of players dropping near you, you can choose up to four different house-filled villages to head towards. Each one comes with a decent number of potential loot drops. When you're feeling really bold, veer your drop to aim to land in Korogod and try your luck in the city!

Because of the other two cities situated close by you can always run through those. If you survive. 

South of Llintsy

Like the first location in the southern portion, you have several choices available to you. Not only do you have two cities to pick from, but plenty of smaller villages to dive into. Depending on how many players land nearby, or with you, you may want to choose a small cluster of houses and then immediately head into one of the cities. This way, you'll have a small supply of firepower to take with you when you venture into a city.

While I was playing, I found it better to stick to this strategy. Several times when I dropped into a city I struggled to find a weapon and came up short in multiple early-game encounters.


The direct middle may prove a troublesome location, or entirely dead, depending on how aggressive the other players in your match feel. You may not find out until you drop and see the other parachutes around you. If you see a couple, attempt to angle your parachute down so you can land directly in front of a building. But, when you have too many players around you, try to land in one of the building clusters to the east of Kalinovskaya. 

You can drop at that location and then divert further east, or continue south to try your lucky closer to Zapolie. It all depends on the situation and how many shots you hear.

West of Lelev

Now we're getting to the tougher options. Landing around here may get you into a firefight sooner than you'd like. During my matches, I found several players enjoyed to land inside Lelev and then make their way west. If you're feeling confident, dive straight into the city and try your luck! Otherwise, pick one of the small clusters of houses to make your start and then follow the road south.

There's a large forest to the west of his area to the two other cities. You could run towards those after you've grabbed a few weapons, but you may want to stick to the outskirts and pick off other players.

North of Kamenka

The final recommended location! Much like the previous location, this area is going to get hot, depending on your helicopter's flight path. Luckily for you, there's several options available to you at this junction. You can veer your course to go to Zalesie, Opacici, Kamenka, or visit one of the other smaller clusters to grab precious loot before venturing into the cities.

In this area, players will definitely have plenty of weapon drops at their disposal. You'll have to rely on your speed to beat them when you land here. This drop zone can prove to be a great starting position for you to your shooting practice! You'll have plenty of target practice.


Those are all of the locations I think you should choose from during your first few rounds of Fear The Wolves! Don't be afraid to experiment, as this is a new battle royale and plenty of strategies will emerge during the game's development.

For more on Fear The Wolves, keep it here at GameSkinny.

The Most Powerful Glyph Combo In Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians Tue, 17 Jul 2018 15:11:33 -0400 Ty Arthur

With a huge array of creatures available in Might & Magic: Elemental Guardiansthere is a staggering number of possible strategies for region grinding and PvP.

While having a viable team combo is critical to winning in the arena, glyph sets are how one player sets their creatures apart from any others.

Wondering what the absolute best Elemental Guardians glyphs you should be using? Let's dive into understanding how glyph sets work and picking the one best stat to increase! 

Elemental Guardians Glyph Basics

While you will get plenty of glyphs just by playing through the storyline's Shattered Island areas, you'll need to farm the the Glyph Dungeon in the Dragonmist Isles if you really want to improve your 4- and 5-star creatures for viable PvP fodder. 

Proper glyph placement is often more important than rank, level, or even evolution. Why? Because it's often a better indicator of how well a creature will perform. If two parties with the best creatures of equal level are facing off, the team with the better glyphs will win.

Over time, you will need to change glyphs as you acquire new ones. Removing common glyphs only costs 1,500 crystals, but epic glyphs get extremely expensive, with some commanding 25,000 a pop! 

Free glyph removal usually comes around once a month as a special event, so hold off on changing your glyph sets until this event shows up -- unless you have a huge surplus of crystals at your disposal.

In some cases, common glyphs are actually better than rarer ones. While they will have fewer sub-stat bonuses, their upgrade costs are far, far cheaper, so you will end up with better stats more quickly while spending fewer crystals.

A  Glyph removal gets pricey when using rarer glyphs

How to Choose Glyphs

The main question when assign glyphs is often, "Which glyph do I choose?".  Choosing between a glyph that grants a percentage boost or flat boost isn't always clear cut. The answer is that it depends entirely on the creature.

With the nat 2 star creatures you start summoning early on, the flat boost is almost always going to better. Later, when you summon nat 4 creatures and evolve them (or upgrade creatures manually to 5 stars), the percentage glyhps end up far, far outclassing the flat boosts.

The best glyphs to utilize can vary depending on what region you are currently farming. The final wave dragon bosses in the Air Elemental Tower, for instance, tend to use negative status effects, so piling on Resistance-focused glyphs can help you survive while farming air evolution materials.

Some creatures have special attacks that gain bonuses to damage based on specific stats, like defense or total max health. In those cases, a six-glyph set based on one of those stats can be the best way to go for maximum damage output.

Those specific instances aside, there is one particular glyph combo that is far and away the best way to upgrade your creatures. It helps you dominate in the PvP arena and gives yourself an edge in any region, from the Shattered Islands to the Dragonmist areas -- and even the limited-time secret dungeons.

Best Elemental Guardians Glyph Set

To be viable as a core team that can compete, your creature stats should be around 1k+ for defense, 1.2k+ for attack, and 10k+ for HP. However, those stats should occur naturally through leveling up and evolving. 

While it would seem like the HP and/or attack stats would be the ones to bump up through glyphs, there is no question that speed is the best stat in the game. Speed affects how quickly a creature's turn-bar fills. With higher speed, you not only attack first but use turns more quickly and refresh your ability cool downs faster.

If you go first, you can get the win by using skills that prevent the other team from functioning properly. Whether you have creatures that block healing, prevent buffs, paralyze, poison, or blind, you want your creatures going first to neutralize the opponent's team build.

Speed is also a massive boon for any creature that has a percentage chance to take more than one turn in a row, like the earth ninja. While there are more powerful creatures out there with better abilities, you can turn the tide by attacking three times in a row with high speed.

 Increasing speed is the way to get PvP wins once you have a killer team build

Picking Speed Bonus Glyphs

A creature gets a +10 bonus to speed when you group together three -- and then eventually six -- haste-type glyphs. This isn't the only way to get a speed boost with a glyph combo, however.

This issue is a common misunderstanding with new players -- the glyph type controls what bonus you get for having multiples of the same type. But any type of glyph can potentially have bonuses to any of the stats. 

For instance, if you have a tank creature with huge HP reserves, vitality glyphs are the way to go. But be sure to pick individual vitality glyphs that give speed bonuses. You get the best of both worlds this way, gaining a speed boost from the individual glyph and then a 20% bonus to health on top by using multiple vitality glyphs.

Going full speed on all glyphs leaves you weak in other areas, however, so your best glyph combo should look like this: speed/speed/speed/defense/hp/hp.


What do you think is the best glyph combo to use in Might & Magic, and what team build are you utilizing for PvP wins? Sound off in the comments below, and be sure to check out our Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians guides here:


Might And Magic: Elemental Guardians Rerolling Guide Tue, 17 Jul 2018 14:45:05 -0400 Ty Arthur

Whenever there's a randomized summoning element in a mobile gatcha' game, there will inevitably be a temptation to "reroll" by deleting game data in hopes of getting a better starting unit.

With more than 200 creatures available at launch, your success in Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians can vary wildly depending on which creatures you summon in the early game.

In this guide, we'll go over how to reroll, as well as what to look out for when rerolling. 

A Warning About Rerolling in Elemental Guardians

While Might & Magic Elemental Guardians shares a whole lot in common with any other gatcha' game, there is a key difference in the summoning drop rate to be aware of. You get new summons constantly, and the game revolves heavily around destroying old creatures to power up new ones.

Frankly, there's really no point in rerolling in most circumstances because you will have a constant deluge of new creatures arriving in your roster as you play. The time it takes to reroll would be much better spent just playing the game and getting new summons as you will eventually get the creature you want anyway.

Unlike many other gatcha' titles, those lowly nat 2 creatures can easily be ranked up and evolved to be perfectly viable combatants in any region -- and even in several tiers of PvP.

The achievements in each region -- like winning battles with two creatures, destroying specific numbers of enemy types, and so on -- usually grant you free summon crystals to get new creatures. You also get multiple free summons a day without having to do anything.

Just simply using energy and completing achievements will get you better creatures than taking the time to uninstall or use an emulator to reroll. 

However, for those of you who are used to automatically rerolling any gatcha' game, here's what you need to know.

How To Reroll in Elemental Guardians

You always get the same creature in the first two summons no matter what, so there's no point in trying to reroll the game's early creatures. After that point, however, the summons become randomized, so that's where you may want to reroll if you keep only receiving nat 2 creatures with poor stats.

First up, do not link your Google Play or Apple account to the game unless you are using the multiple device method (method 2) listed below! At that point, even fully deleting all data won't let you start over.

Method 1

After getting the third summon in Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians, close the app entirely and then uninstall. Next, access the internal storage on your device and navigate to the folder labeled com.ubisoft.runeguard (on Android, this is typically found in Internal Storage -> Android -> Data) and delete that folder entirely.

Now, look for a second folder with the same name -- com.ubisoft.runeguard -- in another location and delete it as well (on Android, the second folder is usually found in Internal Storage -> Android -> Obb).

If your device has a removable SD card, additional game data may be saved there as well, so navigate to the SD card folder (rather than the main internal storage folder) and delete every instance of com.ubisoft.runeguard there as well.

If your mobile OS has a folder search function, just search "ubisoft" and it should pull up all three folders at once rather than searching them all down one by one.

A screenshot showing where to delete the mobile data for Might & Magic Elemental Guardians Deleting the Might & Magic Elemental Guardians mobile data

Method 2

A second method also exists if you have multiple devices and don't mind starting over repeatedly. Download Elemental Guardians on each device and then link the game to your Google Play or Apple account.

After the third summon, switch over to a secondary device and load the game. Even if you linked your account, you will be prompted to start the main story from the beginning due to playing on a new device.

From that point forward, you will be prompted to choose which version of the game you want to keep whenever you log in, so you can go with the one that got the better summon. You will lose all progress on the version of the game you don't keep, however, so this is only helpful if you are just getting started and happen to have a couple of tablets or phones on hand.


What was your best starting pull and did you manage to get a killer nat 4 without rerolling? Let us know your best summon in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians guides here:

Galak-Z Variant Mobile Beginner's Strategy and Tips Guide Tue, 17 Jul 2018 11:22:47 -0400 Victoria Banks

So you jumped into Galak-Z and were breezing through each sector like a pro, but suddenly, “Rambo”ing your way through space wasn’t cutting it. And now you need a new way to defeat your enemies. Well, you’re not alone.

Galak-Z Variant is one of the few free mobile games that offers extensive and diverse gameplay with a challenge (it's basically the mobile version of Galak-Z Variant S). If you’re up for that challenge and want to improve your performance in the game while progressing as fast as you can, you'll want to have the best tips and tricks at your disposal.

This Galak-Z Variant guide covers the pros and cons of using a mech or fighter ship, using your environment thoughtfully, collecting bots, decrypting relics, and applying upgrades.

Choosing Mech Suit or Fighter Ship: What They're Best Used For 

The first decision you will face is choosing your method of navigation and combat. Your character, A-Tak, can switch between piloting either a mech suit called Galak-Z or a fighter ship called Galak-S. At first, it’s simple: you can pretty much play as either to progress. However, it soon becomes apparent that each vehicle and their respective weapons are going to be useful in different situations. So how do you choose and what’s the difference?

The largest contrast between the two is this:

  • The mech is a short ranged, melee combat machine with a front shield and grappling abilities.
  • The ship is long ranged with dodge abilities, speed, and rockets.

Each has their own value, but to determine which is best to use, you should consider mobility and combat against specific opponents.

Some environments are tricky to navigate and have tight spaces. In these situations, it is usually easier to control and navigate with a mech. However, other locations may be open and require the speed and long range weapons of your ship. You should use a similar method to determine which to choose in a fight.

Study Your Opponents Before Battle

Before entering each location, be sure to check the stats of your opponent in the mission menu screen. You’ll find that some are dangerous to fight at close range, such as opponents with shotguns or other close-ranged, high-damage weapons. For these, you’ll want to fight at a distance with your ship.

Other opponents may be faster and more challenging to hit at long range, such as vulture void raiders. For these fast moving targets, you may want to close the distance with a mech and destroy them with melee combat.

Be sure to check your enemy types before each battle and select an appropriate vehicle.

Take Advantage of the Environment

You may think the environment is a dangerous enemy as well, and you would be correct. But it can also be a great tool for hindering and destroying others. The most important elements to success in Galak-Z Variant are thinking quickly, being crafty, and using strategy to best your opponents.

Here are some tricks that you can test out the next time you’re in a showdown with another ship or beetle.

Use Plants to Explode or Shock Enemies

One of the items you can use to your advantage are plants on stems. These plants, if run into, will explode and send dangerous bulbs flying in all directions. Some of these include pink bulbs that stick to your ship and slow you down. Others send out explosive damage or electric shocks that temporarily disable your abilities.

Be careful and avoid hitting these yourself. However, if you use your ship to fire at these plants, you can send the bulbs colliding into your enemies, thus hindering and damaging them. The best way to do this is to draw your opponent toward the plant and quickly shoot them from a safe distance.

Creative Grappling

You can also use the grappling ability on your mech to throw your enemies into danger. In the heat of battle, it can be easy to use your special ability without much thought, but you will want to use your grappling ability strategically.

Fire the grapple when you’re in a pinch, and once you have an enemy in your clutches, try throwing him into explosive pipes, spikes, and fire pits! This will deal an extra load of damage and make your job easier. You can also try throwing enemies into one another, damaging many at a time.

Understanding Bots 201: What to Look For

No matter how crafty you are in combat though, you won’t get far without upgrading and collecting bots. Bots should be your priority. Collecting them will offer improvements to your core stats such as movement, attack, defense, and relic decryption (covered in the next section).

These bots offer a unique set of perks to improve your ship, and they can be leveled up with experience points and bot parts. Though their importance is not immediately apparent in the first couple of sectors, you’ll find that you’re going to need a range of bots to face more challenging enemies.

Rather than choosing random bots and rushing in, you should consider the following when choosing them:

  • Speed
  • Damage
  • Range
  • Health

You should also study the special abilities of your opponent. For example, if you are going up against Void Shotgun Hyena, who charges in to deal heavy damage, you should have equipped bots that can improve your escape mobility and provide strong long-range damage. Bots offer these changes, so you can adapt to your enemy.

Not only do bots upgrade your ship and mech, but they also can be used as opponents against other players in “Bot Battles” You can select a team to improve your chances of stumping other gamers who try to face your robots.

Relics: Get Them Now, Not Later

Relics are another component you’ll become quite preoccupied with. These are items you should spend time collecting in each sector for your bot to decrypt.

Essentially, relics contain salvage, bot parts, and more importantly, components for ship and mech upgrades, which you uncover after their decryption is complete.

Though you may survive without ship upgrades for a while, you’ll find it increasingly difficult to succeed without collecting relics from previous sectors you have visited. Ship and mech upgrades can be used strategically to counter your enemies, and you’ll need them as your foes grow more difficult to defeat. In the long run, it will be worth your time and effort to collect relics.

Remember, relics only contain parts of upgrades. You will need to continue collecting in the same location to acquire all the parts to a single upgrade. After decrypting enough relics to have a full upgrade, the location will turn green with a check mark, indicating there is nothing more you need to acquire.

Decrypting relics does take some time, however. You can expedite the upgrade process by paying with crash coins, which decrypts a relic immediately. But the more powerful the relic, the more time and crash coins it will cost. You’ll find that you can’t always rely on expediting, so what is the most efficient way of decrypting relics?

Efficiency's the Name of the Game

First, you should always have one of your bots decrypting a relic, and ideally, you should have numerous relics in your bot’s query. Your items will decrypt while you are in and out of the game, so your time is being used efficiently. Let your phone notify you when a relic is decrypted, and once you collect your upgrade parts, be sure to send the next relic to your bot for decrypting.

If you prefer to play while you wait, you can continue your journey to other sectors or spend your time collecting other relics, but know that you can only hold a limited amount of relics. If you reach your limit, you will be unable to collect more until you have room in your query, but you will still be able to progress through sectors.

Tips on Which Upgrades to Use and Why


After you have obtained ship and mech upgrades from decrypted relics, you may start mixing and matching immediately for your fighting preferences. However, the decision on what upgrades to add should always be determined by your opponent, similar to how your selection of bots should be based on who you are trying to defeat.

Again, think about the perks and special abilities of specific bugs, raiders, and imperial fighters. Your mission menu provides the stats for each opponent you will face.

Though there are plenty of options to choose from, the following upgrades have been some of my favorite and useful in during my time with Galak-Z Variant. Here's what they offer and where to find them. 

Your Top 5 Upgrades
  • Tower Shields -- This upgrade to your mech is the best all-around improvement for your shield, an essential tool to keep your health from depleting. Tower shields is one of the only upgrades that offers significant improvements to three shield qualities: barrier health, barrier parry, and barrier size.
    • Sector 8.4 -- Tower Shields (I):
      • Barrier health increase to 32.
      • 30% increase in barrier size
      • 10% chance for your barrier to parry attacks, 
    • Sector 14.2 -- Tower Shields (II):
      • Barrier Health increase to 48
      • 40% increase in barrier size
      • 15% chance to parry
    • Sector 17.3 -- Tower Shields (III)
      • Barrier Health increase to 64
      • 50% increase in barrier size
      • 20% chance to parry
  • Bullet Proofish Hull -- This upgrade starts off small but offers armor protection from your ship's main source of damage, enemy fire.
    • Sector 7.5 -- Bullet Proofish Hull (I)
      • Health increased by 16
      • Projectile damage resistance increased by 18%
    • Sector 13.6 -- Bullet Proofish Hull (II)
      • Health increased by 25
      • Projectile damage resistance increased by 24%
    • Sector 17.8 -- Bullet Proofish Hull (III)
      • Health increased by 36
      • Projectile damage resistance increased by 30%
  • Revved Up -- A vital tool for your survival is your ability to evade danger and close in on targets when ready. This upgrade improves your ship's speed and agility.
    • Sector 1.3 -- Revved Up (I)
      • Top speed increased by 10
      • Turbo speed increased by 18
    • Sector 10.6 -- Revved up (II)
      • Top speed increased by 15
      • Turbo speed increased by 27
    • Sector 17.5 -- Revved up (III)
      • Top speed increased by 21
      • Turbo speed increased by 36
  • Knockback Tips -- These fighter ship bullets are incredibly useful for keeping enemies at bay and depleting their health. As long as you can make the shot, knockback tips will momentarily keep foes from dealing extensive damage because each shot will, as the name suggests, knock them back.
    • Sector 3.4 -- Knockback Tips (I)
      • Damage increased by 3
      • Laser Knockback increased by 20
    • Sector 9.2 -- Knockback Tips (II)
      • Damage increased by 5
      • Laser Knockback increased by 30
    • Sector 15.7 -- Knockback Tips (III)
      • Damage increased by 7
      • Laser Knockback increased by 40
  • Power Blade -- Though it is one of the first upgrades you can earn, power blade is essential for dealing damage from your mech's primary weapon.
    • Sector 2.2 -- Power Blade (I)
      • Damage increased by 4
      • Big attack knockback increased by 70
      • Damage to bugs increased to 25%
    • Sector 9.5 -- Power Blade (II)
      • Damage increased by 6
      • Big attack knockback increased by 110
      • Damage to bugs increased to 30%
    • Sector 9.5 -- Power Blade (III)
      • Damage increased by 9
        Big attack knockback increased by 140
        Damage to bugs increased to 35%

Though these are a few strong upgrades against most enemies, remember that you may need to switch it up depending on mission combat requirements.

Select weapons and body components that will actually be useful against the enemies you face. You can always test run your upgrades before missions to experience their effectiveness first hand. Apply those you feel most comfortable with and those which offer counters to your enemies.

If you are still stuck on which to choose, you can never go wrong with more damage, health, or shield. Keep selecting new and stronger upgrades from higher sectors as you progress, and this will improve your chances of success!

Get Out There and Fight!


Now that you have these tips and tricks under your belt, it’s time to get back out there.

Remember to:

  • Use your environment to your advantage
  • Always collect relics and bots
  • Carefully select your vehicle, bots, and upgrades based on your enemy

Use these strategies to approach fights with careful thought and consideration. Doing so will save you the trouble of exploding in space and having to restart missions.

Have fun, and see you, space pilot.

Make sure to stay tuned to GameSkinny for more news, info, and guides on Galak-Z Variant, as well as other SCHMUPs and space-shooters!

Fortnite Season 5, Week 2 Battle Star Guide: Search Between an Oasis, Rook Archway, and Dinosaurs Tue, 17 Jul 2018 06:18:05 -0400 Sergey_3847

Season 5, Week 2 of Fortnite is here, and with comes a brand-new hard Battle Star challenge. 

If you've been playing since Season 5 dropped last week, you'll already know that a new desert location has popped up on the map. And this is where you'll be looking for the Battle Star this week: somewhere between an Oasis, Rook Archway, and Dinosaurs.

If you don't know where this location is, then simply follow our guide below for the exact location of the Battle Star.

Close Up of the Fortnite Map Showing Paradise Palms

The first hint in this week's challenge is the Oasis. The hint directly points to the area in the western part of Desert Palms. There you will find a lush oasis with palms and a pond of clear water. 

Then, you need to move a bit to the north and there you will see a bridge connecting two desert hills. This is your second point of reference -- Rook Archway.

Finally, you will find Dinosaurs standing a bit to the south of the archway on the highway. They're really easy to spot as there are plenty standing around.

Now, when you have all three spots figured out, you will see a hill in between these three locations. This means that the Battle Star should be on top of it. If you're lucky, you will also find a treasure chest there. So it's a win-win situation.

In order to claim this week's Battle Star, you need to approach it and interact with it. Once you do that, you've completed Week 2's Battle Star challenge.


That's all for this week's Season 5 challenge. For other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, check out the list below:

Fortnite Season 5, Week 2 Challenge Guide: Score a 3 Point Shot at Different Basketball Courts Tue, 17 Jul 2018 06:17:48 -0400 Sergey_3847

Fortnite's Season 5, Week 2 is upon us and that means brand-new challenges await. One of the most exciting -- and most interesting -- challenges in Week 2 is scoring a 3 point shot at three or five different basketball courts scattered over the Fortnite map. 

In total, there are seven basketball courts on the Season 5 map, so you can choose the ones that are closest to your landing spot.

Don't know where those basketball courts are? Follow our quick guide below for all the basketball courts locations and how to find them.

All Basketball Court Locations

Fortnite map showing all basketball court locations

The two best spots to land for this challenge are to the southeast of Retail Row or Paradise Palms, and to the west near Greasy Grove or Tilted Towers.

There are three different basketball courts located very close to each other if you pick these landing spots first, so you can finish the challenge rather quickly by following this strategy.

But if you happen to land in the northern part of the map, then you can go to Junk Junction and score a few goals there.

One smaller court is located to the west of Tilted Towers right at the new mini soccer stadium. And the other one can be found at the racing track east of Retail Row.

However, one of the most exciting basketball courts can be seen at the new desert location -- in its very center. It's, of course, not necessary to go here to finish the challenge, but this court is hands-down the coolest one of the lot. 

How to Score 3 Points

In order to score a 3 point shot, you need to stand beyond the 3 point arc and closer to the middle of the court. When you hit the basket, you will see confetti streaming from it, meaning that you made it. Do it on each of the different courts and you will finish the challenge.


That is all for the Season 5, Week 2 basketball challenge, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

Octopath Traveler Guide: Complete Shrine Locations List Mon, 16 Jul 2018 12:18:12 -0400 Zack Palm

Like any good roleplaying game, you're going to find plenty of depth in Octopath TravelerAs you venture further into the game you're going to want to give your characters a wider range of abilities and skills to use in combat. One way to do this is by giving them secondary job classes.

However, in order to unlock these jobs you need to locate their shrines. The shrine locations are scattered throughout Orsterra and you need to find them. While you may discover them during your play through, this guide will break down details about their locations to make locating them easier.

This guide will also list the four advanced job class shrines hidden in the world, each protected by a formidable foe.

Note: All of the areas you're going to travel through to these shrines are infested with monsters prepared to take on a party of level 20 characters. 

Shrine of the Flamebearer (Cleric)

You'll find the Shrine of the Flamebearer located in the Frostlands, in the northern part of the map on the Western Stillsnow Wilds path. When you're on this road, find the signpost on the eastern part of the area. Once there, head south and you should find yourself going up a small hill and then going down it. At the bottom of the hill, go to the left and you should see small rocks poking out the snow. Continue until you see a small torch outside a cave, which is the entrance for the shrine.

Shrine of the Prince of Thieves (Thief)

The Shrine of the Prince of Thieves is located in the Cliftlands, the western most region on the South Quarrycrest Pass. You'll find this shrine on the left side of the map. When you're leaving the city Quarrycrest, follow the path out of the city and continue going left and stop right before the second bridge. Instead of crossing it, proceed to the left and go down a small pathway. This should take you under the bridge, to the entrance of the shrine.

Shrine of the Lady of Grace (Dancer)

The Shrine of the Lady of Grace is located in the Sunlands, the southern most region of Orsterra on the road called the Northern Wellspring Sands. Start at this area's signpost just outside of Wellspring and go up. Proceed to the left, past the guard, and go up until you see a red flag. Do not continue forward. Go to the left and you should find the entrance to the shrine underneath a small stream of running water.

Shrine of the Sage (Scholar)

You will find the Shrine of the Sage in the Flatlands, the region located at the northwestern section of the map on the Western Noblecourt Flats. It's right outside the city of Noblecourt. When you leave the city, go left on the path a short distance before going down the through a field of grass. This will take your party up a small hill, and you should veer them slightly to the left as they continue. Adjust your party's direction to the right once you pass a character standing next to several rocks. You'll find the shrine's entrance carved into the side of a rocky hill. 

Shrine of the Trader (Merchant)

Let's go to the east! The next shrine is the Shrine of the Trader located in the Coastlands, the region set furthest to the east on the Moonstruck coast path. When you arrive in Moonstruck Coast coming from West Goldshore Coast proceed southwest for all of your journey. Eventually, your path will force you to only go west until you arrive to a dead end. Go up to the rock wall and press your characters against it, taking a sharp right. This will take you into the Shrine of the Trader.

You should be careful around this area as the creatures here are prepared to fight level 30 characters.

Shrine of the Huntress (Hunter)

The Shrine of the Huntress is located in the Woodlands, the top left region of the map on the East Victors Hollow Trail. When you're at the signpost proceed north to Victors Hollow. Follow the path and stop when the path forces you to go to the left. Instead of continuing to follow the path go to the right into the forest. You'll find the cave entrance for the Shrine of the Huntress shortly after.

Shrine of the Thunderblade (Warrior)

Time to get your leg day in. The Shrine of the Thunderblade is located in the Highlands, the region on the bottom right of the map on the North Stonegard Pass. When you're at the signpost of this area, go to the left and follow the path. Eventually, you should see a small flag on top of a rock blowing in the wind. Instead of following the path up, go to the left, which should take you down a small slope. The entrance to the shrine is at the bottom of the slope.

Shrine of the Healer (Apothecary)

The final one! To find the Shrine of the Healer go to the Riverlands, the southern region between Cliftlands and the Sunlands, and go to the area called East Saintsbridge Traverse. When at this location's signpost, you'll find you're in the middle of a crossroad. Take to the right path and proceed down it. The path should take you directly cave of the Shrine of the Healer.

Advanced Job Class Shrines

You'll want to make your way these shrines later in the game. Unlike the eight other shrines, you must face a boss in order to gain access to these areas. Make sure you're ready to face them! These foes do not go easy on your party and are best taken on after you reach chapter 4.

Shrine of the Runeblade (Runelord)

The Shrine of the Runelord is located in the Highlands, in the same region you located the Shrine of the Thunderblade on the West Everhold Pass. When you're at this area's signpost, proceed to the right and follow the path. Stop once you've arrived at the fork in the road, and proceed to the right and then down. You'll follow an unmarked pass and eventually make it to the cave entrance for the Shrine of the Runelord's.

Shrine of the Archmagus (Sorcerer)

Time to return to the north for the Shrine of the Archmagus! You'll need to travel to the Woodlands, this is the same region you found the Shrine of the Huntress and you need to be on the East Duskbarrow Trail. When you're traveling from Duskbarrow on the path, follow it all the way, past the signpost, until you arrive to the entrance of an unmarked path shrouded in mist. This path should have you go upwards on the map. Follow it all the way, and at the end you will arrive to the Shrine of the Archmagus.

Shrine of the Warbringer (Warmaster)

We're nearly done! The Shrine of the Warbringer is located in the Riverlands, the same region you found the Shrine of the Healer on the North Riverford Traverse path. When you arrive to this area's signpost, just outside of Riverford, follow the path left. Stop right before you arrive to the small stone bridge. Instead of going up, continue to the left. You should follow an unmarked path to the left, and then down, a short distance before you find yourself at the cave entrance to the shrine.

Shrine of the Starseer (Starseer)

The last one! The Shrine of the Starseer is located in the Flatlands, it's in the same region you discovered the Shrine of the Sage on the Western Wispermill Flats side. When you're leaving the city of Wispermill, proceed down the path to the left, but only for a short distance. Stop immediately after the cut down trees and go upwards, towards the cow farm, and then to the right. You'll find your view blocked by the rocks, but if you continue forward into the rocks you should find your party entering the shrine.


This covers all of the shrines found throughout the Octopath Traveler! For more guides about this game, stay informed with GameSkinny.

Star Ocean Anamnesis Crystal Gaurdian Extermination Event Tips Guide Mon, 16 Jul 2018 12:12:45 -0400 Will Phillips

I’ve been loving Square Enix’s newest mobile title Star Ocean Anamnesis, and part of that is due to it’s constantly updating end game content. Every couple of days there are new missions, that with some grinding, can unlock you some sweet high level loot. Though as the case is with most video game, the good stuff is tucked behind a wall of difficult battles.

For this weekend, SOA is hosting the event Crystal Guardian Extermination. This event will occur every weekend with no end date mentioned. 

Once I started up this new event, I could tell something was off. Simply put, our party on four were doing no damage to the mech enemies. I could tell there were moments when he was taking more damage than others, but I couldn’t wrap my head around why. Well after some research and experimentation, I have uncovered some tips to help you take on this event.

This monster's biggest strength is that it has MASSIVE defense. That’s why most of your attacks barely make a dent in its health bar. They way to get around this is by choosing characters that Boost Critical Hit Chance. Boosting damage is nice as well, but critical hits ignore defense entirely, meaning that critical hits are the best way to take down this foe.

Characters to Bring


She’s great because her rush mode endows the party with +40% increase to critical hit chance for 20 seconds.

This gives a nice window of opportunity for your party members to use their rush modes and actually have them do damage.


She passively gives the party +30% critical hit chance and her Rush gives an insane +60% critical hit chance to the party, which is just insane. 

Unlike Maria, you don’t have to rush to attain this boon. I would say if you had to pick between the two, go with Anne.


He is great for himself and himself alone, he gets a passive +20% critical hit chance and +30% attack.

He’s great if you have other party members that can spread around the increased critical hit chance.


She grants a passive +10% critical hit chance to herself and allies.

This is bonus much lower than Anne’s, but she does make up for it with her abilities that poison her enemies, applying steady damage over time.

As long as you have at least one of these characters, things shouldn’t be too bad. Without them you can still get by, but it will take you forever to be able to complete this mission. Luckily Maria is a pretty common character as of now, so your chances of having one in your party are pretty high.

Tips for the Fight

I recommend doing this event and most other events in multiplayer. It uses only the host's stamina and allows three others to participate for free

If you are the Host of the Party, I recommend having a slot set aside for a tank, a sharpshooter, and a healer. It’s a prolonged fight so a healer is definitely necessary. Tanks are a no brainier. Someone has to keep the boss busy! Sharpshooter is debatable, but given how common Maria is, its a safe bet to get someone that can doll out some crit chance. Your last slot can vary between Attacker and Invoker. This can be up to your preference.

Stage 1

This fight is just a bunch of weenies, so it shouldn’t be any trouble.

Stage 2

Deal with the weenies first as usual. After that you will soon notice that the mech in the back seems somewhat near invincible. It’s only major damage dealing attack is where it jumps up and pounds into the ground. To avoid it just swipe your screen when you see it jump into the air, and you should be out of the way before it comes back down.

If you’re using Maria, I would recommend just using your rush mode on it. Sure you’ll probably get some Yikes! stamps from your teammates, but just know that’s because they don’t understand how the enemy works yet.

Stage 3

Things are gonna be a little rough at the start. Your best bet if to focus the two smaller mechs first, and then move on to the main boss. This will take some time, given that they all have high defense. The fight after that will get considerably easier now that you don’t have to worry about their constant bombing, but the boss is still difficult.  

On top of having a great defense, its offense is nothing to scoff at either. It has a series of high damage, long range attacks that can go off simultaneously.

Stage 3 Boss Attacks

He has 4 different attacks which have no official name as far as I can tell so I’ll do my due diligence and name them myself:

Zip-Zap Attack

Basically just shoots out a ray of electricity that has a lot of hangtime so if you get hit, get moving as soon as possible.

Dark Boomerang Attack

It sends out two dark looking crescents at you, which come back around like a boomerang.

Three Dangerous Blue Orbs

Pretty much what it sounds like, three balls of electricity. I'll update as soon as I get a decent picture of the attack.

Green Balls of Pain

He shoots out a handful of green balls which stay in the arena for a while and move back and forth. They;re pretty easy to dodge on their own, but sometimes they can move in and out of your field of vision, so be careful.

Random Beams of Exploding Death

Multiple Blue Balls will appear around the arena. You will only have a few seconds to get out of the way, because they will soon turn into pillars of light that will deal damage if you’re too close.

Most of the attacks are easy to avoid on their own. Things get tricky when multiple attacks go off at the same time, so it can be tricky to dodge them. Your best best is just to stay far far away if you’re ranged, but if you are a tank or attacker, you’re just gonna have to be vigilant and hope you have a good healer. Just keep in mind that there a good chance you can take a load of damage in a matter of seconds, so if you’re below half health, consider disengaging for a second until your healer realizes your situation.

Stage 3 Boss Phases

The boss has a series of indicators that let you know what state the boss is in. It will constantly cycle in and out of each phase throughout the fight.

Phase 1

If it looks bright, this is its most powerful form. It won’t take hit stun and it seems to be more aggressive with its rate of attacks. This is the time to be playing cautiously and defensively.

Phase 2

After you beat on it for a while, it will gradually become darker. When it looks near black, its rate of attacks decreased and you are able to stun it.

Phase 3

If you score enough attacks on an enemy with symbology, skills or weapons that have an element, an elemental burst will occur and stun the enemy. This is indicated by stars moving around its head.

Usually this will take place after a Rush Mode, given the immense amount of damage dealt. This is your time to lay a beat down on the boss. If you have any characters that can hit enemies into the air, you should use them now. Depending on who is in your party, you can keep it up there for a good while. After the end of this phase however, he usually powers back up to Phase 1. 

That's it for my guide on how to complete this event successfully. Happy hunting, and be sure to check out the other Star Ocean Anamnesis guides on GameSkinny!

Star Ocean Anamnesis Augmentation and Leveling Guide Mon, 16 Jul 2018 11:27:03 -0400 Will Phillips

After completing the main story missions,you might be wondering about how to get your characters to meet their maximum potential. Luckily the game provides you with ample resources in order to make that happen.

Augmentation and Character Leveling

The first thing you should prioritize maxing out your characters. You can Augment your character with will raise their rarity by one star, and subsequently the stats. You will need a 50 small, 15 medium, and 3 large crystals along with 150000 FOL. The color of the crystals should coincide with the characters class color. Red for Attacker, yellow for Defender, blue for Sharpshooter, purple for Invoker, and green for Healer. Rainbow can be used for any class.

You should have all the materials you need from completing missions and gifts the game gives, but if for some reason that is not the case you simply need to go over to the item shop and purchase and Augmentation Set of the same class as the character you are trying to augment.

If you find yourself short on FOL, then check your inventory to see if you have any Platinum Ingots to sell. The ones the game gives you are more than enough to upgrade three characters.

On top of getting these materials, you will also need to make sure that are you character are maxed out at level 60. If not, you need to either grind missions, or use prisms and stones in order to quickly level up your character. To use prisms and stones simply head on over to the Characters Tab, tap on Status Enhancements, and then choose which character you want to level up.

If the stone or prism is rainbow (or Ra.) it will level all character equally. If it mentions a specific color, they will specifically benefit the class of the corresponding color. 

Once you have met these requirements you can then head on over the Characters Tab and then click on Augment.

Simply tap on the character you wish to Augment, and given that you have the necessary materials, it should be as easy as clicking on the Augment button in the bottom right hand corner.

After Augmentation, you character will be brought back down to level one, and will now have a new level cap of 70. Once again, you can choose to be more conservative and grind the good ol’ fashioned way and tackle high level missions and events.


To further enhance your character, you can use items called Starseeds. Each seed is named after the respective stat that it will boost. For example, the HP Starseed will increase your HP. Mind blowing, I know.

The highest valued Starseed is the one that boosts AP. Use these for your main characters. It increases your Action Points which is what determines how many Skills you can use during a fight. You can get the seeds from either the Item Shop or the Seed Mission Event.

Limit Breaking

There is a way to push characters beyond their limits called a Limit BreakThis significantly increases the stats of any given character you choose to do that to.

At first you have to Limit Break by drawing duplicates of the same character. They will synthesize automatically into the Limit broken character. The max number of Limit breaks is different based on the character.

If you obtain a character that has already had the maximum amount of Limit breaks, then you will get Small, Medium or Large Limit Break Crystals you can use to perform a Limit Break on any Character. You can also purchase a L. Limit Breaker Set which gives you two Large Limit Break Crystals from the item shop. 

Leveling Weapons and Accessories 

After that you can level up your items as well. It doesn’t seem to be as easy to max out as it was for character, but you can boost them up a little for some increased stats. I would only recommend doing this for 4-5* items. Simply go to the items tab, select enhance items, select the item you wish to enhance, and then choose lesser items to sacrifice.

There are items particularly good for enhancing weapons called Hammers.

The items good for enhancing accessories are called Thread.

These items can’t be used for anything else, so don’t feel bad about using them.

You can also increase the level cap of an item by enhancing an item with another Item of the same name. This increases the max level of an item by 2. This will be difficult for 5* items given their scarcity, so don’t fret too much if you can’t increase their cap right away.

And that covers everything there is to cover about upgrading everything you possibly can. Now there should be nothing in your way from tackling that sweet sweet end game content.

Check out our other Star Ocean Anamnesis guides here on GameSkinny!

Identity V Beginner's Guide: How to Survive and Hunt Through the Night Mon, 16 Jul 2018 09:46:10 -0400 Autumn Fish

Identity V is a 1v4 horror game where one player acts as the Hunter and tries to capture the four Survivors -- all of whom are doing their best to decode ciphers in order to activate the exit gate and escape with their lives.

It's a rather simple gameplay loop in concept, but there's a lot to it in the end. If you really want to be good at the game, you have to keep in mind every option at your disposal, lest you fall victim to the most basic tactics.

Identity V Survivor getting hit by Hunter

How to Survive and Help Your Teammates as a Survivor in Identity V

As a Survivor, your goal is to decode ciphers, unlock the exit gate, and escape. It's also your goal to help the other Survivors on your team escape. The more Survivors that escape with you, the better rewards you'll get.

Decoding a cipher is simple. Just walk up and tap it to begin the decoding process, tapping the action button whenever the prompt pops up. Be careful, however, as tapping the action button at the wrong time will shock you and alert the Hunter to your presence. You can tell that the Hunter is getting close if you see your heart beating wildly.

If the Hunter draws near, you'll need to run away, especially if they've got their sights set on you. Hunters run faster than you, however, so you need to be tricky in order to throw them off your trail. Vault over ledges and knock pallets into them in order to slow them down and lose them. Remember, you can always try your luck at hiding around a corner, too, but that's a hit-or-miss tactic.

If another Survivor gets injured, incapacitated, or tied to a Rocket Chair, you have the chance to help or save them. Simply run up to their location -- given they're not near a hunter -- and tap on them to save them. The more Survivors that escape, the more rewards you'll earn.

Scattered around the map, you'll discover treasure chests. They're a bit superfluous, especially if you're under a lot of pressure from the Hunter, but if you have time, go ahead and dig through a few for some extra rewards at the end of the match.

Once you've decoded enough ciphers, the two exit gates will activate and you can make your way to them. Once there, you'll need to take some time to enter a password before you can run through the gate. But once you're past the gate, you're home free. You can choose to continue spectating or just move on and collect your rewards later when the match concludes.

Identity V Hunter spots Survivor

How to Hunt Down the Survivors as a Hunter in Identity V

As a Hunter, your goal is to hunt down and capture as many Survivors as you can before they escape through the gates. However, depending on how crafty the Survivors you're facing are, you may have to get pretty crafty yourself. Luckily, you have one massive advantage over them: you run faster.

As a Hunter, you can innately see where all of the ciphers are in the level. It's generally a good idea to check those first. If a Survivor happens to electrocute themselves, you'll even see their outline next to the cipher. Once you find a Survivor, chase them down and give them a good ol' whack.

Once you swing your weapon -- whether you actually hit your target or not -- you won't be able to move for a short period of time. Try to keep track of the Survivor as best you can during this time. If you manage to hit them a second time before they heal, they'll be incapacitated for a moment.

While incapacitated, you can tie them to some balloons and carry them over to the nearest Rocket Chair. You have to be quick, though, or they'll struggle free right under your nose. If the Survivors are smart, they'll try to rescue their captured comrade from the Rocket Chair, so it's a good idea to set up some defensive measures. Use your special abilities to build a good defense next to these chairs before going after the other Survivors. The more Survivors you successfully capture, the more rewards you'll earn.


And that's everything you need to know for making it through the night. Be sure to stick with GameSkinny for more Identity V content coming your way.

Star Ocean Anamnesis Beginner's Guide Sun, 15 Jul 2018 19:10:25 -0400 Will Phillips

Star Ocean is a delightful Free to Play game hidden behind a clunky UI that can make it difficult for newcomers to get a grasp of what they need to do or how to upgrade characters. This is a guide made to get you through the first steps of the game and make sure that you’re fully equipped to take on whatever lies ahead.

This game is generous, and I mean scary generous. They essentially shower you with gems, their in-game purchasable currency. On top of that, you can save most of them for later, because you can get a full team of 5* characters at the start of the game!

Choose Your Character

After playing through the intro, they let you choose one out of five different 5* Characters.

 I strongly advise choosing Victor. He’s a 5* Defender which is really nice to have when running through missions. However, it’s not worst thing in the world to choose someone else.

Character Ticket

Once the game allows you to do as you please, you should head to the main page and tap on the gifts tab. It should give you a handful of gems and some other goodies, but we'll get to those later. After that you should head on over to item shop, and use some of your gems to purchase a 5* Character Ticket. As the name implies, this allows to draw for a guaranteed 5* character. 

 This is why I recommend getting Victor first, because now you just need a good damage dealer, and you have a little more wiggle room as to who can fill this spot. I recommend re-rolling to get a Cliff or Maria. To use your ticket, simply go to the Draws tab. It should be the second option under Character Draws.

If you don't like what you drew, you can re-roll by simply uninstalling and re-installing your game, and redo the previous steps. Once again, if you feel like going with someone else, or simply don't feel like dealing with the hassle of re-rolling it’s no biggie. I recommend steering clear from Invokers though because of what you get next.

Pre-registration Rewards

So the game for some reason is gifting the pre-order bonuses to everyone. At least, I don’t remember pre-ordering and I still got the bonus. One of the gifts is Faize, a 5* Invoker. If you chose to accept all whenever you got your gems, he should already be one of your choosable characters. 


She’s nothing crazy, but with her that brings your total of 5* characters to three, which is the max party size you can bring to a mission.

Equip Your Party

To equip your characters you need to go the character's tab and select Edit Party.

Click edit in the lower right hand corner, and then equip all of your precious 5* characters. Which ever character you put into the first slot is the one that you will play as. For the other two the order doesn’t matter.

I know there are two Invokers when I said to only get one. I was just trying to rush through to make this guide.  

Equip Your Items

After that you should click back in the lower left hand corner and tap on the empty weapon/equipment slots and equip whatever the game has given you.

There won’t be enough for everyone so just equip the best stuff to the character your playing as and give the other two the scraps.

Have Fun!

After that all that’s left for you to do tackle those story missions, which should be really easy with your team full of 5*’s! Also be mindful of completing the objectives for you starter missions. You can see what you need to do by pressing this icon on the main screen.

Quick tip: don’t tackle The Maze of Tribulations until you get the Starter Mission for it, or else you will have to wait until the next day to keep progressing.

You don't really need to worry about doing much else until the story missions are completed, because completing them unlocks more content. So until then just enjoy slaying monster's and collecting loot!

Check out our other Star Ocean Anamnesis guides here on GameSkinny!

Fortnite Treasure Map Guide: Risky Reels Battle Star Location Thu, 12 Jul 2018 15:23:28 -0400 Ty Arthur

Fortnite's various battle star treasure hunts are easily some of the most frustrating weekly challenges -- especially since the hand drawn "maps" don't always paint a clear picture of where to go if you aren't intimately familiar with the game's landscape.

Now that Fortnite Season 5 is here, we've got another battle star treasure hunt under way, although this one is a good deal easier than normal (despite still being listed as a "hard" level challenge). Let's get started with the treasure map Risky Reels challenge!

Want to skip the entire map-finding section of the Risky Reels treasure hunt and just go straight to the battle star location instead? 

The treasure is located south of Tomato Town, on top of the north side of the tunnel. Just walk up to the center area above the tunnel (beneath the outcroppings but above the actual tunnel itself) and when you get close enough, the battle star will spawn.

Map showing the battle star for season 5, week 1

Finding The Risky Reels Treasure Map

If you aren't one of those Cheaty McCheatersons who skip the actual map portion of the treasure hunt, hop off the battle bus and land at Risky Reels to find the map propped up against the edge of a wood building.

For those who spend any time in the northeastern quadrant of the Fortnite map, this one should be really obvious as the tunnel south of Tomato Town, since there aren't a ton of tunnels next to trees in the game.

The only question is which side of the tunnel to land on, as both sides look nearly identical. Landing at the correct side is critical, because getting to the top of the other side is a major pain if you don't have a bunch of resources for building your own staircase and bridge.

Risky Reels Treasure Map 
Fortnite Risky Reels Treasure Map

If you are landing directly there, launch your parachute before hitting the south end of the tunnel, then glide forward and turn around so you can drop directly onto the battle star spawn point shown in the image below.

If you miss the north end of the tunnel while gliding or are running to Tomato Town from the Risky Reels treasure map location, the easiest way to reach the treasure is just to build a staircase up on the north side in front of the tunnel.

Running all the way around the cliffs to jump down above the other side of the tunnel takes way more time than its worth, especially if anyone is straying north from Dusty Divot looking for an easy kill after looting all the chests there.

That may not be as much of an issue as in other weekly challenges, however. This is a challenge that would be good to jump on early, as most players are now landing at the newly added Lazy Links or Paradise Palms locations, leaving Tomato Town a desolate wasteland free of deadly players for a few days!

Be sure to take advantage of the lack of foot traffic to gear up, grab the battle star, and lie in wait for other unsuspecting players as the storm shrinks.

A player glides down to the battle star spawn point in Risky Reels Where to land to grab the Risky Reels / Tomato Town treasure

Did you figure out the location based on the map image or just jump straight to the treasure? Sound off and let us know what you think of the Season 5 changes so far in the comments below!

If you're just getting started with the Season 5 Battle Pass challenges, check out our other recent Fortnite guides here for an edge up over the competition:

Hogwarts Mystery Duelling Club Guide: How to Beat Opponents and Win Thu, 12 Jul 2018 15:07:51 -0400 Ty Arthur

Wands at the ready, class -- the dueling mode we've all been begging for has finally arrived in Harry Potter: Hogswarts Mystery! Now you can finally test your skills against other aspiring witches and wizards in multiplayer duels.

This is only a 4 day limited time event, so jump on it now to earn all the rewards (although hopefully it will be returning and staying in some form down the line).

Having trouble getting the limited time dueling mode to start or just can't quite manage to win all 8 matches? We've got you covered with a full guide on how to beat every other student in duelling class!

Hogwarts Mystery Duelling Class Multiplayer Guide

There have been a couple of glitches as the multiplayer dueling club finally opens in the Dungeons area of Hogwarts.

First and foremost, you have to leave the room and then return again in order to actually get started duelling.

After Dumbledore gives his speech, the dueling icon doesn't appear as it is supposed to, so just tap the door icon to return into the Dungeons hallway, then scroll over to the far right side and re-enter the dueling room. Tap the crossed wands to get started and find a match.

 If this icon doesn't appear, leave the room and then come back

8 wins required to get the gold coin and outfit rewards, but your student only starts with 3 tickets. Your ticket count only drops if you lose a match however, so don't lose 3 matches or you are officially out of the event.

Here's where the other big glitch comes in -- if you lose your connection during the match, it counts as a loss and the ticket is gone!

At this point its unclear if tickets will refresh each day of the limited time even or not, as the developer hasn't specifically stated. If you lost all three check back tomorrow morning, as they may regenerate over time.

In addition to the main rewards, bonus energy is awarded when you win a duel, and energy can now go above your normal maximum level (which wasn't the case when the game launched).

Hogwarts Mystery Duelling Strategy

Your student's stats cross over into the limited time duel mode, so there's incentive to go back and play the single player classes for upgrades if you keep losing duels.

Spells and potions are locked until you actually get them in the single player game, so for instance if you haven't mastered Incendio yet it won't be available in multiplayer. You do still have to trace the spells as normal, but there's no penalty at the moment for messing it up.

The rock, paper, scissors mechanic continues to be used as you pick a wand stance, so take what you know about the AI's chances of selecting the sneaky, defensive, and aggressive stances and apply that to multiplayer. You are facing off against bots, not the actual players themselves, so they follow the same patterns as opponents in the single player game.

For example, when low on stamina, the AI almost always chooses to heal with Wiggenwald, so you can counter that stance and prevent them from getting a turn.

On your turn, Wiggenwald can be your best friend if you go with the defensive stance, since it means you effectively negate the opponent's attacks if you lose the stance selection in the next couple of rounds.

After healing is taken care of, something that does damage and stuns at the same time like Expelliarmus can absolutely wreak havoc on the opponents. Stunning is easily the strongest mechanic to take advantage of, followed by high damage with a spell like Flipendo.

 With this strategy you'll be earning all the rewards in no time!

Hogwarts Mystery Duelling Cheat

Update: this cheat appears to have been patched out, so use the above method instead, or check the comments below for a cheat by turning off wi-fi.

There's a Hogwarts Mystery duelling cheat you can try out if you get frustrated with the rock, paper, scissor mechanic and keep losing the stance selection -- just pick aggressive every single time, and always use Expellariarmus.

Due to the algorithms in the game's AI, you will win the throw often enough and stun often enough that you can coast through most battles. Only change your stance and go for defensive if its the end of the match and you are clearly one attack away from losing.

You might be quite low on stamina by the end, and it can take awhile if they choose defensive and heal, but you will almost always win every match anyway. Take advantage of this now, before the developers figure it out and nerf the throw mechanics!

 Expelliarmus is your friend!

Have any other Hogwarts Mystery dueling class tips and tricks we should try out to win all 8 battles before the event ends? Let us know your dueling strategy in the comments below!

Fortnite Lightning Bolt Locations Guide Thu, 12 Jul 2018 14:50:43 -0400 Ty Arthur

Long time players will notice some big changes to the Fortnite formula as Season 5 officially launches, with three challenges now available for all players and an extra four challenges just for the Battle Pass crowd. One of those challenges is to find 7 lightning bolts in some very out-of-the-way locations.

Still getting used to the changes to the map and shotgun nerfs with version 5.0? Check out an overview of all the Season 5 patch notes here before heading out to find where the lightning bolts are in Fortnite!

Now that we've got that out of the way, if you just want to know specifically where to find the Fortnite lightning bolt locations, here are all the confirmed locations where they have been discovered so far in the Season 5, Week 1 map:

 Lightning Bolts In Fortnite Map

Where Are All The Lightning Bolts In Fortnite?

Although Epic is trying to de-emphasize the importance of building in the late game, this challenge actually requires you to harvest materials and build tall structures in order to reach the lightning bolts.

At the moment unfortunately it doesn't appear that you can grab one of the lightning bolts at the start by landing on it while falling off the battle bus, so get ready to quickly harvest and build instead. To make a lightning bolt count towards the challenge, you need to actually interact with it like you were opening a loot chest.

To complete the challenge you need to build staircases and reach at least 7 bolts. Be sure to start at an angle a short distance away from the end location as you build up and sideways, then throw up in a platform if necessary to finally reach the bolt.

There are currently more than 7 lightning bolts scattered across the map, so there's no shortage of locations to check out. Here's where to land to get started completing the lightning bolt challenge:

  • Above the llama at Junk Junction (duh, there's always a challenge item here)
  • In the sky above the middle of Dusty Divot
  • The far west side of Paradise Palms by the tall building
  • Above the middle of the house section of Retail Row
  • Up in the sky above the river to the west of Tomato Town
  • Directly above the middle of Tilted Towers
  • In the sky above the temple to the north and east of Lucky Landing (at the far south end of the map)
  • Above the northern most dock of Loot Lake
  • The middle of the Greasy Grove location
  • Next to the tower at Lonely Lodge
  • To the northeast of Snobby Shores
  • In the hills to the northwest of Wailing Woods

Have you found any other Fortnite lightning bolt locations that we missed? Let us know in the comments and we'll get them added to the list!

 Interacting with a lightning bolt to complete the week 1 Fortnite challenge (thanks to Hicko for the screenshot)

With the search floating lightning bolts challenge out of the way, here's the full list of newly added Fortnite Season 5 Week 1 challenges to keep you busy this week:

  • Deal damage with SMGs to opponents (500)
  • Search a Supply Llama (1)
  • Search for chests in Snobby Shores (7)
  • Search for floating lightning bolts (7)
  • Eliminate opponents in Retail Row (Hard: 3)
  • Clinger, stink bomb, or grenade eliminations (Hard: 3)
  • Follow the treasure map found in Risky Reels (Hard: 1)

Stay tuned for a full guide on where to find the Risky Reels treasure map coming shortly, and be sure to drop us a note on your strategy this week to deal SMG damage and get stink bomb eliminations!

If you're just getting started with the Season 5 Battle Pass, check out our other Fortnite guides here for an edge up over the competition:

Fortnite Season 5 Guide: Shotgun Nerfs and Flintlock Locations Thu, 12 Jul 2018 13:17:50 -0400 Ty Arthur

Season 5 of Fortnite is officially here, and you better believe things are getting weird, with bizarre crossovers happening between realms.

On top of weapon nerfs and zany temporal rifts, we also got a whole new desert biome in the southeastern corner of the map, featuring Paradise Palms, while Lazy Links was added to the northern end at what used to be Anarchy Acres. We also know that certain new areas aren't marked, so we'll have to wait and see what those are. 

Epic has made it clear that big changes are in store for the king of battle royal games, and not just in the wacky new world-colliding mechanics for Season 5.

If you look at (some) message boards around the web, it seems the end game is getting a bit stale with "just build lol" being the prevailing mantra right now. The devs want to see that change

A series of staggered updates with big changes is coming to Fortnite, with the first being a host of weapon nerfs to spice up how you use the shotgun -- and to force players to try out new strategies.

Fortnite's Season 5 Map showing new locations in a desert and Paradise Palms and Lazy Links 
It's a brand new Fortnite map with all new landing locations to learn!

Shotgun Nerfs (And a Few Others You Might Not Know About)

Since most players end up peeping out from behind walls to get off a shotgun blast, the basic gameplay mechanics for shottys have been totally redesigned.

Expect further fine tuning and nerfing of shotgun mechanics during the rest of Season 5 as Epic gauges community feedback -- but here's what you need to know about shotgun nerfs right now:

  • Shotguns will now indicate how many pellets hit an enemy; this will be visible within the weapon reticle
  • Shotgun spread patterns have been adjusted to be consistent; there are no more random variations
  • The heavy shotgun now fires 10 pellets rather than 5 (although the maximum damage for the heavy shotgun remains unchanged)
  • After firing a shotgun, another shotgun cannot be fired for a very short time (meaning no switching between multiple shotguns in your inventory for rapid shots without reloading)

Shotguns are just where it starts, though, with a bunch of other nerfs appearing that may change how you play.

Explosives (like grenades) and the rocket launcher now have reduced vehicle knockback for shopping carts or the new All Terrain Karts (ATKs).

Additionally, the suppressed SMG has been tweaked so its damage drop off is in line with other SMGs -- damage is reduced to 80% at 35 meters and then down to 65% at 50+ meters.

Finally, the hunting rifle's aim assist has been reduced to be in line with other sniper rifles, so it won't be quite as accurate anymore.

Where to Find Flintlock Weapons

Thankfully, the Epic crew hasn't forgotten about those of us who still prefer the original Save The World mode. Now, a whole new class of old-timey weapons has appeared to put a wrinkle in Season 5.

Here's what you can now discover in missions, pick up in the event store, or acquire randomly through loot llama cards:

Weapon Name Rarity DPS
 Duelist Epic Pistol  645.8
 Duelist Legendary Pistol  708.5
 Dragoon Epic Shotgun 2586.4
 Dragoon Legendary Shotgun   2812.5
Ol' Betsy Elite Sniper 711.6
Ol' Betsy Legendary Sniper 777.5
Sir Hootie Epic Melee Club 292.2
Sir Hootie  Legendary Melee Club 323.2
Fishing Hook Epic Melee Scythe 292.2
Fishing Hook Legendary Melee Scythe 344.5


What do you think of the shotgun nerfs and new flintlock weapons for Save The World mode? Sound off in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides here:

Minecraft Update Aquatic Turtle Breeding Guide Wed, 11 Jul 2018 17:08:49 -0400 Autumn Fish

Phase 2 of Update Aquatic has finally rolled out for Minecraft: Bedrock Edition, adding 3,000 new species of fish, Drowned Zombies, Bubble Columns, and even Sea Turtles! The Sea Turtles, in particular, are an incredibly unique addition -- especially if you breed them.

You see, when a baby turtle grows into an adult turtle, they drop an item called a Scute. With five Scute, you can go to a crafting table to make a Turtle Shell. If you wear this Turtle Shell, you'll gain the Water Breathing status effect, which prevents you from drowning or losing oxygen underwater -- completely. It even improves your vision when submerged.

Alternatively, the Turtle Shell can also be brewed with an Awkward Potion in order to make the Potion of the Turtle Master, which slows you down but also increases your resistance, essentially making you a tank -- or a turtle, if you please.

In order to make these, though, you need some baby turtles. And the best way to find baby turtles is to, of course, breed them yourself.

Turtles on a beach in Minecraft

How to Breed Turtles in Minecraft

To breed turtles, you first need to find two adult Sea Turtles. They spawn in groups on warm beaches, so if you don't find any at a beach near you, you can just craft a boat and go on a bit of a journey to see if you can't find any at other beaches in your current seed.

Once you find a few, go ahead and dig them into a small pit so they can't escape, and make sure there's sand under them -- the eggs need to be laid in sand. Otherwise, they won't hatch.

Next, you need to feed two turtles a piece of Seagrass. In order to get Seagrass, you must either use Shears on the grass that grows underwater or kill turtles. Once you feed the turtles, hearts will appear over their heads, and they'll turn toward each other.

Afterward, one turtle will burrow under the sand and lay one to four turtle eggs.

Next, you simply have to wait for the turtle eggs to hatch. Remember, they will only hatch on sand during the night. Once they hatch, it will take them a little while to grow. You can accelerate this process by feeding them more Seagrass. If you feed a baby Sea Turtle 10 Seagrass, it'll grow into an adult instantly.


And that's everything you need to know to breed turtles for Scute. If you're looking to improve your Minecraft experience, be sure to check out our Minecraft seeds and Minecraft skins articles while you're at it.

How To Play Fortnite Bingo Mode (Complete With Game Ideas) Wed, 11 Jul 2018 16:58:20 -0400 Ty Arthur

Move over High Explosives, 50 vs 50, and Solid Gold because the best Fortnite game mode ever has arrived -- and it wasn't even crafted by the Epic team at all!

While waiting on Fortnite Season 5 to officially drop (which seems like will involve Vikings and a tear in the fabric of time somehow?), players decided to come up with their own custom game mode -- Fortnite bingo!

Ready to get going filling out bingo lines and using nearly every weapon found in the game against your best mates? Let's get started!

Note: Special thanks to Fortnite YouTuber Lachlan for catapulting this one into the public consciousness when he started playing rounds for 100,000 V-Bucks (check out the video below).

Fortnite bingo card shows the game's weapons, grenades, and traps 
Fortnite Bingo Card Basic Version

Bingo Custom Mode

This special way to play bingo in Fortnite makes extensive use of the game's new Playground mode, which is currently labeled as a limited-time mode. However, the mode gives you plenty of time to find all the items on the bingo card without having to constantly drop back into the loading screen after getting killed.

To play, just pop in a Playground match and start searching the map until you or a friend fill up your inventory with five items on the bingo card.

Here's a quick tip: Before the match, decide how you want to set up the custom match's win conditions.

For example, you could go for a traditional bingo setup -- collect five items in a vertical or horizontal line. Then make players win multiple rounds over time to get a full-card winner.

Alternatively, you could instead go for the full blackout win, which could take hours with a dedicated group of players. Lastly, you could decide that players must actually net kills with the weapon in question, or deploy certain items at certain time to get the bingo segments to count.

Bingo Hard Mode

Ok, the above is the easy version of Fortnite bingo. If you're looking for more of a challenge, this is how you play hard mode.

If your group has some serious time to grind, drop into Squads mode and try to get a bingo win while playing against other players in a regular 100 player match! In this version of the game, bingo lines should stay blacked out between matches, as it's unlikely you'll hit five in a row before dying in a single game.

Alternatively, if you don't like the original bingo card setup or want to swap out items like Port-A-Fort or stink bomb for other weapons, make up your own custom Fortnite bingo card and share it with your friends!

There are plenty of other ways to play if you want to change up the difficulty while waiting for Season 5. Fill up a card with llamas to see who can get to five or 20 first. Or pop in locations like Junk Junction and Tilted Towers to see who can visit the most locations the fastest!

Are you jumping on the bingo bandwagon? Let us know how you plan to play in the comments below, and stay tuned for full coverage on the first week of Fortnite Season 5 to arrive tomorrow!

For those who have been away in recent weeks, Season 4 brought plenty of weapon and item additions to the game. Make sure to check out the the high capacity drum gun, new dual pistols drop, and area-clearing stink bombs.

And while you're at it, make sure to head over to our Fortnite guides page for even more tips, tricks, and strategies. 

Dead Island: Survivors Beginner's Tips and Tricks Guide Tue, 10 Jul 2018 10:34:56 -0400 Ty Arthur

We might still be waiting on that long-overdue Dead Island 2 (which developers Deep Silver insist is happening), but if you can't get enough of this tropical zombie series, a freemium mobile title just landed to tide you over for a while.

The focus for this Android/iOS title has shifted radically away from rigging together a huge array of makeshift weapons to a wave-based tower defense game, with some nods to the franchise's roots.

Just getting started with the game? We can show you the ropes so you don't have a horde of zombies making it past your electric fences to eat your brains -- and friends! 

Dead Island: Survivors Basic Strategies And Cheats

The core of the game is all about setting up traps and killing zombies in waves, but collect supply missions are a major exception to this basic style. These missions are all about stealth and speed, not having upgraded weapons or placing traps.

Be sure to stay out of zombies' lines of sight and run away when the exclamation mark appears. Keep in mind that containers become lootable at random while you run around the map in collect supply missions, so keep moving until boxes, barrels, etc. are highlighted as lootable objects.

Random Drops

Dead Island: Survivors also features a slightly different setup than most other tower defense games, using randomized card/creature drops. Rather than selling extra cards for resources, you need multiples of the same card to hit a maximum number and then level up the trap or character using in-game cash or diamonds.

Using Metal

There's also a second way to improve your traps -- by using the metal resource, individual traps can be upgraded at specific locations on each island's horde map, but this initiates a timer, so you can't immediately play the wave.

In general, it's a better idea to upgrade the weapon cards unless you have a lot of time to spare or a lot of diamonds on hand to zip through timers.

Dealing with Zoom

While playing collect supply, survivor rescue, or horde missions, there is a zoom function enabled, but it automatically re-calibrates to the same level after half a second, so it's not useful at all for gaining a more tactical overview of the camp. It isn't clear why this function exists, so hopefully it will get fixed in a future patch to actually be useful.

The trap upgrade screen in Dead Island Survivors shows the auto-turret at level 3 Upgrading a turret after getting 6 of the same turret card

How to Place Traps in Dead Island: Survivors 

First up, any of your placed traps don't hurt you when running around as a hero during a wave, so feel free to stay in the line of fire of turrets and flame throwers!

While the idea is to build around the red arrow icons in a tower defense strategy, zombies will leave the red pathway to chase your hero if you get too close, so you can actually mess up your own defenses by running into the fray for melee combat from the wrong direction.

Keep in mind that you don't have to follow the same path as the zombies set by your defenses. Just tap and hold to jump over walls and quickly run to another area of the map as the waves get frantic.

After placing them down, most traps are automatic, but some traps must be activated manually and won't do anything unless you run up and tap them (like the Slicer).

If you've run out of resources for direct damage traps like cannons, place some cheap barricades to force the zombie horde toward environmental dangers like turn crank water cannons, boat propellers, and exploding barrels. Most of these free traps reset over time and can be triggered manually several times during a wave.

Likewise, some traps -- like the cannon -- knock zombies off the red path, so you can use this mechanic to your advantage to push enemies into pit traps, river tiles, and so on.

Using Traps Against Special Zombie Types

Your hero character is for mopping up those shambling undead who make it past the traps, but also for hunting down the special zombie types before they can destroy your electrified fences. Learning the abilities and defenses of each special type is the difference between success and getting eaten for lunch.

Here's a quick run down of special types you will come across early on, as well as some tactics that will keep you alive when facing them:

  • Exploder: If you don't have a quick killing blow that will finish this zombie off, flee the area or you will take huge amounts of damage when they die.
  • Floaters: These zombies can deal ungodly damage with acid puke, but they must remain stationary while spewing, leaving them vulnerable from behind or the sides -- or to grenades and mines that take time to arm.

  • Resistor: These shielded zombies need to be brought down before they can take serious damage from traps.

  • Nurse Zombie: Finally, the thrasher trap will interrupt this zombie's healing ability.

Recovering Your Hero's Health

After facing down the zombies, your hero is going to take damage, which can be recovered by using a limited supply of healing soda cans. These aren't your only options though -- your hero recovers health after being out of combat for a few seconds, so tactical retreat is often a better option unless the horde is already all past your main defenses.

Don't forget that health cans can also be upgraded just like traps, increasing their healing and lowering their recharge rate.

Zombies attack a hero near a beach full of traps Funneling zombies toward boat propellers for free trap kills!

How to Get Free Diamonds In Dead Island: Survivors

Diamonds are used for speeding up suitcase timers/trap upgrade timers and buying new consumables. These are accrued by completing missions, but there are bonus diamonds available that aren't actually listed anywhere in the tutorial or main menu screen.

Completing Google Play or iOS achievements nets you extra diamonds, and the achievements keep scaling over time (for instance the achievement to kill 50 zombies with heavy weapons goes up to 500 zombies for a second level of diamond rewards).

These aren't given automatically, however, and are buried in a hidden menu. To claim rewards after completing an achievement, tap the yellow arrow icon in the upper-left corner of the Island menu (this isn't available if you are in a local camp map or a mission), then tap the trophy icon in the expanded menu.

These achievements give you extra diamonds (each is listed at its Level 1 value):

  • Mind The Gap: Push 1 zombie into a hole
  • Head Cracker: Stomp 1 knocked down zombie
  • Smash Bro: Kill 50 zombies using a heavy weapon
  • Grenadier: Kill 10 zombies using the molotov cocktail, grenade, or water bombs
  • Perfect Defender: Finish 20 horde missions without losing a single electrical charge
  • Heavy Hitter: Kill 50 zombies using a blunt weapon
  • Planning Ahead: Use the mine or the meat bag 10 times
  • Master Trapper: Kill 10 zombies using the shotgun
  • Zombie Gear Solid: Finish one collection supply mission without being detected by a single zombie
  • A Person Of The People: Find and guide 30 strayed survivors to safety in rescue missions

The achievements screen in Dead Island Survivors Claiming hidden achievement rewards for free diamonds

Those are the basics of what you need to know to survive the zombie hordes! Got any other killer Dead Island: Survivors tips, cheats, or strategies for new players? Let us know in the comments below!

Warhammer 40,000 Gladius Strategy Guide Mon, 09 Jul 2018 11:01:20 -0400 Ty Arthur

There's a million ways to wage war in the grim darkness of the 41st millenium, and now with Gladius we finally get to purge the unclean in 4X style!

Unlike your typical 4X game, there's absolutely no diplomacy involved here at all, so your only concern is in expanding and exterminating while you research new abilities. For those new to the genre, we've got a run down of everything you need to know once you complete the tutorial and start trying to conquer a planet.

Gladius Basic Tips And Strategies

When just getting started in the game, Space Marines or Necrons are the way to go. There aren't as many new mechanics to learn, and the starting units for those factions will be more equipped to handle the enemy forces. 

Once you get into the thick of it, there are some tactics to learn that are a bit different from the RTS or FPS versions of Warhammer.  First up, hold ALT while hovering over an enemy unit to see exactly how much damage it deals and learn the unit's range to formulate your attack and defense strategy.

While moving units, stay out of the pink wire weed hexes until they are cleared, as they will damage each unit that moves through. You can use this to your advantage in some cases to lure enemies into a choke point, however.

 Wire weed funnels these units into a firing alley

Keep a close eye on each unit's range and firing power, which varies wildly between factions and units. Combat units have more stats and mechanics here than in other 4X games, so maximize your fire power by being within the sweet spot on range for the most damage.

Keep in mind that you can fire through friendly tiles without impediment or penalty, and firing ranges include diagonal hexes.

Each combat unit has an automatic overwatch / retaliation -- but only if they didn't act in that turn. They can move, just not act, and still retaliate. Using this strategically gets you extra attacks as enemy units come your way.

Conversely, it can be mean getting torn to shreds as your army moves towards a bunch of units who haven't acted and get off their retaliation shots, so its better to lure them to you unless you have overwhelming numbers.

Finally, don't forget the special abilities that many base infantry units have. Necrons for instance can heal themselves without having to waste a turn standing still like other faction units, which keeps them in the fight a lot longer.

 Necrodermis Repair effectively keeps Necron soldiers alive 1 1/2 times as long as other units

Gladius Combat and Expansion Strategy

This is Warhammer, so the combat elements of the 4X genre are front and center. In the early game, building up a sizable army is more important than acquiring resource tiles or researching new abilities. Your first order of business should be an infantry production building, and you should keep it running constantly.

Large forces won't typically follow you all the way back to your base, so if you find an overwhelming force in the early game (like three Kastelan robots, an enginseer squad, two infantries, and a whole lot of Kroot hound fodder) retreat is a very valid option.

This is especially true since your buildings can launch attacks of their own against invading forces. When you can't break through a wall of enemies, start exploring the map in a different direction until you can come back and handle the threat. There's an exception here though -- nearby enemies tend to scatter when you fully destroy a unit, so if you can take down a weaker group, you can potentially give yourself breathing room to keep exploring the area.

After producing some infantry, you want to build your faction's hero production facility and pump one out quickly to pick up the items found in ruins. Infantry and vehicles can't pick up specialty items, and only heroes are allowed to carry them.

Your heroes don't have to physically go to the ruins, however. Your infantry can explore the ruins first, then when you have a hero just click the item icon in the upper-left corner of the screen to grab all of them that have been discovered so far and equip them to heroes.

Once your army is handled, its time to start keeping up with your expanded resource requirements. Icons for buildings in the cities are tiny and hard to keep track of, so you need a plan ahead of time in how you are going to expand.

Its crucial to know that most tiles can hold more than one building, so strategic placement of buildings is important to keep pace with resource requirements when you hit the mid-to-late game. Always take advantage of extra energy, resource, and ore output with any building that is placed down on a corresponding tile type.

Note that each faction has a different building layout and overall strategy. Necrons can build multiple cities by using tomb hexes, with the Space Marines only get 1 starting city point that can expand with hubs. Stay tuned for a full guide explaining the abilities and buildings of each faction coming soon.

 Matching resource bonuses to building types

Do you have any other Gladius tips and tricks for players just getting started in this foray into 4X with 40K? Leave us a comment with your best strategy below!

Overwatch Guide: How to Play As Hammond the Wrecking Ball Mon, 09 Jul 2018 10:47:18 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest Overwatch hero is a hamster named -- Hammond, the Wrecking Ball. When the hero was first announced many people assumed that it would be a gorilla, but they were wrong. Hammond is a hamster that rides on a wrecking ball that makes him absolutely unstoppable, and a pretty good tank, too.

Hammond is currently available on PTR and there are a few more layers to this cute, little, and yet very dangerous hero. If you want to know how to play Hammond in the most effective way, then follow our comprehensive guide below.

Hammond Wrecking Ball Abilities

Quad Cannons

Hammond's primary weapon is nothing special, but it is a powerful automatic weapon that deals 25 shots per second, where each shot deals 2.5-5 points of damage.

Grappling Claw

His secondary weapon, on the other hand, is something really cool. It allows Hammond to swing around the map in a fast manner and land on enemies dealing 50 points of damage at maximum speed.

Although, the ability has a 5 second cooldown, which means that he can't swing all the time. It also requires some practice, but when you master it, this ability will easily become your favorite.

Adaptive Shield

His personal shield ability is also very strong and creates +100 barriers per each enemy within radius. This means that each enemy basically gains you 100 extra health, which is incredibly powerful.

Although, this ability only creates personal barriers, the cool down is only at 15 seconds, which is just nothing in comparison to other tanks in the game.

Roll and Piledriver

These two auxiliary abilities are meant to be activated when Hammond moves using his Wrecking Ball:

  • Roll increases his speed of movement
  • Piledriver slams the ball into the ground and sends all those affected up in the air
Minefield (Ultimate)

Hammond's ultimate ability allows him to deploy 15 mines in a proximity of 6 meters around him that explode upon contact with enemies. With this kind of ultimate Hammond will be simply untouchable.

Hammond Wrecking Ball Tips and Tricks

Using Your Shields Right

Adaptive Shield is undoubtedly one of the best Hammond's abilities. In order to get the best out of it you can roll into a group of enemies (the more there are the better) and in this way get multiple shields at once.

Then, when you're out of the enemy zone, fight them one-on-one while still maintaining all of your shields. In this way Hammond will be practically unbeatable due to the ridiculous amount of health on his little paws.

Combo Together With Zarya

If you're playing with Zarya on your team, then try to combo out Hammond's ultimate with Zarya's, which drops a gravity bomb that gathers all the enemies in one spot. When you drop your mines off of Hammond, then they will have nowhere to run and the mines will finish them, or at least deal a lot of cumulative damage.

In case you can't combo out you could instead expand the area of effect of the Hammond's ultimate. In order to do this you need to first swing using your Grapple Claw and let it go at high speed, then you can deploy the mines. In this way they will cover a larger territory.

Swing With Piledriver

Piledriver is an excellent ability, especially if you can swing at high speed and land on an enemy or a few. But don't just stop there, try to shoot your enemies while they're still in the air, which will ultimately deal 200 points of damage.

But Piledriver can also be used without the swinging effect. It can go off at times when you simply jump off the ledge or a roof. So just stay on top of your enemies, and as soon as they approach your position jump down with Piledriver on and shoot them in the air.


Hopefully, these tips will help you do some great things with Hammond Wrecking Ball both on PTR and after the official release. For other Overwatch guides at GameSkinny, please see the links below:

Pokemon Go Trading Stardust Cost Chart Fri, 06 Jul 2018 18:38:35 -0400 Ty Arthur

After the worldwide phenomena has finally died down a bit (remember all those totally nuts best and worst things to happen when it landed in 2016?), its hard to believe Pokemon Go just turned two years old this summer!

The lack of trading at launch was a huge criticism among the player base, since that has been a part of this franchise since friends were connecting their black and white Game Boys together back in the '90s!

Trading Pokemon is finally here in Go, but only with people on your friends list, and it will hit you pretty hard in your Stardust account when you first get started.

Trading In Pokemon Go

Trading only becomes available once both you and the friend you are trading with are at trainer level 10 (which should be just about everyone at this point).

To get started with the updated trading interface, tap your head / trainer name icon in the lower-left corner, then navigate to the Friends tab. Tap a friend's name and then you can choose the Trade interface found in the lower-right corner.

Stardust trading costs are absurdly astronomical for Pokemon that you don't already have in your Pokedex (meaning you haven't ever caught one before on your own) but they drop off by massive levels as you increase in friendship level with another player.

 Trading and checking friendship level

This artificially high cost structure keeps the trading economy from immediately toppling over and going nuts so everyone can't immediately trade the strongest, highest level Pokemon back and forth to each other.

The traded Pokemon's level, HP, and CP also drop to be commensurate with your player level when trading, so you can't fill up on ultra strong Pokemon just by trading.

The minimum stat level of the traded Pokemon is also influenced by your friendship level with the other player, so the higher your friendship, the better the Pokemon will be when it arrives in your Pokedex.

Keep in mind that the same Pokemon can only be traded once, so you can't chain them repeatedly through multiple trades and will have to catch new ones instead. Trading also impacts medals, so for instance tiny Rattata will get you closer to the  Youngster medal, while XL Magikarps get you closer to the Fisherman medal.

Pokemon Go Stardust Trading Cost Chart

Type Not Present In Pokedex Cost Already Present In Pokedex Cost
 Standard  20,000  100
 Regional   20,000  100
Shiny    1,000,000  20,000
 Legendary 1,000,000  20,000


Notice that there's no slot on that table for mythical? That's because they can't be traded at all! You've got to earn those Pokemon all by yourself.

The prices for non-registered Pokemon are insane, but there's a massive discount for increasing your friendship level with a trading partner. The discount starts at 20% for Great but sharply increases to 92% when you hit the Ultra level.

This means that those 1,000,000 Stardust cost trades for Pokemon not in your Pokedex drop all the way down to 80,000 at the Ultra level.

How do you increase friendship in Pokemon Go? The friendship level goes up when you send (or receive) a gift with that friend, or when you trade Pokemon, so it takes a good deal of Stardust to increase the level unless you want to frequently send gifts of Pokeballs and other consumables.

Here are the exact discounts provided at each Pokemon Go friendship level:

Friendship Level Stardust Discount
Good  0%
Great 20%
Ultra 92%
 Best  96%


Now that you're all set for trading, still need help with the rest of this genre-changing AR game? Check out our other Pokemon Go guides here:

Best Limited Archetypes for Core Set 2019 in MtG Fri, 06 Jul 2018 10:34:16 -0400 Sergey_3847

The next Magic: The Gathering event season begins with a new expansion -- Core Set 2019. The Limited formats will be the main focus of the tournaments at the beginning of the season, when all players will take part in Draft and Sealed events.

There are quite a few possible archetypes in Core Set 2019, which you can use to draft powerful decks. Most of them are already quite familiar, such as Blue-Red Spells or White-Red Tokens. But there are a few offerings in Core Set 2019 that are truly overpowered, if you can get all the right pieces together, or at least most of them.

Follow our guide below for some of the best Limited archetypes for the current meta in MtG.

Blue-Green Unblockable


One of the main things that prevents you from winning in Magic: The Gathering is blocking. But what if you could avoid blocking and just get to your opponent without any hindrances?

Well, luckily enough, Core Set 2019 provides a few interesting solutions that could be turned into true Limited beaters. In order to make this deck work you will need a few key cards, such as: Ghostform, a cheap spell that makes two of your creatures unblockable, Ghirapur Guide, an Elf that doesn't allow small creatures to chump your attackers for three mana, Aether Tunnel, an enchantment that makes an enchanted creature unblockable, and Suspicious Bookcase, an artifact that makes one of your creatures unblockable for three mana.


You can also find some other creatures that have their own unblockable abilities, like Bristling Boar, a 4/3 that can't be blocked by more than one creature, and Frilled Sea Serpent, a 4/6 creature that you can choose to make unblockable for seven mana.


Lastly, you can simply give your creatures Flying, which is another way to avoid blocking. In this case you will need to draft a card named Skyrider Patrol -- a real master of evasion that also permanently buffs your creatures with +1/+1 counters. In the end you will have a small army of unblockable creatures that will just keep winning you games.

Blue-Black Discard


Another way of ensuring your high winrate is to leave your opponents without any cards in hand. They can't beat you, if they have nothing to play, right?

In order to make this happen your deck has to rely on discard effects, such as Psychic Symbiont, a card of high value that not only makes your opponents discard a card, but also draws a card for you. Additionally, you could use creatures with discard effect, such as Fell Specter, which also drains your opponents for two life everytime they discard a card.


If you happen to draft slightly more expensive cards in this category, then having Fraying Omnipotence, an extremely powerful effect in this type of deck, and Liliana's Spoils, which is another 1-for-2 spell similar to Psychic Symbiont, would simply be great. Then, you could use Macabre Waltz to return your discarded creatures back to your hand and play them again next turn.


Finally, you can support your discard archetype with usual suspects, such as Mind Rot and Duress that will keep feeding your Fell Spectre in play.

Black-Green Lifedrain


Even if you can't attack, you can still find ways to reduce the life total of your opponents to zero. You can do this by draining their life with such cards like Vampire Sovereign, a 3/4 flyer that drains your opponents for three life, and Poison-Tip Archer, that deals one damage every time a creature dies.


You also need to make sure that you will survive long enough, and that's why you need cards like Highland Game, which also activates Poison-Tip Archer's effect and gains you two life when it dies. On the other hand, there has to be a way to deal damage even in cases when your creatures get blocked. For this you need cards like Infectious Horror, which basically has an Afflict mechanic.


At times when nothing happens, and neither of the players can attack, you can spend a little mana, and just keep pinging your opponent with the help of Vampire Neonate. You can also combo it with Epicure of Blood, and just keep draining the life out of your opponents.

Red-Green Dragons


Dragon tribe is undoubtedly the most powerful one in Core Set 2019. However, most of the good dragons cost a lot of mana, such as Volcanic Dragon or Lathliss, the Dragon Queen. So in order to push these strong cards earlier into the game, you need to ramp really effectively. For this reason green color fits the red dragons the best.


Cards like Gift of Paradise, a land enchantment with life gain, Catalyst Elemental, a creature that can add two red mana to your pool immediately, or Draconic Disciple, a creature that besides ramp can also summon a 5/5 dragon for seven mana, will all help you out immensely.


That's without mentioning many other excellent green ramp cards that are present in Core Set 2019.


Most of these Limited archetypes can have their own variations, so just carefully choose cards in your pools, and you should get at least one of them right. For other Magic: The Gathering guides at GameSkinny, please see the links below:

A Beginner's Guide to Grim Soul: Dark Fantasy Adventure Thu, 05 Jul 2018 11:56:38 -0400 Zack Palm

For fans of Dark Souls and survival games, Grim Soul: Dark Fantasy Adventure brings these two concepts together and introduces a difficult mobile game for you to try surviving in. Not only do you need wit to handle these harsh landscapes, but you will have to manage your inventory and base in order to succeed.

This game does not come with a tutorial and the developers expect you to figure out several details on your own. Many of them you naturally learn as you level up throughout the game and find new resources, but some of them may allude your notice for quite some time. In this guide you'll read about several helpful tips to keep yourself alive and acquire the best loot possible.

Increase Your Attack Speed

This is a simple technique you can use during any engagement you find yourself in. Each time your character moves forward to do an attack, briefly pull away from your opponent. Your character will pull away, but as soon as they do return to combat as quickly as you can and continue attacking them. To successfully increase your attack speed you need to do this after each complete hit.

Doing this increases the frequency of your character's attack by a small amount. While it's not a lot, it does give you an advantage against the tougher foes you're going to encounter and it can provide you with a better chance of beating NPC player characters who randomly spawn in on your map.

Avoid The Night Guest With Red Symbols

The unkillable Night Guest prowls the map during the night time. The creature is terrified of only thing -- fire. The best thing for you to do is to always have a torch sitting in your inventory when you're out looting the world at night. Though, you can still survive encounters with him if you're fast enough. And no, you do not have to leave the map.

You need to find one of the larger red symbols drawn on the ground. The Night Guest cannot cross over this symbol. After a few minutes, the Night Guest should leave the map and bother you no more. Don't rely on this every time you loot at night, as they randomly show up on the maps.

Kite Slower Enemies

While exploring you may have run into one of the heavily armored Damned Knights. These slow moving creatures lumber around the map, lock on to you, and chase you until you've left the area. Because they hit extremely hard, you may have thought it better to run away as soon as they show up. But you can use their slow movement to your advantage. To do this you need to craft a Cart Thill and have it equipped.

When one of these terrors show up, run away from them and locate a tree somewhere on the map. When the Damned Knight arrives to the tree they're going to attempt to bypass it to get to you. You need to avoid the enemy's heavy attack by running your character around the tree.

Every so often have your character attack the Damned Knigh. As soon as you land the hit, continue running around the tree. Because of the creature's slow movement, they won't have a chance to hit you. You should eventually kill them after you've done this several times.

You can only do this with the Cart Thill. Other weapons do not have the same reach. You can also use this technique on Damned Templars.

Locating Night Caches

As you start to find yourself vying to acquire higher level loot, you may traverse the areas with three skulls. These locations are filled with plenty of foes and bags for you to loot containing great items. However, the best time to visit these locations is at night. When night falls, you have the opportunity for a night cache to appear.

These rare night caches contain some of the best loot in the game, except for the ones you can take from the Forsaken Dungeon. They spawn in the middle of the map, meaning you have to wade through many of the enemies to get to it. You can likely leave a few on the outskirts but it's better to get them all as the night cache takes three times longer to open than a chest does.

Due to how many foes spawn on this map, you need to bring multiple weapons. Several of them may break. 

Also, because they only show up at night you need to bring a torch with you whenever you're hunting for these. You risk having the Night Guest visit you and you do not want to bet all of the loot you gathered on there being red symbols for you to hide in.

The Gatekeeper

One of the events you can have pop up on your map is the Dead Body event. There's plenty of strong foes wandering around at this location, so make sure to bring weapons and armor with you.

An item you can loot off of the dead body is the Gatekeeper's Hut Map. This will take you to the game's first boss character, the Gatekeeper. He moves just as slow Damned Knights and Templars, but you cannot kite him. He simply destroys the small objects in his way. If you defeat him you can loot plenty of great items from inside of his hut, plus a key to the Forsaken Order dungeon granting you access to the forbidden area. 

Note: You can only have the Gatekeeper's Hut Map drop at level 15.

Though the Gatekeeper looks fearsome you can defeat him using a few simple tactics.


Just like the other slower moving foes wandering this map you need to use his movement speed against him. Because you can't kite him, one of the weapons you need to take with you is the halberd. You can acquire this item by looting it from one of the stronger player zones located on your map, or from a night cache.

The two other weapons should consist of a Bastard Sword or a FalchionYou don't use these weapons against the Gatekeeper, they come in handy later during your fight. Make sure to bring along plenty of healing items.

Fighting The Gatekeeper

Unlike Dark Souls, the Gatekeeper does not change up his tactics during the fight. All he does is chase after you attempt to attack you. This is where you use you equip your halberd and use the technique you learned early -- successfully land an attack against the Gatekeeper, and the run away. Because he's slower than the Damned Knights and Templars, if you run away he can't attack you.

During this fight, Plague Wolves will show up to help the Gatekeeper to kill you. When they show up, peel away from the Gatekeeper, swap to one of your swords, and kill the wolves. You do not want to waste the durability of your halberd against them. Only use it on the Gatekeeper. 

The wolves will show up throughout your fight and they will damage you. After you've defeated them, use this time to heal up, and then reengage the Gatekeeper with your halberd.

Looting the Gatekeeper's Hut

After you defeated the Gatekeeper and his wolves, you can loot his hut. Unfortunately, you're going to treat it like a player's hut and you need use a bomb on the front door. You can leave the area to return to your base to grab one, and then return to claim your prize.

This is recommended as there you can loot several items from this location upon defeating the Gatekeeper.


These great tips should help you conquer a lot of the harder concepts going on in Grim Soul: Dark Fantasy Adventure.

For more information about the game, keep it here at GameSkinny!

Fortnite 4.5 Drum Gun Guide (Complete With Stats) Tue, 03 Jul 2018 13:27:51 -0400 Ty Arthur

We're at the end of Fortnite's insane Season 4, but there's still a few more changes and additions to the gameplay before the map changes yet again with the Season 5 opening. With the latest patch, the devs at Epic Games have added a new drum gun to the mix. 

The infamous stink bomb just made the transition from Battle Royale to Save The World mode (and those of us who still play Save The World thank you for that, Epic Games!). However, the brand-new weapon has arrived for Battle Royale players -- and it has the stopping power of a rifle and the fire rate of an SMG. 

Here's what you need to know about the Tommy Gun, a.k.a. the Drum Gun. 

Fortnite Drum Gun New Weapon

The drum gun features a high-capacity magazine and quick rate of fire. However, it has lower accuracy and mild recoil, much like the recently released dual pistols. This retro weapon can be found in floor drops and chests, and it comes in two main varieties -- uncommon and rare.

Both varieties use medium ammo and deal more damage than the SMG, so this may become the go-to gun for quick rates of fire and high damage in many Battle Royale matches.

The drum gun is an excellent first choice weapon for firing down a corridor, taking down an enemy wall, or getting off damage at range before closing with a shotgun. Just be sure to have a backup in place for when your drum runs dry!

Rare Fortnite Drum Gun Stats
  • Damage: 27
  • Magazine Size: 50
  • Fire Rate: 9
  • Reload Time: 3 seconds
  • Ammo: Medium
Uncommon Fortnite Drum Gun Stats
  • Damage: 26
  • Magazine Size: 50
  • Fire Rate: 9
  • Reload Time: 3.15 seconds
  • Ammo: Medium

Picking up the rare blue drum gun 
Picking up the rare blue drum gun (thanks to GhostNinja for the screenshot)

Have you found the uncommon or rare Fortnite Drum Gun/Tommy Gun yet, and what do you think -- is it overpowered or just the right balance?

For the other Fortnite gudies at GameSkinny, be sure to visit the links below:

Fortnite Week 10 Challenge Guide: Search Chests in Junk Junction Tue, 03 Jul 2018 02:44:00 -0400 Sergey_3847

The final week of challenges in Fortnite's Season 4 brings another search chests challenge. This time you will need to find seven chests in Junk Junction, which is quite a small location for such a demanding task.

On top of that, all the players will want to land there and take their share, so this will be a hard one. If you want to find all seven chests in this week's challenge, then follow our quick guide below for all the info you need.

All Chest Locations in Junk Junction

Junk Junction is located in the northwestern part of the map right near the new soccer stadium located above Pleasant Park. The first three chests can be found in the building standing in the central part of the junction. Two of them are in the attic and another one is on the ground floor.

Then, move to the orange metal crushing machine in the northern area of the location and check it for another chest. After that head to the west of the junction and go up the ramp of the metal structure. You will see another chest there.

Go down and break the wall behind the metal structure. You will find another secret chest right behind it. And finally, go a bit to the south and claim another chest standing on top of the pile of crushed cars.

As you see, it is possible to get all seven chests in Junk Junction in one go, but other players will compete hard. So be sure to get eliminated before trying this challenge again. In this way the game will count the chests you've gotten previously.


Good luck getting all the chests during this week's search challenge, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, be sure to visit the links below:

How to Win in Rules of Survival's New Death Race Game Mode Mon, 02 Jul 2018 11:59:37 -0400 Stephanie Tang

It wasn't too long ago when PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds showed up on the PC landscape and unleashed a seismic wave of "fight to the death" battle royale frenzy. This was quickly followed (and, arguably, utterly demolished) by Epic Games' FortniteAnd while both games are currently neck and neck with their nearly concurrent mobile releases (having fully saturated every other platform on the planet, they're both making an effort to gain smartphone domination), this doesn't change the fact that other contenders may already be leagues ahead. 

Following in the initial wake of PUBG's rise in popularity, Chinese mobile mega corp NetEase Games threw everything at the metaphorical wall in the hopes that something would stick. Four separate mobile PUBG clones were pushed into the market (three of which made it into North America) with astonishingly few microtransaction opportunities. The intention appeared to be grow market share now, reap the rewards later. 

It seems to have worked. Rules of Survival is NetEase Games' most polished effort, and definitely the most popular, with more than 200 million downloads and 150 million players registered worldwide on both Android Google Play and Apple App Store (plus the game recently launched an even prettier version on PC through Steam). Not content to remain a copy, Rules of Survival has been releasing updates non-stop, and this latest Death Race mode is one more departure from its PUBG clone roots.

How do you play Death Race mode?

This brand new vehicle-based mode allows up to 15 teams of four players (each team gets one vehicle) to participate in massive shootouts and vehicular smash-ups as they race around Ghillie Island trying to remain the last car standing. 

The team leader starts out as the driver by default although you can swap out who gets designated driver duties once the match has begun (Since RoS is a battle royale game, most players consider it the least fun role to play. I felt a little like I was playing Mario Kart and it wasn't a bad switch up). 

Since you can't get out of the car, ramps have been added willy-nilly throughout the map for flying vehicle adventures, and drops pop up on the road like Temple Run upgrades that you drive through to collect. Air drops are common, so when you come across one, shoot it up and collect on the goodies that fate has given you. 

The object of the game is to keep your vehicle from exploding and killing everyone, so collision-smashing your way through other players is not the most ideal way of making it to the top. It's on the other three players to provide most of the vehicular murder. 

Tips for the Driver

Communication is key. You have a real edge, especially if you're playing on one of the mobile versions, if you are able to communicate well with your teammates. Most of the players are playing in public and probably won't be shouting into their mics, some also won't have headphones. (If you're playing on PC, the likelihood of player coordination on the other teams goes way up.)

This is especially important because while the driver is the one in control of the car, all players in it can mod it. While this is handy in terms of making repairs after taking damage, it is much more inconvenient when it comes to vehicle buffs (e.g. changing camo, oil, etc.).

Springs in particular will affect the driving mechanics the most, so it's much more in your favor if you are the one calling the shots on what's happening to the vehicle everyone else is riding around in. 

Choosing the Right Vehicle

The team leader gets to choose what they'll be driving throughout the match. From the outset you have a choice between four different vehicles: armed jeep, convertible sports car, off-road vehicle, and pickup truck. 

Each have their own advantages. For example, if you're thinking of sticking strictly to the roads, there's no better car than the convertible for acceleration and speed. Considering how this particular game mode litters the roads with ramps and acceleration pads, it's well worth it if you want to keep it to the streets.

If you're anything like me, you'll run off the roads and plow through the fields a lot so the off-road or higher defense vehicles might be a better call. 

Drive Sporadically As Needed

And only when needed. Let's face it, it's hard enough hitting a moving target when you are also situated on a moving target yourself. Give your teammates a break and give them a better chance at hitting what they're aiming at. 

Testing out your juking skills comes when it's time for you to escape - if, for example, the other vehicle has gone full ramming speed on you, and/or your car is really close to death. Live to fight another 10 minutes by whatever getaway means possible. Your teammates can help by shooting valiantly at your pursuers, but you can foil them by leading them to crash into trees and rocks with some tricky driving.

Check Your Chopper

They don't tell you ahead of time, but there are upgrades in the loot crates that drop throughout the map that will allow you to transform your vehicle (instantly) into a helicopter. 

Figure out the controls ahead of time so you don't get stuck trying to figure out how to change altitude partway through a battle, just when you got your hands on a hell of game changer. 

Tips for the Passengers

Communication is as important for the passengers as it is for the drivers. The driver has plenty of other concerns that you don't have to worry about - namely keeping your car upright and moving as necessary. It's your job to do most of the call outs, especially in areas with lots of buildings, where you can often find other teams just lying in wait. 

Note: Remember that while the team leader starts out by default as the driver, you can always ask to swap seats and take on the role for yourself. 

The passenger role is mostly straight forward. Shoot the other teams, alert your teammates to help you in murdering everyone else. It helps to keep an eye on your vehicle too, but that should mostly be the driver's job to know when it's necessary to bug out of a firefight.

Unlike other vehicle-based battles, players aren't able to exit their vehicle, so you don't need to watch out for players on foot sneaking up to your vehicle to mine it to kingdom come. 

Take Charge of Trunk Inventory

While taking care of the car should mostly be the driver's job, there are three passengers to split up the business of shooting everyone else. Communication is key, but at least one person should always check out what's going into the trunk and it probably shouldn't be the one operating the vehicle.

All players can access the trunk inventory by going through the backpack button. You'll pick up gear and upgrades by driving through them, and you'll often clog up what space you have with stuff you just don't need (e.g. unnecessary ammo for the wrong guns). Drag it off to dump and discard. 


That's it! This guide specifically refers to play tactics in the Death Match vehicle mode. if you're looking for guides specifically tailored to regular battle royale mode in Rules of Survival, you can check out some Tips for Staying Alive. Stay tuned for more guides and ways to stay on top of the scoreboard!

A Beginner's Guide to Darkness Rises Sat, 30 Jun 2018 20:09:11 -0400 Zack Palm

In Darkness Rises you take control of a hero who dashes sword first into the rising darkness spreading across the land. This gorgeous looking mobile game comes with plenty of adventures for you to go on as you hack and slash your way through the hordes of monsters, including a PvP mode for you to test your skills against other players.

Because there's so much going on when you first start this game, you're likely to miss a few key details the game didn't tell you watch out for during the tutorial. This guide will break down some important details you'll want to know before you go further into Darkness Rises.

You Should Have Four Characters on One Account

When you start the game you begin by choosing a character from four classes: Warrior, Wizard, Berserker, or an Assassin. Don't worry about if you don't like the first class you choose in Darkness Rises. You can create a character for each of the four classes, and you're encouraged to do so.

By having multiple characters on an account, all of the characters receive a stat bonus. This bonus increases based on how many you have and their own level. Spend time on each of them to raise the bonus further. This passive stat increases the more you play the game with each character, granting you access to higher level content.

Track Your Character Stats to Keep Up with Progression

You'll find you're going to loot plenty of equipment to add to your character. The best thing you can do is start choosing stats you want to focus on, such as defense, health, attack, critical damage, or critical damage. This will determine how your character plays.

Enhancement and stat priorities

Only enhance equipment with stats you want to prioritize. You don't want to equip a slightly better weapon and remove your old one, but realize the new item doesn't bulk up the stats you want your character focusing on. When you start to get to level 25, refer to your character's stats page as often as possible to observe your progression.

You can find the character stat page in the gear tab. When you're in the gear tab, find the small double-stacked arrow, just below your character. Click on that and a massive page detailing your character's attack, defense, and PvP information. You'll want to remember how to get this page as you climb your way up to level 30.

About The "Best in Slot" Suggestions

When you're on the item screen, the game will help determine the best equipment for your character with a small red dot next to it. This does help you take a quick glance at your items to know which ones you should focus on, but you should look at the finer details before deciding anything.

To do this, click on an item and you should see a descriptive pop up breaking down the stats of the item. Though the game tells you to use a specific item, if you're focusing on certain stats for your characters this screen will become your best friend to inform you what item you should enhance and keep on your character.

Use Your Blacksmith Wisely

At first, you won't visit your blacksmith too often. He's a resource you check in on every 24 hours to receive a handful of polishes and then go handle your other quests. Later on he becomes an extremely important mechanic in allowing you to achieve higher quality gear, where he fuses your fully leveled items together.

When you have two fully leveled up equipment pieces of the same grade, he fuses them together to craft an item a full grade higher.

You might feel tempted to use this to jump from grade C to grade B equipment, but you want to resist this thought process. The best thing to do is wait until all of your equipment is grade B and start doing this then. The reason: it doesn't take long to jump from grade C to grade B, far less time than it takes to progress from grade B to Grade A. 

Save your gold and materials for when all of your equipment is grade B. This way, when you obtain these powerful items you can use your reserved gold to start jumping up to grade A far faster than you previously would have. This will make hitting the hefty power wall of 115,000 feel like not such a bad experience.

The Game Tells You Where to Farm

One of the biggest things you'll find yourself doing in Darkness Rises is farming levels for gear. In order to enhance your gear, your stats, and provide materials for your Blacksmith you need to complete missions successfully. Running through the latest adventures may get you some gear, but you should always refer to your essence page to see what adventure levels you should farm.

When you're on the essence page, click on one of the six stats revolving around your character. Choose the stat you want to level up first. When you highlight this stat, you'll see the two components you need to level it up. If you're lacking of these two materials, click on the material and in the pop up menu click on the 'source' tab to see what adventure locations you can find this resource in.

Reserve Your Gold For Polish

A key component to Darkness Rises is upgrading your gear using weaker items or polishes. Of the two, polishes provide 1.5 more power than an item of the same grade. The game often quotes this throughout its loading menus.

You want to take this seriously when you have all of your gear at grade B. At grade B, you're wasting gold by breaking down weaker items to upgrade your current build. It's not worth it in the long run. Reserve your gold as much as possible for the polish materials you're going to receive from doing dungeons and raids. 

Do not worry about this before all of the equipment you have on your character reaches grade B. By that point, you should be a little past level 25 and nearly to 115,000 power.

Focus on Weapon Grades Not Sets

Many of the weapons you run across will come with a set bonus. When your character wears all of the items in the set, they receive a decent bonus to their stats to greatly increase their capabilities.

Thought these set bonuses are tempting to acquire, you do not want to focus on those until you start wearing grade S equipment. That's definitely a long time to wait for those, but before you reach this point you want to make sure your character can receive the most power they possibly can. Focusing too much on a set bonus can ruin your character's power progression, making it difficult for them to progress further in the story and adventure levels.


There you have it! These useful tips should help you out during your journey into Darkness Rises! Make sure to spend time on all four of your characters and complete their weekly and daily quests.

For more information on Darkness Rises, keep it here at GameSkinny!

FnaF Ultimate Custom Night Character List Guide Sat, 30 Jun 2018 19:37:05 -0400 Tobbpitt

The new Freddy's game Scott teased over the past few months is finally out, and as expected, it's got the largest animatronic roster yet!

Ultimate Custom Night is the dream Freddy's game, with over 50 animatronics from the series. You get to choose your animatronics and set their difficulties, and you can have every single one enabled at the same time for maximum spookage.

You can find all the UCN animatronic scare tactics all over the internet, but if you're new to the series, coming back to it, or simply forgetful, it's likely you've forgotten which games each character debuted in -- and that's where this guide comes in. Here we have all the animatronics listed, including hidden animatronics and the games they came from. Talk about FNaF history!

Animatronic Original Game
Freddy Fazbear
FNaF 1
FNaF 1
FNaF 1
 FNaF 1
Toy Freddy
 FNaF 2
Toy Bonnie
 FNaF 2
 FNaF 2
 FNaF 2
Balloon Boy (BB)
 FNaF 2
Jayjay (JJ)
 FNaF 2
Withered Chica
 FNaF 2
Withered Bonnie
 FNaF 2
 FNaF 2
Withered Golden Freddy
 FNaF 2
 FNaF 3
Phantom BB
 FNaF 3
Phantom Mangle
 FNaF 3
Phantom Freddy
 FNaF 3
Nightmare Freddy
& Freddles
 FNaF 4
Nightmare Bonnie
 FNaF 4
Nightmare Freddy
 FNaF 4
 FNaF 4
Jack O' Chica
 FNaF 4
Nightmare Mangle
 FNaF 4
 FNaF 4
Nightmare BB
 FNaF 4
Old Man Consequences
 FNaF World
Circus Baby
 FNaF Sister Location
 FNaF Sister Location
Funtime Foxy
 FNaF Sister Location
Funtime Chica
Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
 FNaF Sister Location
Trash &
the Gang
 Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Happy Frog
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Mr. Hippo
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Nedd Bear
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Orville Elephant
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Rockstar Freddy
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Rockstar Bonnie
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Rockstar Chica
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Rockstar Foxy
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator

Music Man
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
El Chip
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator

Molten Freddy
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Scrap Baby
  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
William Afton (Scraptrap)
 FNaf Sister Location

  Freddy Fazbear's Pizzeria Simulator
Phone Guy
 FNaF 1


Hidden characters

Animatronic Original Game
Dee Dee
 FNaF World
Nightmare Chica
 FNaF 4
FNaF Sister Location
FNaF Sister Location
FNaF Sister Location
FNaF World


Check out our other Five Nights at Freddy's articles and guides here on GameSkinny!

Steam Summer Sale: 20+ Great Online Co-op Games for Less than $10 Sat, 30 Jun 2018 19:32:38 -0400 Ashley Gill

Steam sales only come around a few times a year and PC gamers everywhere revere them as periods of amazing deals on games and terrible tragedies to their bank accounts.

If your group of friends is anything like mine, getting them all to both agree to and pay for a particular game is harder than herding feral cats. Maybe you're in a similar situation or maybe you're just on the prowl for some cheap multiplayer games. Whatever the case, we've compiled a sizable list to help you out.

All of the games listed below are:

  • Toting online co-op multiplayer for at least two players (most listed feature 4 player or more multiplayer)
  • Less than $10 so they're easy on your wallet

That sounds like a big win to me. Let's choo choo on through, and hopefully find you and your friend(s) a game you can play without stressing too much about cost.


Sale price: $4.99
Steam Store link

You'll see this game mentioned on just about every list of co-op games. This co-op sandbox-adventure has loads of content for any group of friends to go to town on. Terraria has stayed on the top played Steam games for 7 years for good reason.

Grim Dawn

Sale price: $7.49
Steam Store link

If you're looking to scratch your ARPG itch, you could do a lot worse than Grim Dawn. Even without the expansion, you can find dozens of hours of whackin' and lootin' in Grim Dawn. If you're not too keen on its darker aesthetic but do want an ARPG, the next option may be more down your alley.

Torchlight 2

Sale price: $4.99
Steam Store link

It may be older than Grim Dawn, but Torchlight 2 still has a lot of staying power if you've never given the game a chance. There is more content to be found in Grim Dawn but Torchlight 2 has a robust array of mods available, including content, quality of life, and classes. This is still a solid buy today in 2018, and it can be modded for up to 8-player multiplayer.

Castle Crashers

Sale price: $4.49
Steam Store link

Another staple co-op game sure to be on pretty much every co-op list, Castle Crashers is the poster boy for co-op beat'em ups. This is an easy one for all ages and kill levels to get into and have fun with.

BattleBlock Theater

Sale price: $4.49
Steam Store link

Another game from The Behemoth, the same studio behind Castle Crashers. BattleBlock Theater's campaign is completely co-op and it also features a healthy selection of hectic PvP modes, for when you want to prove your better than your friends once and for all.

Rocket League

Sale price: $9.99
Steam Store link

Before you say, "Ugh, no. Too mainstream," take a breath and consider Rocket League as a co-op game with a low barrier of entry and a whole lot of speed. Rocket League may not be your first choice, but it's an easy game to get a group of people to agree to hop onto for a quick round.

Risk of Rain

Sale price: $2.49
Steam Store link

Risk of Rain is a co-op game with an unquenchable bloodlust. Though not for everyone due to its extreme difficulty, Risk of Rain is an easy buy for roguelite fans or groups of friends who hate life. It's a hard game and it will knock you down a peg with ease, whether you've got 1 hour or 300 hours worth of gameplay logged.

Beat Hazard

Sale price: $2.99
Steam Store link

This one always seems to slip through the cracks since it's been blessing Steam with its presence for eight years now, but despite its age, Beat Hazard continues to be a recommended purchase for co-op play, providing you and your friend(s) are good at shmups. Beat Hazard lets you use your own music or one of many radio stations to generate enemies, which is what makes this one so unique.

Ultimate Chicken Horse

Sale price: $7.49
Steam Store link

Playing this game with a group of friends is an exercise in sadism. You and up to three other friends will be tasked with creating and completing the stages in Ultimate Chicken Horse, and you can bet at least one (or even all) of you will make them nearly impossible to beat, in the name of being the better platformer player. Ridiculously fun and honestly not as enraging as it sounds.

Keep Talking and Nobody Explodes

Sale price: $5.99
Steam Store link

An outlier among the other games in this collection, Keep Talking and Nobody Explodes only requires one person to buy the game. There's a reason for that: Only one player is allowed to see the screen at a time, so only one can directly defuse the bomb. The other players must tell the defuser what to do based on the instructions in the manual.

If it sounds a little convoluted, that's because it is by design. Can you and your friends defuse a bomb? Maybe, maybe not. But you can certainly yell at each other trying.

Don't Starve Together

Sale price: $7.49
Steam Store link

Don't Starve has stood as one of the more accessible survival games over the years, and the multiplayer expansion Don't Starve Together may be an even more enjoyable game than the base with the Reign of Giants expansion. Together contains both, plus the ability to die in the forest with your friends. If -- as in my case -- you tried the original game but didn't enjoy it much, you may still find this fun.

Left 4 Dead 2

Sale price: $1.99
Steam Store link

You may be dissuaded from picking Left 4 Dead 2 up based on its age. It's been out for 11 years now, it seems like everyone's been through the game. Why bother? If you haven't played it yet, this is your reminder to pick up L4D2 to play with your friends. It's still fun to this day, but it's best played with friends. Any community for a decade-old game is bound to be elitist and this game is no exception.


Sale price: $4.99
Steam Store link

If you don't play PAYDAY 2, it's possible the only thing you've heard about it was the hubbub about microtransactions a few years back. It's been a long time since then though, and the game is a solid heister. You don't need to play the first game to dive right into this one and, provided your group can cooperate, there are hours upon hours of heists for you to tackle.

Dungeon of The Endless

Sale price: $2.99
Steam Store link

How about something a little different? Amplitude's Endless universe has expanded this way and that, with "that" being Dungeon of the Endless, a pseudo-tower defense roguelike. In this, players must hoard resources and expand based on the ever-increasing threats of the depth of the dungeon. A single round in this game can take several hours and it is very hard, but if your group's into roguelikes you could do a lot worse.

Borderlands 2

Sale price: $4.99
Steam Store link

Borderlands 2 is another old staple that still holds up today, especially multiplayer. Pushing through this game with friends is satisfying as firefights are intense and the weapon system is a ARPG-style lootfest. Not many games age as well as this one -- you can come back years later and still have a ton of fun.

Golf With Your Friends

Sale price: $3.89
Steam Store link

If you just want a game to pay a little attention to while chatting, this is an easy choice. Golf With Your Friends isn't exactly rolling in content variety and only contains 7 levels with 18 holes, but things are kept fresh through golf ball shapes and game modes. A very easy game to just sit back and play while having a couple beers and a laugh.

Human: Fall Flat

Sale price: $7.49
Steam Store link

How about something a little less-in-your-face about its silliness? We've got some pretty quirky games listed here, but they're all a bit more obvious about it than the cooperative physics-based puzzle solving found in Human: Fall Flat. The one downside here is that there are not a lot of stages, but it's a good deal at this price. 

Project Zomboid

Sale price: $8.99
Steam Store link

Don't let this game's graphics and the year it entered Steam Early Access fool you: Project Zomboid is a fleshed-out survival sandbox with hundreds of potential hours of gameplay, with continued support from its developer as it slowly shambles toward full release. If you and your group can accept the high learning curve, you can have a great time with this game.

Portal 2

Sale price: $1.99
Steam Store link

The Portal games are famous for a lot of reasons and one of those reasons is (Spoilers!) the stellar co-op campaign. If you haven't played Portal 2 and you want a game to play with a friend, you may as well throw the $2 at Valve and see what all the hubbub is about.


Sale price: $2.24
Steam Store link

An other roguelike to add to the pile, Barony is the closest to a traditional roguelike of any of the games listed here. It looks old, it feels old, and it plays like an old game. That's perfectly fine: You'll be hard-pressed to find another game that takes the classic roguelike formula, turns it 3D and realtime, and allows for online co-op. This one's pretty niche but you're in for a good time if you're comfortable with classic roguelikes.

Endless Legend

Sale price: $7.49
Steam Store link

Though Endless Space is currently also on sale, I would recommend Endless Legend over it for its similarities to the Civilization series and its overall fun factor. This is a more traditional-style 4X game. Expand, form alliances, wage wars -- it's up to you. A worthy strategy addition to most gaming groups on a budget.

Resident Evil 5

Sale price: $4.99
Steam Store link

You don't hear much about Resident Evil 5 or 6 for a few reasons, but none of those reasons equate to them not being fun with friends. Resident Evil 5 is often overlooked in favor of 6 for co-op play because it retains the semi-tank controls found in its predecessor, but if you and a friend can adjust to that control style this is an intense and worthwhile co-op action game.

Resident Evil 6

Sale price: $7.49
Steam Store link

Like its predecessor, Resident Evil 6 is best played with a friend. Unlike its predecessor, it's got more modern, fluid controls and a whole lot of QTEs. This one is over-the-top in about every regard, to the extent I can't help but find it silly each playthrough. If you like classic Resi games, go with 5. If you can't deal with the antiquated controls, go with 6. The decision is as simple as that.

7 Days to Die

Sale price: $8.99
Steam Store link

One of the first titles in the survival game wave that paved the way for games such as Rust and ARK: Survival Evolved, 7 Days to Die still stands as one of the most played games on Steam and is just as fun now as when it came out. As with the two mentioned, 7 Days to Die allows you a great deal of freedom in your efforts to survive. Break, use, and do whatever you want to ensure your survival in a world overrun by over 50 types of zombies.

Orcs Must Die! 2

Sale price: $3.74
Steam Store link

The original Orcs Must Die! set off a chain reaction of action-tower defense clones, some good and some bad, but none really hold up to the sequel. Orcs Must Die! 2 is an improvement over the first game in almost every way, and has the added bonus of online multiplayer. It's easy to get into, easy to wrap your head around, and easy to spend too many hours in.

Tabletop Simulator

Sale price: $9.99
Steam Store link

This is a bit of a strange one since Tabletop Simulator itself isn't a game, but a mini-platform for tabletop gaming. The amount of games available via Tabletop Simulator are nearly endless, making this a fantastic purchase for any static group of friends who have trouble deciding on what to play or want to play board games without having to pick up after themselves.


These are definitely not all of the co-op games you can get for under $10 on Steam during this sale, but these are some I can personally recommend. I hope you've found at least one game you find worthy of your Steam library.

Tank Stars: A Battle Beginner's Guide Fri, 29 Jun 2018 20:59:30 -0400 Emily (Pokeflute)

Tank Stars is the newest free-to-play mobile game from developer Playgendary. You play as a tank who is trying to destroy another tank. Sound simple? Not quite. After a short tutorial, the game drops you into a world of tanks, artillery, and upgrades. If you're not sure where to start, you've come to the right place. Here are some tips for developing your strategy and blasting other tanks to bits.

The Battlefield

Use the ground to your advantage: it’s easier to fire shots from the top of a hill, so use your fuel to get as high above your opponent as you can. Striking the ground in front of them can also make it harder for them to line up their shots; the terrain also changes naturally as the battlefield is hit multiple times during a match.

Keep an eye on the distance between you and your enemy. If you get too close, the splash from your weapons can hurt you as well, but being further away also means that it’s harder to land shots.

In addition to damage, most attacks also cause knockback—missiles move tanks when they connect. Use this to your advantage by knocking your opponent into a hole, causing them to use more fuel to get out and making their next shot more difficult.

Green boxes will periodically spawn on the battlefield. Each contains a powerful weapon that can be used against an enemy tank. Enemies can also grab these boxes, so snag them if you can, but don’t ruin your positioning just to get one, as it can put you at a disadvantage. (The boxes often spawn at either end of the map, making it easy for tanks on both sides to grab them.)


Attacks have two aspects to them: power and angle. Power determines how far across the map a missile travels, and angle is how high in the air they go. Enemies far away from you will need a shot with high power and a low angle, while enemies closer to you require a shot with low power but a high angle.

Different weapons have different distances. Some of the missiles have a shorter range than others, so consider what weapon you want to use before using your fuel to move within range. The Abrams tank has a lot of short-range missiles, which function better if you’re closer to the enemy.

Each purchasable tank comes with different kinds of missiles. Learn which tank suits your play style best and use your coins to buy upgrades for it. The Vertical Slam ability, which comes with the Abrams tank, is useful because it homes in on the enemy if you get close enough, allowing you to get hits while still working on your aim. As you become more skilled, it’s best to find a tank that has a mix of short- and long-range weapons so that you can handle a variety of enemy placements.

Tanks’ weapons are more important than the tanks themselves, which are just about identical. The best way to find your play style is to try out all of the tanks’ arsenals and then pick the one with the weapons that work best for you. Once you’ve picked your favorite and started upgrading it, there’s really no reason to pick another unless you want a change of pace.

Tank Spotlight: Coalition

When you start the game, you'll begin with the Abrams tank. While its short-range missiles are good to start with, you should start testing other tanks as soon as possible to find the one that fits your play style. The most easily purchasable tank is Coalition.

Each tank's collection of weapons is unique, and Coalition's is no different. Coalition has more long-range missiles than Abrams, and its missiles focus more on area damage. Here's a little about each missile and how to use them.

Artillery Support: This is a long-range weapon that causes no damage on immediate impact, but causes three large missiles to fall from the sky in a path from right to left. It works well for enemy tanks that are grouped together, as it's difficult (if not impossible) to hit one tank with all three strikes.

Cluster Strike: Like Artillery Support, this missile deals no damage during impact. However, after it strikes an area or a tank, it causes a cluster of mines to fall from the sky. Landing a perfect shot will cause the missiles to combo and deal more damage, so make sure to aim carefully.

V-Strike: V-Strike is significantly more short-ranged than the previous two weapons, so it should only be used for enemies that are really close to you. After striking, it causes a volley of missiles to be shot up from the air in a V shape, cascading down on the tank below it. It does significant damage to the environment, so it can also be used to blast a hole in the ground that makes it harder for your enemies to aim.

Leaper: This is a good missile for hitting enemies all the way across the map. Leaper is a long-range weapon that fires a second shot from its initial strike point, making it an excellent choice for groups of enemy tanks.

Scatter Shot: It might not look as impressive as its long-range friends, but Scatter Shot is a powerful missile in its own right. It unleashes a barrage of shots a short distance from the impact site,decimating any tank caught in its range. Note that this is one of the few weapons that does not affect the environment, so don't try to use it to blast a hole in the ground.

Auger Shot: The Auger Shot is probably the most unique weapon in Coalition's arsenal. It sticks to the enemy, then releases three missiles from the ground that move up and blast the area around the initial strike point. The attacks don't do much damage, but it's definitely a cool shot to watch.


Each tank is upgradeable, as are each of its weapons. They can be upgraded with weapon cards and coins, which you gain through winning battles and opening chests. Once you’ve gained enough cards to upgrade a weapon, you pay a certain number of coins to unlock the upgrade.

Each upgrade grants a star for that weapon, and there’s a 5-star maximum for any given weapon. These upgrades provide higher attack damage (and occasionally greater explosion range), so they’re useful for facing other players in the game’s PvP mode. Tanks can also be upgraded in the same way (which increases their HP), though the required tank cards are rarer.

A quick way to gain coins and tank/weapon cards is simply to open the game once a day. Free chests are given for the 5th, 10th, and 15th consecutive days of logging into the game, and materials can also be gathered through completing daily missions.

The game has ads, which are an annoyance present in many free-to-play games, but sitting through them can actually be helpful. You can watch a video ad—usually about 30 seconds long—to unlock additional chests and get a free revive if your tank is destroyed in an AI or Tournament battle.

Tournament Mode

Chests can also be earned through Tournament Mode, the game’s toughest challenge. The mode allows you to put two of your tanks up against waves of enemy tanks, and the goal is to clear all of the waves without getting both of your tanks destroyed. Tournaments can be played on easy, normal, and legendary difficulties, and you’ll need two different tanks for each difficulty (for example, you can’t use a tank in normal difficulty that you used in easy.) Winning each difficulty grants precious chests.

Area-effect weapons are useful in Tournament mode. Since you need to destroy several tanks for each wave, blasting more than one at a time makes for more efficient combat. Knock enemies together first, then hit them with a large area attack for the most bang for your buck.


These tips should get you ready for epic tank battles between you and your friends. The game's multiplayer modes allow you to play against other people you know as well as random people over the internet. Once you've found the tank for you and upgraded your arsenal to the max, you'll have no problem blasting your way to tank superiority. 

Might And Magic Eagles Guide -- Evolving Arcane Eagles In Elemental Guardians Fri, 29 Jun 2018 17:11:59 -0400 Ty Arthur

Hundreds of creatures are available to summon in Might & Magic: Elemental Guardiansallowing for myriad teams for arena PvP battles or resource grinding in the towers.

One of the most sought-after are the magic-focused eagles crafted by the wizard factions. Arcane Eagles have been a staple of the Might & Magic series for years, so of course, they make an appearance in the mobile gatcha' entry Elemental Guardians.

This time around, there are four elemental versions with varying skill load outs, and each of those four types can evolve between three varieties from bird to eagle to Simurgh.

Arcane Eagles Evolution List

All four versions of the Eagles have the Saboteur type but vary considerably in their nat star rating and special abilities. These abilities are important not just for how your team will stack up on the elements, but also in how you will craft your battle strategy.

To evolve from Arcane Bird to the Arcane Eagle form and eventually to Simurgh form, you need evolution materials of the appropriate elemental type (such as glacial material for the ice version), a number of skill books equal to the creature's nat star ranking, and 10,000 crystals.

When hitting the second two evolutions, you will get a random upgrade on the Eagle's basic attack that adds a new effect. Unfortunately, you can't manually pick this upgrade. But of the options available, the self-healing effect tends to be the best evolution available.

Fire Eagle


  • Order Bolt -- Basic attack against an enemy.

  • Crescent Burst -- Increases attack of all allies for 1 turn, and refills their turn bars by 25%. Reusable in 3 turns.

  • Elemental Reinforcement -- Attacks all enemies, inflicting moderate damage; grants elemental advantage to all allies for 2 turns and poisons all enemies for 2 turns. Reusable in 5 turns.

Elemental Reinforcement is an ability that can radically change the flow of combat, especially if you are planning ahead on your elemental match ups against the enemies in the Tower Of Houses or PvP. That alone makes the fire Arcane Eagle one of the better options for arena battles, so if you have a choice, focus on evolving the fire version over the others.

The fire version's base stats are also incredible on health and resistance fronts, making it one of the best all-around options for creatures.

Arcane Bird Base Stats:

  • HP: 2459
  • Attack: 385
  • Defense: 237
  • Speed: 72
  • Crit Chance: 20%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 20%
  • Resistance: 20%

Arcane Eagle Base Stats:

  • HP: 2663
  • Attack: 418
  • Defense: 257
  • Speed: 72
  • Crit Chance: 20%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 20%
  • Resistance: 20%

Flaming Simurgh Base Stats:

  • HP: 2969
  • Attack: 468
  • Defense: 287
  • Speed: 72
  • Crit Chance: 20%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 20%
  • Resistance: 45%

Arcane Fire Eagle in Might and Magic Elemental Guardians Arcane Eagle: Fire

Water Eagle


  • Order Bolt -- Basic attack against an enemy.

  • Crescent Burst -- Decreases attack of all enemies for 1 turn, 70% chance of lowering their turn bar by 20%. Reusable in 4 turns.

  • Mass Stone Skin -- Attacks all enemies and shelter all allies from 40% incoming damage for 2 turns. 75% chance of decreasing their speed for 2 turns. Reusable in 5 turns.

Although it doesn't match the flaming Eagle's base stats, the water Eagle is still a killer addition to a team, and Mass Stone Skin is a good all-around skill that has a lot of usefulness in any combat situation.

Arcane Bird Base Stats:

  • HP: 1561
  • Attack: 168
  • Defense: 120
  • Speed: 73
  • Crit Chance: 20%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 20%
  • Resistance: 20%

Arcane Eagle Base Stats:

  • HP: 1765
  • Attack: 202 
  • Defense: 140
  • Speed: 73
  • Crit Chance: 20%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 20%
  • Resistance: 20%

Frost Simurgh Base Stats:

  • HP: 2071
  • Attack: 252
  • Defense: 170
  • Speed: 80
  • Crit Chance: 20%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 20%
  • Resistance: 20%

A water eagle floats above a pedestal in M&M  Arcane Eagle: Water

Air Eagle


  • Order Bolt -- Basic attack against an enemy.

  • Thunderstorm -- Inflicts great damage and mutes enemy special abilities for 1 turn. Reusable in 3 turns.

  • Winded Curse -- Attacks all enemies, 35% chance of putting them to sleep for 2 turns. Reusable in 5 turns.

The air version has noticeably lower stats than either fire or water, making this a much less attractive option when you get a random summon. The Thunderstorm ability can still be helpful, however, especially if you have an enemy creature constantly vexing you with a debuffing or paralyzing ability.

Arcane Bird Base Stats:

  • HP: 1390
  • Attack: 266
  • Defense: 70
  • Speed: 77
  • Crit Chance: 25%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 25%
  • Resistance: 10%

Arcane Eagle Base Stats:

  • HP: 1594
  • Attack: 299
  • Defense: 90
  • Speed: 77
  • Crit Chance: 25%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 25%
  • Resistance: 10%

Storm Simurgh Base Stats:

  • HP: 1900
  • Attack: 349
  • Defense: 120
  • Speed: 77
  • Crit Chance: 25%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 50%
  • Resistance: 10%

An Air arcane eagles flies above a pedestal in the creature detail screen Arcane Eagle: Water

Earth Eagle


  • Order Bolt -- Basic attack against an enemy.

  • Arcane Block -- Attack an enemy; prevents them from receiving healing effects for 2 turns, and 40% chance of putting them to sleep for 2 turns. Reusable in 4 turns.

  • Sand Gale -- Attacks an enemy with an attack increase based on own defense; fully increases the remaining waiting turns on their skills on cooldown. Reusable in 5 turns.

The Earth version of Arcane Eagle is easily the least useful of the four elements in all categories: PvP, Tower Of Trials/Elemental Towers, and glyph grinding.

The stats are slightly worse than the air version, and the abilities are quite poor. Sand Gale is really only useful if you are focused around defense glyphs, and its secondary ability only helps if the enemies are already on cooldown and don't have an ability coming up ready to use this turn. 

Arcane Bird Base Stats:

  • HP: 1397
  • Attack: 261
  • Defense: 72
  • Speed: 77
  • Crit Chance: 25%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy: 25%
  • Resistance: 10%

Arcane Eagle Base Stats:

  • HP: 1595
  • Attack: 294
  • Defense: 92
  • Speed: 77
  • Crit Chance: 25%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy:  25%
  • Resistance: 10%

Earth: Simurgh Base Stats:

  • HP: 1901
  • Attack: 344
  • Defense: 122
  • Speed: 77
  • Crit Chance: 25%
  • Crit Damage: 150%
  • Accuracy:  50%
  • Resistance: 10%

The useless earth eagle flies with green wings Arcane Eagle: Earth

Have you managed to pull a fire Arcane Bird yet and evolve it all the way up to Simurgh? Let us know in the comments below!

If you still need more help with this addictive mobile game, check out our full Elemental Guardians tier list or find our complete archive of Might & Magic guides over here.

Fortnite Week 9 Treasure Map Guide: Finding the Battle Star in Haunted Hills Thu, 28 Jun 2018 09:00:38 -0400 Sergey_3847

One of the biggest surprises for all Fortnite players this week was the brand new challenge that appeared at the very last moment. Instead of looking in Moisty Mire, which was the original challenge, this time you will need to follow the treasure map found in Haunted Hills.

When you find the map, you need to be able to identify the location of the Battle Star in order to complete this challenge. If you want to know how to quickly get there, then follow our guide below.

Fortnite map showing the location of the battle star map for week 9

The map itself can be located in the Haunted Hills, but you don't really need to go there to be able to claim this week's Battle Star. Just follow the map above for the exact location of your prize.

If you are not familiar with the location then just land in the northwestern part of the map at the Junk Junction. It's the area right next to the new soccer stadium, which is located right above Pleasant Park.

Enter the junkyard and go to the northern area, where you will see an orange car crushing machine and a pile of crushed cars. Climb up that pile and the Battle Star will be right on top of it.

Walk up to the star and collect it. This will complete Week 9 challenge of Season 4.


That's all for this week's Season 4 treasure map challenge. For other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, check out the list below:

Fortnite Week 9 Challenge Guide: Search Chests in Moisty Mire Thu, 28 Jun 2018 08:09:21 -0400 Sergey_3847

Getting the best chests in Moisty Mire can be a bit of a hassle in this Week 9 challenge for Fortnite. The entire movie set area is filled with chests, but you can easily get eliminated by other players, who will want to take those chests for themselves.

So, if you don't want to take too much damage and just quickly get your seven chests, you can take a look at the guide below and see for yourself which spots are the safest to loot.

All Chest Locations in Moisty Mire

Fortnite map showing all chest locations in Moisty Mire

While everybody else will try and snatch the chests at the movie set near Moisty Mire, you can just go north and west and grab four chests at the two big trees. One of them hides three chests, while the other one, which is located a bit to the south, has another chest for you to loot.

Also, check out the ice-cream truck in that same area -- you may get your fifth chest there. Then go to the opposite side of the mire to the east and check the old shack that should be holding another chest under the stairs.

However, if you still want to get the chests from the movie set, then at least try not to get too close to the big tree, where all the action is concentrated. Instead check out the boats and the trucks surrounding the set, and that's where you can get a few more chests without getting killed on spot.


That's it for all loot chest locations in Moisty Mire for this Week 9 Challenge. For other Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny, check the links below:

Fortnite Week 10 Battle Star Guide: Search Between Movie Titles Thu, 28 Jun 2018 08:04:03 -0400 Sergey_3847

This week's Fortnite Battle Star location is encoded within the titles of the movies that can be seen near Risky Reels. You should know this location well as it is the only drive-in theater on the map.

However, you don't even need to look for the movie titles themselves. Just follow our quick guide below, and you'll easily find the Battle Star and complete the challenge for Week 10 of Season 4.

Fortnite map showing location of battlestar for week 9 challenges

If you look at the announcement at the drive-in theater, you'll discover that the movie titles have changed to the following:

  • White Lion
  • The Orange Crusher
  • TV Dreams

White Lion is obviously referring a statue of a lion located right in front of the new soccer stadium in the northwestern part of the map, right above Pleasant Park. You'll notice the statue at the entrance of the stadium.

The Orange Crusher refers to the car-crushing machine located at Junk Junction, west from the stadium. This machine is painted bright orange, so that's definitely what you're looking for.

Lastly, the TV Dreams movie title refers to the TV studio north of the stadium. And by looking at the intersection of these three spots, you'll find the Battle Star on the patch of land with no grass near the road (see the screenshot above for exact location).

Walk up to the Battle Star and claim your reward. This will complete the challenge for Week 10.


That's all for this week's Season 4 Battle Star challenge. For other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, check out the list below:

Where Is Playground Mode In Fortnite? Wed, 27 Jun 2018 13:24:32 -0400 Ty Arthur

Move over 50 vs 50 and Solid Gold, the most eagerly anticipated new limited time event in Fortnite is unquestionably the missing-in-action Playground mode!

Fortnite's Playground LTM was supposed to drop this morning allowing teams of four players to fully explore the map with no shrinking storm, friendly fire turn on, and infinite respawns over the course of a full hour. Here's what Epic said were supposed to get:

Train, explore, battle! Show us your creativity in the new Playground LTM as you drop onto the island with up to 3 friends.

Except not so much, as the mode disappeared almost immediately after coming online with the 4.5 update. Where is Playground mode?

          Final Fight is cool and all, but there seems to be a missing mode here...

When Will Playground Limited Time Mode Appear?

It would appear that this smaller grouped matchmaking broke the game, as queue times skyrocketed and no one could get in to play at all. It isn't clear if this was a bug in the code or just an issue with far too many players trying to get into a match with far fewer available slots. 

To their credit, Epic was quick about acknowledging the problem and letting people know Playground would be taken offline due to the matchmaking problems. 

Earlier this afternoon an update arrived via Twitter indicated the problem is nearly resolved, but there's no ETA yet on when it will be officially re-instated.

Since this was the biggest addition of the 4.5 update patch, expect it to drop tonight or tomorrow morning when Week 9 of Season 4 gets into full swing. If you see it come online be sure to let us know so we can update this article!

Why Is Playground Limited Time?

While everyone waits with baited breath for the Playground mode to be re-enabled, there's a big question on all our minds -- why not have this be a permanent feature?

A clear answer hasn't come from Epic yet as to why the Playground mode is listed as limited time, since this seems like something that would be useful for everyone, all the time. Who doesn't want to learn how to play better without having to re-load and and wait to join another match after dying? This seems like a win-win for players, who can improve their Fortnite skills and have more fun doing it.

The only downside there is that players might quit going into the competitive modes if they can instead have more fun infinitely blowing each other without having to return to the lobby.

Clearly, that might put a damper on solo, duos, and squads mode and lead to less money for Epic as fewer people buy the battle pass content. That little kink in the works may explain why Playground is limited to four players and will only exist for a limited time.

For a glimpse of what's in store when it finally comes back online, check out the trailer below.

Are you stoked for to try out Playground mode, and what weapon or skill are you looking to improve on in Fortnite? Sound off in the comments section below!

Haven't finished the Season 4, Week 9 challenges yet or still looking for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny? Check out the latest below:

Fortnite Dual Pistols Arrive In Delayed 4.5 Update Wed, 27 Jun 2018 13:05:44 -0400 Ty Arthur

The wait is over -- that delayed 4.5 patch is finally here for Fortnite fanatics to get their hands on extra firepower and try out some more limited time modes. As we dive into Week 9 of Season 4, a brand spanking new kind of weapon drop arrives, although it will seem just a bit familiar.

Rather than adding in dual wielding of the standard existing guns, now you can pick up dual pistols as a single weapon in Fortnite, which chews through ammo but increases your damage output considerably for those who like a light gun with little recoil.

Fortnite Dual Pistols Stats

The dual pistols appear as both epic and legendary variants and can be found as floor drops, supply drops, or in the standard gold chests. The epic version fires for 41 damage, while legendary goes up to 43 base damage.

While the recoil is low and the reload time isn't too crazy, the spread is quite high and there's no first shot accuracy bonus, so accuracy won't be the strong suit unless you are firing off small numbers of rounds at an unaware enemy.

"Spray and pray" is more what they are going for here. These aren't long range guns by any means, so don't expect to be doing much sniping. Inside tight corridors in Tilted Towers or similar areas though, these can be a better weapon than something like the rocket launcher where you can damage yourself, or the shotgun where you have limited ammo capacity and high reload.

Both of the dual pistols fire simultaneously when you click and they draw from a single supply of medium ammo, so watch that ammo counter closely! This definitely isn't the never-ending mini gun scenario that frustrated so many players a few updates back.

 Grabbing legendary dual pistols as a floor drop (thanks to TheGoblin for the screenshot)

What's On The Horizon For Fortnite after dual pistols?

Adding in those epic and legendary dual pistols was just the beginning of new content set to arrive soon. Playground mode bade a brief appearance, but was taken offline immediately due to problems.

Although they (mostly) weren't implemented yet in the Fortnite 4.5 patch notes, very big changes are coming to the base gameplay in Battle Royale mode shortly -- likely along with Season 5 just a handful of weeks from now.

Expect to see the resource cap lowered and for tweaks to be made to building strength and shotgun damage, as those are the two areas that the top players have most come to rely on during the end-game. Here's what was said in a post straight from the developers:

It’s important to support a variety of late game strategies, that don’t boil down to “just build lol”. We strongly believe that the evolution of Fortnite supports a wide range of play styles and counterplay. Currently, the superiority of shotguns, rockets, and uncapped building are such a dominant play style in the final circle that most other strategies are being drowned out.

One of those changes is already here, as Shotgun damage to structures has been reduced by 50% for Pump Shotgun, and 25% for both Tactical Shotgun and Heavy Shotgun.

Epic wants to see games end with something other than a crazed wall-building fest until one person gets off a lucky shotgun blast or rocket launcher hit, as that's how most #1 Victory Royale scenarios now arrive.

If you've been relying on that strategy, its time to start learning the other weapons now!

 She doesn't look too happy about the changes either!

Are you digging the dual pistols, and what do you think of the impending changes to building and shotgun damage? Let us know your thoughts in the comments section below!

Haven't finished the Season 4, Week 9 challenges yet or still looking for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny? Check out the latest below:

Awesome Adventures Of Captain Spirit Maze And Treasure Guide Tue, 26 Jun 2018 17:31:38 -0400 Ty Arthur

If you've ever wanted to spend the afternoon as a kid pretending to be a superhero once again, now's the time to pick The Awesome Adventures Of Captain Spirit!

One of your superhero tasks involves decoding the maze of doom treasure map on your bedroom wall. Haven't figured out the maze yet to find the treasure? We've got you covered with a a full guide below.

Looking for the solution to the Captain Spirit dad cell phone PIN puzzle instead? The full answer to that mystery is found right here.

Maze Of Doom Map Solution

First up, leave the house and head into the backyard, then climb up into the tree house.

While sitting and looking forward, turn to your left and look inside the secret stash box. Grab the secret decoder sitting to the left of the baseball cards inside the box.

 Getting the decoder in the secret stash

Leave the tree house and return to your room, where the map is found on the wall. Interact with the map to use the decoder and find the location of the treasure.

Move the decoder up and left towards the center, and then rotate it clockwise (the numbers and circles should line up) until he says "The treasure map is not secret anymore, it's mine!"

The image below shows the exact positioning to line up the map and get the solution.

 Lining up the treasure map

Pay attention to the numbers and arrows, because they tell you how to turn when you are inside the actual maze to reach the treasure.

With the map decoded, go back outside in the yard and enter the junk pile in the snow. Once inside, the interior will look quite different, and its oddly larger on the inside than the outside.

 Entering the junk pile maze

Crawl forward through the maze and turn when you hit a junction following the marks on the decoded map.

The correct path to take is left, right, left, and then left a final time to complete the Captain Spirit maze of doom and find the treasure!

 Left, right, left, left!

Pop out the other side of the terrifying junk maze to find a cache of hidden photos out in the snow. Need help with the other puzzles in the game? Check out the rest of our Awesome Adventures Of Captain Spirit guides here.

Captain Spirit Phone PIN Puzzle Guide Tue, 26 Jun 2018 16:40:35 -0400 Ty Arthur

To get you all stoked for the upcoming Life Is Strange 2, the totally free demo for The Awesome Adventures Of Captain Spirit just landed on PC and console -- and it offers a bridge between the two games.

As with Max's time-twisting adventures in the first entry of the seemingly burgeoning series, you'll need brain power to overcome some of the puzzles found here. 

One puzzle is a PIN to your dad's cell phone, which you'll need to find to play the mobile mini-game, Hawt Dawg Man Mustard Party 2. The trouble is that there's room for 11 numbers (the actual PIN code is only 8), which is a staggering number of potential combos if you're guessing randomly.

Below we show you how to the solve the puzzle in Captain Spirit.

Picking up dad's phone to unlock the Hawt Dog mini game Picking up dad's phone to unlock the Hawt Dog mini game

How to Solve Dad's Phone PIN Puzzle

Here's the thing -- the code isn't actually listed anywhere in the game. You can't find it written in a note or scribbled on anything no matter where you search. This is a puzzle you have to decode yourself based on your knowledge of the game. 

There are a bunch of possible answers to try based on numbers you find in the story, from birthdays to death dates and the garage locker combo lock -- but none of them will work.

 Trying to figure out the PIN code Trying to figure out the PIN code

The reason is that the code isn't a date but rather a numerical representation of a word. Just spell HAWTDAWG on the phone -- which is 42983294 on the keypad -- to unlock your dad's phone PIN.

Yep, you've got to remember your old fashioned 1 = ABC, 2 = DEF, 3 =GHI style code combinations from rotary dial phones! This is one instance where the old fogies who didn't grow up with smartphones have an edge over the younglings...

How were you supposed to know the key was HawtDawg spelled out in numbers? Hawt Dawg Man is referenced a few times before this point in the game, and you know the game is installed on the phone. Eventually, you'll end up trying it as you run out of other potential number combinations.

There's even a popular fan theory developing that the main character's deceased mother developed the bizarre mobile title, so it would make sense for that to be the dad's PIN code.


 Captain Spirit Phone PIN Solution Captain Spirit Phone PIN Solution

How to Play Hawt Dawg Man Mustard Party 2

After the phone is unlocked, you can actually play the Hawt Dawg Man Mustard Party 2 mini-game if you want, which is about as bizarre as it sounds.

Just press A to um, "squeeze the mustard" and jump over obstacles. The fact that he never seems to run out of mustard is kind of disconcerting.

Try to avoid the flaming barbecues on the ground (obviously) and the flying turkeys strapped to missiles in the air. Meanwhile, grab any mustard packets you come across to increase your score.

When you hit a missile or barbecue its game over, but you can re-try as many times as you want to get a higher score.

Hawt Dawg Man Mustard Party 2 meta mini mobile game What in the heck am I even looking at right now?

Still looking for any other help in this free Life Is Strange 2 spin-off demo? Let us know where you're stuck and we'll get up some more articles covering the other codes and puzzles! 

Heir Of Light Character Tier List Tue, 26 Jun 2018 11:48:09 -0400 Ty Arthur

Although the combat takes place in a fast-paced, 3D arena, at its core Heir Of Light follows the basic gacha formula, complete with summoning randomized creatures, evolution, adding runes, and so on.

Of course that means there's a tier list to learn so you can put together the best possible team of warriors -- assuming you get lucky enough to summon the highest ranked creatures!

Heir Of Light Tier List

We won't bother listing the nat 1 star creatures, as in the vast majority of cases these are just fodder for enhancing your stronger characters. Creatures come in different elements as they evolve and awaken, so you may see the same name repeatedly or on different ranking tables.

Keep in mind that creatures can be upgraded via rune enhancements to shore up weaknesses or exaggerate natural strengths, so your mileage may vary and in some cases lower ranked creatures may actually be better than listed.

S Rank

These are the indispensable Heir Of Light creatures that will nearly always beat out all others, regardless of element, level, or rune loadout. You want these creatures in your battles as often as possible.

Character Element Class
 Heylel  Dark Ranged DPS 
 Opehelia  Light  Support 
Lucien [A]   Forest Support
 Carmilla  Water  Tank 
 Xita  Light  Melee DPS 
 Lucien  Fire  Ranged DPS
 Lucien  Light  Healer
 Lucien  Dark  Ranged DPS
 Enoch  Light  Tank 
 Leto  Light Healer
 Leto  Dark Ranged DPS
 Rem  Fire Tank 
 Henri  Dark  Tank 


A Rank

Only slightly less useful than S rank, these creatures have a few flaws that mean they won't always dominate in every situation, but in most cases these will result in very powerful combat groups.

Character Element Class
 Ishmael  Dark  Tank
 Bjorn  Fire  Melee DPS
 Miya  Forest  Healer
 Saighead  Water  Ranged DPS
 Rem  Water  Melee DPS
 Rem  Forest  Tank
 Heylel  Light  Healer
 Leto [A]  Forest  Ranged DPS
 Leto [A]  Fire  Ranged DPS
 Leto [A]  Water   Support
 Lucien [A]  Water   Ranged DPS
 Lucien [A]  Dark  Healer
 Lucien  Water  Support
Lucien  Forest  Ranged DPS
 Carmilla  Dark  Melee DPS
 Carmilla   Light   Melee DPS 
Xita   Fire   Melee DPS
Xita Water  Melee DPS
Xita Forest   Melee DPS
 Xita  Dark   Melee DPS
 Leto Water   Support 
 Koume  Fire  Melee DPS 
  Koume  Water  Melee DPS
 Hopkins  Dark   Ranged DPS 
 Griselda  Forest  Tank
Hern   Forest  Healer
Hern   Light   Support
 Laura  Light  Ranged DPS
 Laura  Fire  Ranged DPS
 Belladonas  Fire  Support
 Enoch  Dark  Melee DPS
Torhino   Water   Healer
Torhino  Forest  Tank
Reynar   Light   Melee DPS 
 Mary  Water  Ranged DPS
 Mary  Light  Healer
Gretel  Light  Melee DPS
 Dunkelhund  Dark  Healer 
Gwyllgi  Dark  Melee DPS


B Rank

These are the basic mid-range creatures that you will be struggling with until you can luck out with the higher rankings. Although not terrible, each one has some flaw that makes them less useful in combat than they could be compared to other creatures.

Character Element Class
Rem  Light  Melee DPS 
Rem  Dark  Tank 
Heylel  Fire   Ranged DPS
Heylel  Water   Support
Heylel  Forest   Healer
 Leto [A] Light  Ranged DPS
 Leto [A] Dark  Ranged DPS
 Lucien [A] Light  Ranged DPS
 Carmilla Forest   Support 
 Leto Fire  Ranged DPS 
 Leto Forest  Support
 Koume Light  Melee DPS
  Koume Dark  Melee DPS 
 Hopkins Fire  Ranged DPS
  Hopkins Water  Ranged DPS
  Hopkins Forest  Ranged DPS
  Hopkins Light  Ranged DPS
 Griselda Fire  Healer
 Griselda Light  Support
 Griselda  Dark   Tank
Hern  Fire   Melee DPS
Hern  Water   Support
 Laura Forest  Ranged DPS 
Laura  Dark  Ranged DPS 
 Belladonas Water Ranged DPS 
 Belladonas Forest Ranged DPS 
 Belladonas Light Ranged DPS 
 Belladonas Dark Ranged DPS 
 Charlotte Fire Melee DPS
  Charlotte Water Melee DPS
  Charlotte Forest Melee DPS
  Charlotte Light Melee DPS
  Charlotte Dark Melee DPS
Usher  Fire  Tank
 Usher Light  Melee DPS 
 Enoch Fire  Melee DPS
 Enoch  Water  Melee DPS 
 Enoch Forest Melee DPS 
 Torhino Fire  Tank 
Henri  Fire  Tank
Henri Water  Tank 
Henri  Forest  Tank 
 Henri    Light Tank
 Marat Water  Support 


C Rank

This is generally the bottom of the barrel, but there is some variation within the creatures at this ranking. Some of these characters can be used strategically to decent effect, while others are straight up garbage. In most cases, you want anyone else besides these characters, however.

Character Element Class
 Carmilla Fire  Melee DPS 
 Koume Forest  Support
 Griselda Water  Tank
 Laura Water  Support 
 Usher Water  Melee DPS
 Usher  Forest  Melee DPS
 Usher  Dark  Melee DPS 
 Torhino Dark  Melee DPS 
 Mary Fire  Healer 
 Gwyllgi Fire Melee DPS
 Marat Fire  Melee DPS
 Monolith Fire  Tank 
Rhamaan  Fire  Tank 
 Otik Fire  Tank 
 Gottorp Fire  Melee DPS 


Grove Urchin Garbage like this exists to recycle for leveling your higher star characters

How would you rank the various Heir Of Light characters, and what did you think of our tier list rankings? Let us know your favorite team to use in battle in the comments below!

Cuisine Royale Weapon and Kitchenware Guide Mon, 25 Jun 2018 16:53:03 -0400 Zack Palm

If you haven't heard, battle royale games are a huge deal. They're such a big deal, the developers, Darkflow Software, behind Enlisted, an MMO squad-based shooter, created an April's Fools joke for their community and released a battle royale mode called Cuisine Royale. The joke was such a success the developers decided to release Cuisine Royale as a standalone game and made it free for a limited time for anyone to try on Steam.

Because this is a battle royale game, you need to know which of the weapons and equipment you come across are the best so you can succeed in every match! 

You can carry up to four different kinds of weapons: two primary, one secondary, and one melee weapon.

Primary Weapons

Browning M1918

This weapon is a monster. It's an automatic rifle designed to mow down your enemies a medium or short range away. The rifle's magazine only contains 20 rounds at a time, but it makes short work of any foolish enough to try and close the distance.

M1903 Springfield

You may recognize the Springfield from the earlier Call of Duty games. Because Cuisine Royale is set somewhere during World War 2, it's difficult to imagine this game not having it. The Springfield is an excellent medium to long range sniper rifle, however, you will need to locate a scope for it. If you don't find a scope during your match, you can still use the weapon's standard iron sights. You'll want to make sure every shot counts because the weapon can only hold 5 rounds per magazine.

Browning Auto 5

When you find yourself hiding in the brush and waiting to ambush your enemy, there's no better way to surprise than hitting them with an automatic shotgun. You can fire off the five rounds from this weapon pretty quickly and make short work of your foes. Though, you'll leave yourself unprepared should someone find you while you're reloading. Definitely good a weapon if you already have a decent submachine gun or a sniper rifle in your other primary weapon slot.

PPD 40

Because you're not the best shot, you want to use as many bullets as possible to eliminate the competition. Look no further than the PPD 40. With this submachine gun with a drum of bullets capable of holding more than 70 rounds in a single magazine. This makes it ideal for holding down the fire button and waiting until all of your bullets are gone to see if your enemy is still standing. If you watch your ammo and see how many shots you fire, you can probably walk away from most encounters only ever firing 30 shots.

MG 42

This mobile machine gun turns you into a walking guard post. Though not the most accurate weapon in Cuisine Royale, you can certainly ensure your foes feel every bullet with this weapon. You can load up a magazine with up to 50 bullets, but make sure you find a good position to kneel down and fire. You'll find the recoil of this weapon a little difficult to keep up with, at first. You get used to it after a little practice.

Secondary Weapons

PO8 Luger

When my main weapons were low on ammo, I was always thankful I picked up the Luger during my travels. I found this the most useful sidearm. You can fire off the weapon's magazine of eight bullets as quickly as you can click your mouse button and the recoil of the weapon was barely noticeable. I've taken out a few players whom I got the drop on with this gun. They were always surprised to find me.

M1911 Colt

I found this weapon the most often during my time in Cuisine Royale. This pistol holds eight rounds and serves as a reliable sidearm when you're in a pinch. However, I found the recoil a little obnoxious. Whenever I'd fire the weapon's sights would waiver around for a few seconds, forcing me to wait for the shot to realign. Definitely not a weapon I would recommend to wield when you're seconds away from victory.

Mauser C96

Much like the P08 Luger, the Mauser was an excellent back up option when all hope seems lost. You can dispatch your foes as quickly as you can click on your mouse button, but the recoil wasn't as forgiving. It felt like a mix between the Luger and the Colt. Certainly a good option to have sitting your back pocket.

Melee Weapons

Whenever you begin at game of Cuisine Royale you start with a small knife. This weapon feel as useless at it is and you'll want to switch to a gun as quickly as possible. You can find two other melee options in this game: an axe and a pan.

The axe feels like an advanced version of the knife. I've gotten one kill with it and it only took two strikes with the weapon. While this may feel overpowered, my opponent at the time did not have a gun and only had the starting knife. I was able to quickly overtake them. If they had any other gun in the game, I believe the outcome would have been far different.

The only other melee weapon you can get, the pan, was something I only found once. I found in rare loot refrigerator, which act as special loot boxes players can find throughout the map. I have never seen it again, and unfortunately I was never able to hit anyone with it to see how powerful it was. The weapon did make really cool lightsaber sounds when I swung it, so that counts for something?

Body Armor


You'll find your character can wear more than the traditional armor you're accustomed to seeing. Each character have armor slots for their head, shoulders, chest, back, buttocks, and their thighs. Not only are the armor slots unique, but the armor itself makes your character look like they're about to open up their own restaurant. If you're lucky enough to find every armor piece, you look like you ran through an Ikea and crashed into the kitchen department and decided it was a good look.

The most common armor pieces to find are the 'mk 1' version. Only the shoulder and thigh armor pieces come in 'mk 1', whereas the chest, back, buttocks, and head armor pieces go up to 'mk 3'.

None of the armor pieces add to your overall weight capacity. So make sure to grab as many pieces as you can!

Special Gear

Unlike other battle royale games, Cuisine Royale allows each character to carry up to two special items. These items provide your character with unique passives they can use to improve their overall gameplay. Each of the items provide a benefit dissimilar to the other, making them all useful, given a particular situation.

Bunny Slippers of Bounce

Increases the character's jump height by 3 times. Great for jumping over walls or surprising enemies hiding behind a rock. There's fall damage in this game, and these items do not negate that. You might lose a little bit of health when you bounce too high! And this item comes with a great sound effect.

Tough Cuban Cigar

Wielding this increases your overall health points by 10, and it looks great too. Though when you zoom in to look down a weapon's sights, the cigar blocks part of the left side of the screen. If you're relying on your iron sights, this can prove problematic.

IV Bag of Regeneration

Holding onto this allows you to regain 0.7 health points per second. Great if don't want to always rely on your health items to bring you back to full health. Plus, if you're being chased by an enemy you can elude them long enough to get some more health and fight back.

Nimbus From Dark Pact

This angel halo hooks up to your character's back and allows you to take 70 percent less damage from the zone while you're in it. When you hold on to this until the late game, you can use the smaller zone to flank your final enemy and surprise them from shooting outside the zone.

Oxygen Tank of Hold Breath

You can hold your breath for 30 percent more and your stamina meter goes down by 40 percent less than it traditional does. Always a good item to have when you need to catch up to the zone or want to outrun your enemies.

Knee Pad of Speed

These helpful knee pads increase your sprint meter by 40 percent, your overall speed by 10 percent, but you lose 80 percent of stamina bar. An excellent item when you want to zoom around the map and overtake your enemies by force, but it's only in short bursts. Definitely pair it with the Oxygen Tank of Hold Breath.

Eagle Eye Glasses

Now if you're having trouble catching your enemies, this item can help you out by increasing your reload speed by 40 percent, reducing your shot deviation by 40 percent, and reducing your weapon's recoil by 50. It's a great item if you have stronger weapons that waiver your reticle after the first shot.


And there you have it! This guide should help you take victory in Cuisine Royale! Make sure you reload every new gun you equip, as you can't equip any with a full clip.

For more information on Cuisine Royale, keep it here at GameSkinny!

Westworld Mobile: Guide to Understanding Hosts Fri, 22 Jun 2018 16:36:47 -0400 TMSingle

Moving from HBO to mobile, iPhone and Andriod users are now able to experience the excitement of Westworld Mobile.  

When dropped into the game, players are given the chance to virtually “play God” and build up Westworld. As a newly hired Delos employee, you’ve been granted access to the Delos Park Training Simulation, and this is how you’ll help Westworld evolve.

One of the jobs that fall in your lap is creating and tweaking Hosts. If you’re a fan of the show, you know that Hosts are the ones who will interact with the Guests. In the game, when the Host successfully fulfills his or her duty and is compatible with the Guest, the Guest is happy, and rewards are given.

As it’s one of the main functions of the game, you’ll be led through the process of making Host once. You’ll go to the Manufacturing room. In the corner of the screen, you’ll see the  icon. Click on the icon. You’ll be led to a screen that gives you options of Hosts to make.

Through the use of Host Codes, which will come from leveling up and progressing in the game, you will make your Host. Each Host Code costs a different amount of coins or gems. There is also the Legendary Host Code and the Social Host Code, but they are not available at the beginning of the game. You also can collect code fragments to manufacture a new Host.

Now, when you first begin, you’re given a Basic Host Code. The first Host you will make will be a Gambler Host, as the only place open in the beginning is the Saloon. More Hosts become available as locations become available, and you even have Prototype Hosts—new Hosts that are useful for leveling and ranking up target Hosts when it comes to the option of Rebuild—to look forward to.

Rebuilding Hosts

When the Rebuilds room becomes available, you have the chance to strengthen a pre-existing Host. Now, to do so, you may have to sacrifice other preexisting Hosts. Or, as mentioned, you can use a Prototype Hosts and not have to sacrifice any of your Hosts. Rebuild is an important part of the game, so make sure to take it seriously.

You also get Hosts that are not manufactured in the Manufacturing room, and those Hosts typically are at a higher level and have more roles and desired traits. One of the first to make an appearance after you level up is Teddy. He’ll come in handy at the Saloon, providing Guests with much satisfaction.

Once you have your first Host ready to go, you’ll head to the Saloon where you can interact with a Guest. All you have to do is click on Start Interaction, and the rest is up to the game.

Each interaction has a time limit—you can speed up the interactions with currency, if you want, but there’s really no need to rush. When you’re finished interacting, you’ll get your reward. Though, be warned, if the Guest is unhappy, meaning they have 0% satisfaction, you get no reward.

Here’s a helpful tip on how to get extra bonus rewards: Each Guest has a specific color hat that represents his or her affinities. When interacting, if you choose a Host that has the same color of hat, you may trigger the Host’s cornerstone. Cornerstones provide the hosts with depth, making them feel real to the guests. If you’re lucky and a cornerstone is triggered, you get bonus rewards.

Handling glitches

Now, be careful when using your Hosts, because they can glitch. If you click on a Host while they are idle, you can check their Glitch Risk. To resolve a glitch in your Host, take them to Diagnostics room and do a diagnostic run. When it’s complete, your Host is free to go back to work.

Better to have a glitch than to die. If your Host dies, you’ll need several things to get your Host back up and running. You’ll need Biomaterials room to be up and running, because there will be specific materials you’ll need for your Host to be repaired.

The actual repairing process happens at the Body Shop room. It’ll take a little longer to repair a Host than to fix a glitch, but once repaired, the Host is as good as new.

Using the Critical Analysis room

Another important room that benefits the Hosts is the Critical Analysis room. Employees can perform up to three Critical Analysis interviews each day, and they can even use gems to receive the option for additional interviews.

The Critical Analysis room is to help get out any bad behavior that may be lurking in a Host. So, with the questions given, you have to try and fill as many Behavior Setting bars as you can.

You’ll notice the icons are green and red. When they are green, they fill the bar. When they are red, the diminish what is already there. Sometimes, you’ll have questions that only fill the bar, subtract from the bar, or do both. It just depends on the question.  

Once the interview is complete, you’ll receive data and rewards. And, the Host will then return to service as if nothing happened.


The options to go on Journeys require Hosts as well. Journeys, once unlocked, allow for the opportunity to get rewards. Each Journey has a different Host requirement. Make sure to fulfill all of the roles required for the selected Journey. If you do not have a Host that fits the requirement, you can click on the option for New Build to see if you can manufacture a suitable Host.

Once you use a Host for a Journey, that Host will not be able to be available for another Journey for the 24 hours. So, make sure you choose your Hosts carefully.

As you level up your Hosts, you will see the benefits grow. Each Host serves a specific purpose. So, know your Host to better control Westworld.


As your Hosts are wandering around town, drop a comment below to talk about which Hosts you have found to be most useful in Westworld Mobile.

How to Get Excalibur Umbra in Warframe Fri, 22 Jun 2018 11:09:50 -0400 Sergey_3847

With the introduction of update 23.0 all Warframe players can obtain the Excalibur Umbra frame through the new Sacrifice quest. The new frame has higher levels of armor and energy, but the best part is that it is a sentient frame capable of fighting on its own without being piloted by an operator.

You don't need to complete the full Sacrifice quest in order to get Excalibur Umbra. However, you will not be able to use the frame until you complete the full quest. So follow our guide below on how to most efficiently get to the end of the Sacrifice quest.

How to Complete The Sacrifice Quest in Warframe

Mission 1: Investigate Sentient Energy

After the introductory custcene you will be given the task to search for traces of sentience on Lith, Earth. The mission will start off with killing a horde of ghouls and moving towards the courtyard.

When you enter the courtyard you will need to equip your Codex Scanner and search for three warframe traces and one sword:

  • The piece of cloth is hanging from the stone in the west
  • The helmet can be seen in the eastern part
  • The remains are lying near the tombstone in the central-eastern area
  • The sword can be seen embedded near the tree

Then, head towards the extraction zone and survive another wave of ghouls. Once you're there, the mission will be over and you will have the Excalibur Umbra blueprint.

Mission 2: Explore Lua

In order to build the actual frame you will be sent to Pavlov, Lua. Upon landing you will need to explore the ruins and solve the Orokin cipher. In order to do this you need to blow up lids on the walls of the room holding the cipher with three symbols. This will reveal one of the symbol parts.

Then, follow the marker on your mini-map and you will find the second symbol part. Finally, go back to the cipher and choose the three required symbols, which will solve the puzzle.

Keep exploring the ruins and you will find another Orokin cipher, this time with five symbols. Search the area as before by following the marker on your map and reveal four symbol parts on the walls. Again go back to the cipher and select the necessary symbols.

Enter the lab and search for the device near the pillar. Examine it and choose the enemy symbol indicated by blue color. Finish the mission by extracting.

You can now head to Foundry and build the Excalibur Umbra using:

  • 1x Orokin Cell
  • 60x Kuva
  • 1200x Nano Spore
  • 1600x Alloy Plate
  • 10000x Credits

As stated before, if you try to pilot the Umbra at this point, it will attack you and escape. So there's more to do before you can actually use it.

Mission 3: Search for Umbra

You will find Umbra on Nuovo, Ceres. First, you need to stun it and then try to use transference on it. As a result, you will start a mini-game of Komi, which requires you to surround enemy stones with your own.

After a few rounds regardless of the result, you will need to move to the extraction zone and keep pursuing Umbra.

Mission 4: Pursue Umbra

Fly to the Triton, Neptune and kill five mimics upon landing. After that you will fight Umbra again, and you will need to deplete it off its shields. When you're done with the shields, you need to stun and use transference on it once again.

Another mini-game of Komi will begin during which a few important story elements will be revealed.

Mission 5: Confront Umbra

This mission takes place on Tycho, Lua and follows the same scenario as before. You will fight Umbra once again and use transference to enter its memories.

After the cutscene you will finally be piloting the Excalibur Umbra in all its glory. But before venturing into the extraction zone you will need to eliminate all sentients, which shouldn't be a problem.

Mission 6: Return to Earth

In the final mission you will be going back to Earth and confront Ballas on the courtyard from the very first mission. Umbra will act on its own, without you piloting it, so just let it do its thing. When it finally defeats Ballas, the quest will be completed.


Hopefully, this guide helped you finish all the missions in the Sacrifice quest and get the Excalibur Umbra, and for other Warframe guides here at GameSkinny, check out the links below:

How to Get Limbo Prime in Warframe Fri, 22 Jun 2018 11:05:49 -0400 Sergey_3847

The new Limbo Prime frame has arrived in Warframe. It is an enhanced version of the Lmbo frame with better shield, armor and energy capacities. It also has two additional polarities: Naramon and Vazarin, for increased defenses, health and armor.

In order to get the Limbo Prime frame you need to farm for several relics and have Mastery Rank 4. If you want to know how to obtain all the necessary relics for Limbo Prime, then follow our quick guide below.

How to Get Limbo Prime Relics in Warframe

Lith B3 Relic

You can farm this relic by staying for ten waves during Orokin Derelict Defense mission at Orokin Derelict tileset. If you manage to withstand all ten waves you can start extracting for the Lith B3 relic.

The best frame to use during the Orokin Derelict Defense mission is the Banshee. Its sophisticated acoustic powers will help you to pinpoint enemy positions and their weak spots.

This relic will provide you with Limbo Prime Systems blueprint.

Axi L2 Relic

This relic can be farmed during the Berehynia Interception mission at Grineer Shipyard tileset on the planet of Sedna. You need to be able to stay in control for four rounds, which will reward you with the Axi relics.

This interception mission is rather easy and the whole set of four rounds will take you less than 15 minutes in solo mode.

This relic will provide you with Limbo Prime Neuroptics blueprint.

Neo L1 Relic

The Neo relics can be farmed in the same way as Axi relics during the Berehynia missions. So follow the same tips as given above.

This relic will provide you with Limbo Prime Chassis blueprint.

Meso Z1 Relic

You will be able to farm for Meso relic during the Io Defense mission at Corpus Gas City tileset on Jupiter. The strategy is the same as with the Orokin Derelict Defense mission, where you need to stay for ten waves and extract.

This relic will provide you with Limbo Prime blueprint.


Now you have all the necessary blueprints for your Limbo Prime frame, and for other Warframe guides at GameSkinny, plese see the links below:

Darkest Dungeon: Color Of Madness DLC Refracted Affliction Guide Thu, 21 Jun 2018 16:07:53 -0400 Ty Arthur

Surviving the perils of Darkest Dungeon requires making the best of a very bad situation, which means dealing with afflicted heroes who have gone mad or suffered debilitating physical maladies.

With the Lovecraftian "Color Of Madness" DLC, your soon-to-be-dead adventurers will get lost in time and space, gaining terrible new afflictions like the insidious Refracted effect!

This affliction isn't explained very well with in-game text, however, so we've got a full breakdown of how you get it, how it works, and how it can be removed.

Looking for info on how to take out the trio of deadly bosses brought down from the stars instead? Check out the full breakdown on how to beat all three new Color Of Madness bosses here.

What is Refracted Affliction?

Refracted is a new affliction in Darkest Dungeon that can land randomly when a hero hits 100 or 200 stress. It can affect any character who has traveled to the Farmstead or played in the Endless mode. It will also sometimes land when dying in Endless mode, leaving the character Refracted rather than actually dead.

This new affliction seems to occur more often when fighting the extra "Color Of Madness" bosses like the Miller, Thing From The Stars, or the Sleeper. You will unlock The Blinders Are Lifted achievement for gaining the Refracted affliction the first time, so it's not all bad!

Refracted has an effect on the hero both in the current dungeon and when you return to the Hamlet. During the current quest, a Refracted character is phased out of space, so they can attack enemies in stealth, although it won't actually break the stealth buff. 

This effect can be modified with some of the DLC's new trinkets by spending shards instead of money. At first, this makes it seem like Refracted is more of a positive quirk than a negative affliction since it can actually be helpful in some situations.

As with any other malady, a Refracted character will randomly say insane things during battle, potentially leading to larger stress gains for the rest of the heroes, so be ready with stress healing skills and camping abilities.

When you leave your current area, any affected character will remain in your hero roster but be unavailable to perform any actions in the Hamlet or go on any quests for a for a week. Don't forget that the Endless mode twists time, so the calendar doesn't progress!

If you finish your current quest or retreat to a safe room (not during battle) with a Refracted character, you get the option to return all their trinkets to your inventory so they will be available for other characters while the affected character is out. Otherwise, their trinkets go with them and will be locked out for the duration of the character's missing time.


Now that you're done being refracted through the angles of time, are you still looking for more help with this devilishly difficulty dungeon crawler? Check out our other Darkest Dungeon guides here:

Dragon Nest M Best Class Guide for PvP and PvE Thu, 21 Jun 2018 14:07:55 -0400 Littoface

Dragon Nest M has made its leap overseas. It's time to take up arms and enter the battle in this mobile action RPG!

This mobile action RPG has an authentic MMORPG feel, complete with quests, dungeons, PvP and PvE, as well as plenty of exciting monster and boss fights. If you're yearning to play an MMO but don't have the time to dedicate to a PC one, Dragon Nest M may be just the game you've been waiting for.

The game has six classes to choose from, each boasting a unique gameplay style as well as fun and flashy skills. Which begs the question:

Which class should you use for your adventures?

That depends entirely on your playstyle. Do you want to dominate the arena, or run through everything solo? Do you like to hit hard from a distance, or dish out melee attacks in rapid succession?

In this guide, we examine all six available classes and share which classes are the best - you'll surely find one that fits!

Meet the Classes: Basic Class Overview

Each class has its own strengths and weaknesses, different specialization options, and vastly different playstyles.

You can have one character for each class, and the data gets saved (so you can even switch back and forth if you so desire), so it's worth checking each class out until you find the best one for you.

Here are some basics about the classes before you begin:


Difficulty level: 2/5

Class type: Close to mid-range tank/DPS

The warrior is a balanced sword fighter with good defense and offense (with both single and multi-enemy attacks). This is the best class for beginners for its ease of use as well as high defense and attack.

Tinkerer (aka Academic)

Difficulty level: 2/5

Class type: Mid-range DPS/support

This cutie packs a punch. Her regular attack takes the form of swift magic orbs that shoot out of her oversized cannon. She is best used from afar, and has the power to push enemies away if they get too close for comfort.

The Tinkerer's most unique asset is her ability to summon Alfredo, a steampunk robotic servant who draws enemy aggro and allows the Tinkerer to keep a safe distance. 


Difficulty level: 2/5

Class type: Close-range support

The cleric is the paladin of this game, acting as a good shield and healer. Clerics have weak attacks but they can withstand a good amount of damage and excel as a support class.


Difficulty level: 3/5

Class type: Mid to long-range DPS/support

As the name suggests, the archer uses a bow and arrow to unleash pain on enemies from a distance. This class is a good middle ground between the tank and the glass cannon, excelling at super-quick movement and attacks and skillful evades.

To play this one well, you'll need to find the optimal distance to hit from (while not being hit in return).


Difficulty level: 3/5

Class type: Close-range DPS

Go up close and personal with this class, which has strong offensive powers and great DPS but needs to be quick on his feet to evade incoming attacks.

The assassin is a versatile class, allowing users to either save up power for a strong burst attack, or attack with weaker, but much quicker, blows.

As a side-note, the assassin also has the most intriguing description: "A gentle and kind teenager accidentally gets possessed by his future self."


Difficulty level: 4/5

Class type: Mid to long-range

Finally, we come to the one true glass cannon among the classes, which also makes her the most difficult class to master.

The sorceress is a powerhouse of magic, dealing huge damage to enemies with AOEs.

Her attacks are great against a group but require a bit more maneuvering than the other classes, since many of her skills target areas, not enemies. This means you can't run-and-gun here, but rather will need to keep an eye on the enemy's movements and plan ahead. 

Dragon Nest M Class Specializations 

Once you reach level 15 in the game, you get to choose a specialization. (Further specialization paths are available at level 45, but for the purpose of this post, we'll focus on this first branch in your journey.) Which specialization you choose will affect the types of skills you get access to and the play style. 

Before making a selection, you'll have a chance to try both out with all its skills unlocked so you'll know exactly what to expect.

Here are the specializations and their finer points:


Sword Master: This specialization is the all-out sword-swinging offensive path. It unleashes a ton of power with strong physical attacks as well as the ability to block and hit back hard. 

Mercenary: A bit more varied than the Sword Master, the Mercenary is equipped with buffs and debuffs while retaining a strong (though slower) attack and some crowd-control skills which make him a great addition to any party. 


Alchemist: With the alchemist, you will unlock powerful magic attacks that rival that of the sorceress, though with an easier control (less precise aiming required).

Engineer: Perfect for a more tactical fighting style, the Engineer puts up towers and throws mechanical ducks (yes, really) into battle. This class requires you to corner your enemies right where you want them for maximum damage output!


Paladin: By far the best tank in the game, the Paladin is an aggro-hogging wall of defense, ideal for cooperative playing.

Priest: This class leads the cleric down the support route, giving him the power to heal and buff allies (and himself).


Bow Master: As the class with the longest range, the Bow Master is great in group fights and as a rear support. However, this comes at a cost: Up close, the class is pretty squishy. 

Acrobat: This specialization brings the archer closer to the action by switching out her bow for a shortbow and giving her more flexible mid- to close-range skills. Her defense is still relatively low but she makes up for it with quick escapes.


Chaser: A skilled ninja-like assassin, the Chaser has two types of skills you can choose to specialize in: the long-ranged physical damage-dealer and the close-ranged, quick and devastating offensive path. 

Bringer: The Bringer uses light and dark powers to either buff and heal or debuff and damage, respectively. Being such a well-rounded class means it can do many things decently, but excel at nothing specific. It may take some more skill to bring out the best in this one.


Elemental Lord: As the name implies, this specialization focuses on offensive fire and ice elemental attacks, much of which can stack for massive DOTs. However, the longer casting times make the Elemental Lord an easy target during casts.

Force User: This class gives up some of its power in favor of providing support to others. Using dark and light magic, the Force User can debuff and immobilize foes, as well as teleport away in a pinch.

Best Dragon Nest M Class for PvE

Now that you know a little about each class, we can move on to the good part: which class should be your main?

While your choice should depend largely on your playstyle, some classes are definitely better than others for certain tasks.

If you play MMOs for the story (believe it or not, you're not alone!), prefer to keep to yourself and not interact with others, and generally want to focus on the PvE aspect of the game, your best bet is the warrior.

It might be a cliched answer, but it's true: it's hard to beat the tried and true attack and defensive prowess of this skilled fighter. The warrior and both of his later paths have crowd-control skills, with the Mercenary being especially good for solo and party fights due to its decent de/buff abilities.

The warrior also has a high defense so he can do well without backup, and some powerful single-enemy skills that are great against bosses. You just can't go wrong with this class for solo play.

Best Dragon Nest M Class for PvP

If, on the other hand, the idea of making your way up the PvP ladder is exciting, you'll do well with a quick character with good defense who can withstand the ranged powerhouses.

Judging our recommendation on the top-ranked arena leaders, the two best classes for PvP in Dragon Nest M are the warrior (Sword Master specialization) and the cleric (Paladin specialization). The warrior can dish out strong mid-ranged attacks, while the cleric can take a lot of beating, making them both ideal for the arena.

However, based on further research, we also recommend the sorceress (Elemental Lord specialization) as a strong third contender. This class is harder to master, but once you do, you can be (theoretically) unstoppable!

Best Dragon Nest M Support Class

Want to help your party and guild-members get through raids and special dungeons? You're looking for a good support class.

Honestly, all the classes are well-balanced and do well on their own or together. Every class has its own party buffs, and most have a good variety of single- and multi-enemy attacks.

However, the one class undeniably created specifically to be a good support is the cleric (Priest specialization). Use this class if you like to hold the team together and lead them to victory!

Of course, we're not saying the other classes aren't awesome: In fact, they're balanced well enough that any class, in the right hands, can be played right to the top. Try them out for yourself and choose the one that's best for you!

And stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Dragon Nest M guides!

Fortnite 4.4 Update Guide: Stink Bombs, Rocket Launcher Nerf, and New Limited Time Mode Thu, 21 Jun 2018 12:12:14 -0400 Ty Arthur

We are rapidly approaching the end of Fortnite's Season 4, and as Week 8 proceeds, we've got hungry gnomes to find, new hidden battle star locations to track down, and more!

However, a rocket launcher nerf has landed in battle royale mode, and the addition of a new stink bomb grenade means new you've got new ways to devastate your enemies. On top of that, a new mode, Teams of 20, makes its debut -- and brings with it new ways to play. 

Fortnite Week 8 Weapon Changes

First up, the rocket launcher got nerfed in the lastest update, with reload times increasing, so if you are using this weapon a lot, be aware its DPS just went down! Here are the exact reload times for every type of rarity:

  • Rare from 2.3 seconds to 2.8 seconds
  • Epic from 2.185 seconds to 2.66 seconds
  • Legendary from 2.07 to 2.52 seconds

The numbers are small, but when someone else is shooting at you, that half of a second is all it takes to get killed. It may now be better to just switch to another weapon if you miss with your first rocket, or at the least throw up a wall while you deal with the increased reload time.

You can now hold a max of 12 ammo for the rocket launcher.

Fortnite Stink Bombs!

Next up is the new 4.4 patch weapon addition -- the stink bomb. It should have been obvious we'd get something like this eventually, especially in a game that decided to throw in shopping carts as its first vehicle.

These grenades are epic rarity drops, so you won't find them often, but they can potentially spawn just about anywhere as floor loot, in gold chests, or at randomized vending machines.

When thrown, they create an obscuring cloud that deals damage over time for 9 seconds. While you aren't likely to outright kill someone with a stink bomb (unless they are very low on health), their real value is in directing traffic.

If you can get people out from behind their defenses for a few moments, or direct them toward other explosives you've already lobbed/planted, then it becomes much easier to get a kill. When people are playing squads or duos, this can be a particularly helpful tactic in breaking up groups so they can't all fire at you at once.

For those who luck out and find both a thermal scoped assault rifle and a stink bomb at the same time, you've basically got free reign to annihilate anyone hiding behind walls or inside buildings. Since the thermal scoped rifle lets you read heat signatures, it becomes incredibly easy to lure people into the open as they flee the damage-over-time effect of the stink bomb.

New Limited Time Mode

There's now a new way to put those stink bombs and nerfed rocket launchers to use! The Limited Time Teams Of 20 Mode also just arrived in 4.4., which is a bit different than the typical huge mobs in the large group modes.

Instead of getting down to just one player for a victory royale, the storm will stop after the third circle decrease and a final countdown timer will appear. When this timer hits zero, the team with the most players left standing is declared the winner.

In this mode, staying alive is actually more important than racking up kills, so be sure to play a bit more conservatively and practice your wall building to stay out of the line of fire.


Haven't finished the Week 8 challenges yet or still looking for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny? Check out the latest below:

Fortnite Location Guide: Search Hungry Gnomes Challenge Thu, 21 Jun 2018 08:34:31 -0400 Sergey_3847

One of the most unusual challenges for Fortnite's Season 4, Week 8 is to find seven Hungry Gnomes. These creatures are scattered all over the map, and they usually hide inside buildings with food.

If you want to find all seven required gnomes for this week's challenge, then check out the map below for all the possible locations. Also, be sure to check our quick guide for all the essential tips on how to identify the gnomes.

Where to Find Hungry Gnomes in Fortnite

Fortnite map showing hungry gnome locations

Go to one of the locations indicated above and be sure to wear your headphones and listen closely to the audio cues. Yes, the gnomes will speak to you saying something like "Yummy, yummy" or "I'm hungry" in tiny, squeeky voices.

When you hear that cue, be sure to check out the corners of the buildings, as that's where the gnomes are usually hiding. But if you just want to quickly get all seven gnomes, then here are a few suggestions:

  1. Pleasant Park: Search for a gnome inside a gas station in the corner facing the wall.
  2. Stadium: Go to the south of Pleasant Park and find a Taco Shop at the Stadium. The gnome is in the corner behind the metal chair
  3. Tilted Towers: The third gnome is located right in the middle area near the dumpster right between the market and the towers
  4. Greasy Grove: The gnome is standing in the corner of the Burger Shop
  5. Salty Springs: Another one can be found in the Gas Station
  6. Tomato Town: This one is obviously hiding inside the one and only Pizzeria
  7. Retail Row: The last gnome can be located inside the Grocery Store


Now you can easily complete the Hungry Gnomes challenge for this week, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, check out the links below:



Fortnite Battle Star Guide: Search Between a Bear, Crater, and a Refrigerator Shipment Thu, 21 Jun 2018 06:51:54 -0400 Sergey_3847

Every week, Epic Games challenges Fortnite players to locate a Battle Star. Sometimes they give players a hint by revealing a special map, but this time around, they just let us know where we should be searching.

This week, the Battle Star can be found somewhere between a Bear, a Crater, and a Refrigerator Shipment. If you want to quickly find this spot and claim your weekly Battle Star, then follow our quick guide below.

Map showing the location of Fortnite's Season 4, Week 8 Battle Star

In order to locate this week's Battle Star, you need to go to the eastern part of the map, where the racing track is located. The Crater to which the developers have been hinting is the exact same crater situated right near the race track.

Then, if you move to the west from the crater and down the hill, you will see a giant statue of a Bear with a backpack greeting all those visitors driving through this area.

The final part of the puzzle, which is a Refrigerator Shipment, can be seen to the south of the crater. There is a house with a truck that keeps tons of refrigerators inside. So that's definitely the shipment you're looking for.

So where is the Battle Star? It's right in between the trees indicated by a red marker on the screenshot above. As usual, you will see a spot of land with no grass, and that's where the Battle Star will be waiting for you.


That's all for this week's Season 4 Battle Star challenge. For other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, check out the list below:

Fortnite Challenge Guide: Search Chests in Salty Springs Thu, 21 Jun 2018 06:49:26 -0400 Sergey_3847

Fortnite's Season 4 is inevitably nearing its end. But there are still a few challenges to be completed before we all can venture into the next season. This week, you need to locate seven chests in Salty Springs, which is a slightly easier task than last week.

Besides the few well-known locations for treasure chests in Salty Springs, there are a few secret spots as well, which you can find by following the map and quick guide below.

All Chest Locations in Salty Springs

One of the easiest chests to get in Salty Springs is located on the top level of the watchtower to the east. Most players think this chest doesn't count, but it actually does, so go ahead and grab it.

The rest of the chests are scattered all around the houses in the area. Most of these chests are easy to spot, since they're all residing in the attics of the houses. This makes it really easy to loot them when you land on top of the houses. Just break the roof and get all the chests you can find.

However, there are a couple of houses that have several chests hidden inside secret basements. For example, a house with a blue roof has such a basement. So go to the ground floor and break it down. You will land inside an underground room with more chests to loot.

Another such hidden basement can be found inside the house with a broken roof in the northern part of Salty Springs. Just do the same as before: go to the ground floor, break it down and claim your chests.


That's it for all loot chest locations in Salty Springs for this Week 8 Challenge. For other Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny, check the links below:

Realm Royale Best Landing Locations Guide Wed, 20 Jun 2018 13:44:57 -0400 Ty Arthur

The genre may be getting a bit crowded, but Realm Royale offers a vastly different experience than your typical battle royale entry with five classes, abilities found randomly in chests, and an equipment forging mechanic.

As with any BR style game, you need to strategically pick your landing zone to maximize your loot and minimize danger when you land. If you're just getting started, we've got you covered with some of the best loot locations to land at in Realm Royale!

 Landing near a chest immediately is crucial to surviving the match!

Best Realm Royale Landing Spots

The map is separated out into the Badlands, Everfrost, Greenscape, Sanctuary and Tropics sections, and each have some killer spots if you know where to look.

The outer edges of the map will get covered in fog quickly, but there's a twist here -- the fog rolls in a random direction in each match instead of just going towards the center every time, so you need multiple landing spots picked out ahead of time.

Here are all the best Realm Royale loot locations and landing spots at the moment:

Southwest Of Lost Forge

Area: Tropics

Between Lost Forge and Autumn Fields at the bottom of map grid C6 is a small collection of buildings that aren't usually heavily traveled. You can grab a ton of great gear here and then either hoof it east to Autumn Fields or west to Lost Forge for the forges to start crafting legendary gear. If the zeppelin and fog allow it, this is my personal favorite spot to land.


Area: Greenscape

One of the best spots overall to land is the southeast edge of Lumberfall, near the middle of the map at the top of grid D5. The middle of the wood walkway here almost always has a chest for grabbing a weapon as soon as you land, and the buildings at either end of the walkway typically have chests as well, so you can be well equipped immediately.

This area tends to be heavily populated though, so if you don't get the chest first, prepare to run for your life. Since its so centrally located, you don't usually have to worry about outrunning the fog right away.

Gun Town Outskirts

Area: Badlands

You are near the border of the map here, so you usually can't stay in this location too long unless you luck out with the fog direction. If you land on the outskirts of Gun Town it isn't hard to find chests in all the buildings and then wait for other people to pop into view.

Jade Gardens

Area: Greenscape

This is a high traffic, high reward type area. Typically plenty of other people will land here, but there's lots of buildings for cover. If you land just off to the side of the forge, you can typically grab a chest in one of the buildings very quickly and then dodge inside to stay out of the line of fire and wait for everyone else to kill each other. When someone else goes for the forge, head in and take them out!


Area: Everfrost

Landing at the southern edge of the frozen lake near the forge virtually guarantees an easy chest, and once the smoke clears from killing any other players you can immediately forge your legendary item -- just be prepared to run quickly if the fog is moving southwest!

Underpass / West Of Underpass

Area: Everfrost/Greenscape Border

If you land on the right hand side of the mountain, a chest is found directly inside the tunnel, so you can be armed quickly and then run inside the cave to find cover and use a forge.

If you exit out the left side of the mountain, a bunch of buildings can also be found on the border to Greenscape. This can actually be a better landing spot than Underpass itself, since people tend to make a beeline for the chest in the tunnel. By hitting these buildings first you can let other players take each other out and then head into Underpass to mop up.

 All the best Realm Royale landing spots circled in red!

What's your favorite Realm Royale landing location? Let us know your strategy in the comments below!

Still getting up to speed on this version of the Battle Royale genre? Check out our other  a Realm Royale guides here:

Darkest Dungeon: Color Of Madness DLC Boss Fight Guide Tue, 19 Jun 2018 16:22:40 -0400 Ty Arthur

Move over mosquito vampires -- its time for abominations from beyond the stars to invade Darkest Dungeon with The Color Of Madness DLC! Taking heavy cues from the Lovecraft classic The Colour Out Of Space, a new area near the Hamlet has been overrun by evil shards of cosmic evil flung down from the heavens.

Of course new DLC means new bosses, and as with any of the big bads in Darkest Dungeon, you need a strategy ahead of time if you want any chance of coming out alive.

When building your boss-killing party, keep in mind that several major gameplay tweaks have arrived along with the DLC. Notably, stuns have been nerfed so they can't be abused as heavily. The enemy recovery buff is now much more effective, so you can't stun an enemy repeatedly. Abominations can also now join a group with religious characters, so there's no more need for mods to do this for you and your party lineup options have expanded.

With those major changes in mind, lets jump into how to defeat the new Color Of Madness bosses!

The Color Of Madness Boss: The Miller

Your party automatically camps at the curio in the room before the fight with the Miller, so make sure to check what camping skills you have assigned before taking this quest! The Millers' stats are as follows:

  • HP: 143
  • Stun Resist: 95%
  • Blight Resist: 60%
  • Bleed Resist: 220%
  • Debuff Resist: 60%
  • Move Resist: 70%

The Miller gets two actions per turn, so your typical debuffs won't be as helpful since they will tick down faster. Bleed would be a great way to go, but at 220% resist you aren't likely to ever get a bleed effect to take hold. Unless you've got a really high chance to hit with a blight effect, straight damage is probably the best way to go.

His primary attack is The Reaping, which hits the whole party, so a group heal effect is useful in your lineup. The Harvest does a small amount of damage to a single character, but heals the Miller, so be on the lookout for a sudden health surge.

He summons 17 HP Farmhands who go in the front positions, along with 8 HP Sleeper's Heralds, moving the Miller to the back, so make sure you can hit the back positions.

While they have less health, the Sleeper's Heralds have higher protection and much higher resistances to all effects. Their Reality Bend skill can increase your stress and cause debuffs very quickly.

If you kill the Farmhands, the boss will use The Master Beckons to turn their corpses into undead Scarecrows (if you don't destroy the corpse in the same turn). Scarecrows that are destroyed can likewise be turned into new Sleeper's Heralds, so if you are taking out the underlings first, make sure to destroy the corpses.

You might be thinking that just leaving the Farmhands alive is the best course of action... except that he will use Winter's Breath to turn them into 25 HP Frozen Farmhands with better stats.

To beat this boss fight, you have to juggle destroying the minions against getting in enough attacks on The Miller that he doesn't heal himself back up to full with The Harvest.

If you don't have a ton of healing abilities, focusing on the Miller over his minions is the way to go. When he goes down, so do his minions, so you don't need to worry about dying after taking out the boss. Having a character to focus solely on the Miller who is crit-heavy with critical chance attacks and crit-boosting trinkets can make this an easier battle.

 Fighting The Miller (thanks to BaerTaffy for the screenshot)

The Color Of Madness Boss: The Thing From The Stars

This boss wanders the Farmlands and can be encountered randomly. The Thing From The Stars' stats are as follows:

  • HP: 128
  • Stun Resist: 85%
  • Blight Resist: 40%
  • Bleed Resist: 33%
  • Debuff Resist: 40%
  • Move Resist: 25%

During the battle the Thing will summon 6 HP Crystalline Aberrations, which have huge resistance against stun, bleed, and debuff and will move the boss back a position. You want to take these out quickly. Their suicidal Unstable Resonance attack destroys themselves, but deal high damage and stress.

The Thing can also cause blight, so have some antivenom on hand. His Paralyzing Shard attack does a small amount of damage, but increases stress and can stun, so be prepared to have one character unable to act frequently throughout the fight.

There's less strategy to this fight than in many other bosses, and nearly any party combo can work out here. With two actions per turn and low resistances, Bleed and Blight can be your best friends in this battle. A debuff like Weakening Curse from the Occultist or Bellow from the Man-At-Arms can also make this battle more manageable.

A combination of all three abilities consistently being used take this from an incredibly difficult battle to something akin to the Darkest Dungeon version of a cakewalk - still difficult, but at least possible.

 Fighting The Thing From The Stars (thanks to Game-Wisdom for the screenshot)

The Color Of Madness Boss: The Fracture / The Sleeper

This is a very strange fight, as the boss doesn't deal direct damage to you, but instead spawns other creatures that grow over time and then eventually damage you in a suicide move. The Fracture's stats are as follows:

  • HP: 115
  • Stun Resist: 140%
  • Blight Resist: 120%
  • Bleed Resist: 240%
  • Debuff Resist: 90%
  • Move Resist: 140%

First up, the Fracture will drop Seeds Of Fury to create three Focus Points of 25 HP each in front, shifting him to the far back position.

The boss will then use Befouling Tint to upgrade them to red or green versions with even more health. They can be upgraded multiple times, and each upgrade heals them completely. Oddly, the third form has less health than the second, so if you like risk/reward, you can take them out a bit easier at the third upgrade with a lucky crit.

When they hit the third upgrade, their next action will be to break and deal damage to the whole party in addition to a stun or blight effect, so taking out the Focus Points before they become overwhelming is critical. Balance fighting the shards with dealing damage to the Fracture when possible to eventually finish the battle.

When the Fracture goes down, it morphs into the Sleeper (the comet that landed), which has 225 HP. It only gets one action per turn, but the attack deals large amounts of damage to whole the party. The best way to take this out is to go for multiple crits in a row. Small amounts of damage over time will just lead to disaster, as the Sleeper needs to go down in a handful of turns or you are guaranteed to die.

 Fighting The Fracture

Do you have any other boss fight strategies for The Color Of Madness? Let us know your best Darkest Dungeon boss tactics in the comments below! And check out our other Darkest Dungeon guides here on GameSkinny.

Ark: Survival Evolved Mobile Differences From PC & Console Tue, 19 Jun 2018 13:33:42 -0400 Ty Arthur

I never thought Ark: Survival Evolved would legitimately see a full, feature-complete launch on PC as Early Access dragged on for a seeming eternity, yet here we are and Ark isn't just on consoles.. it's now on phones!

If you've got a high end iOS or Android device, you can engage in dino taming, tribe building, and settlement crafting between phone calls and text messages.

As might be expected, the game has changed somewhat in the switch between platforms, however, and there are some key differences you need to know about ahead of time.

Free to Play-exclusive Resource

The iOS and Android versions of Ark are free to play, meaning you don't buy it upfront but there are in-app purchases to make it worthwhile for the developer to put the game on mobile.

You don't strictly have to buy anything at all (and I haven't so far), but watching ads gives you an XP boost or a new resource called Ancient Amber to spend in the store.

This rare resource (which can also be bought with cash) lets you buy XP boosts, food and water bumps, bonuses against heat fluctuations, extra weight capacity, and a buff to taming speed. At later levels you can also use it to automatically get caches of resources for building specific engrams.

If you don't want to buy items piecemeal or hope for Ancient Amber to drop randomly, a monthly subscription is also available for $3.99. You can see what you get from that in the image below.

Pursuits as Quest Tutorials

To lower the learning curve and prevent people from throwing their phones, there are now Pursuits in the inventory screen, which are basically quests and tutorials wrapped up into one.

These will walk new players through the basics of how to harvest different types of material, how to craft your first campfire and building, how to tame a dino, and so on, while offering a bit of XP at the end.

Major UI Overhaul In Ark Mobile

The UI and menus have been redesigned, obviously, to work on a phone, so elements you may be familiar with have been re-arranged. Most notably are the swipe left and right hotbars to access different game elements.

Swipe right with your left thumb to bring up the UI hotbar to switch to third person, access your inventory without having to press the backpack at the top-left corner, access the whistles for your creatures, or pick up small tamed animals.

Swipe left with your right thumb to bring up the equipment hotbar to switch between harvesting tools, weapons, and anything else you've assigned to the hotbar (like food or the water skin).

The hotbar scroll wheel is kind of clumsy, since its so easy to accidentally open while trying to turn left or look right. You need to practice your movement motions or move your finger lower or higher on the screen (the scroll bars pop up most often when your fingers are on the center in their normal resting positions).

The game remembers your last two weapons / items used, so just tap between them with the icon at the lower-right for easier harvesting. For instance, with the pick axe equipped through the hot bar, switch over to your fists on the hotbar next.

Now you can just tap the icon in the lower-right corner to switch between them without having to bring up the hotbar scroll wheel menu at all. This is very helpful if switching between berry and thatch harvesting.

Building and Dino Taming

An undo button has been implemented, as setting wall and floor pieces exactly how you want them can be a little dicey on a tiny phone screen. If you don't like how the object was placed, just tap the circular arrow icon next to the backpack at the top-right corner to place the piece back in your inventory.

Taming, breeding, and egg hatching are all quite similar to what you know from the base game, but have been somewhat simplified to work on phones so people don't have to reference online lists of data as often.

Heat fluctuations don't seem to matter as much for egg incubation, and the timers have been renamed. They now show you the exact time based on what food you've placed in their inventory, and highlighting an animal will occasionally show you what food they need to be tamed with.

For specifics on how this works on the Ark iOS / Android versions, check out our guide to taming dinos and guide to hatching eggs in Ark mobile.

Critically, tamed creatures now have an implant in their inventory. If your creature dies, you can use it to resurrect them at an Obelisk or the new Revival Platform structure by using the Ancient Amber resource.

 Taming a lowly Dodo for fun and profit!

Are you making the switch to the mobile version of this survival smash hit, or sticking with PC / console edition? Let us know your thoughts on Ark: Survival Evolved hitting phones in the comments below!

The Division 2 Guide: All Changes for Weapons and Gear Tue, 19 Jun 2018 12:00:49 -0400 Sergey_3847

This time the events of The Division 2 unfold in Washington seven months after the story that took place in Manhattan. The cause of the new local apocalypse is the ecological cataclysm. Washington turned into a swamp due to drought and poor infrastructure.

As a result, the organized crime groups flocked, and decided to seize power inside the capital city. Players become a part of a special squad that is mobilized to deal with this seemingly hopeless situation. Ubisoft promises that this sequel opens much more prospects than it was in the first The Division.

Currently, we know that the character build mechanics have been overhauled quite significantly, and if you want to know all the confirmed changes for the weapons and gear in The Division 2, then follow our early guide below.

All Gear Changes in The Division 2

Before going into what's been added to The Division 2 gear mechanics, let's first mention that there have been no confirmed gear sets added to the game yet. Actually, there is a great probability that there will be no gear sets in the game at all, unlike in the first The Division.

However, there is something similar, which is called Brand Set. You can wear different parts of gear from various brands, but if you manage to complete the full brand set, then it will give you extra stats. So this basically does work like gear sets with a different name.

Some brand sets focus on offensive stats while others provide with greater defenses. So it's up to you which brands you want to wear that will ultimately define your playstyle in The Division 2. Each piece of gear, whether branded or unbranded, will have different rarity types, which also means that there will be a lot of different build variations and possibilities for you to explore.

Below you will find the complete list of all confirmed brand sets in The Division 2:

  • Overlord Armaments
    • +7.5% Armor Percent Bonus
    • +5.0% Weapon Damage
    • +10.0% DTE
  • China Light Industries Corporation
    • +8.0% Shotgun Damage
    • +10.0% All Resistance
    • +10.0% Skill Haste
  • Richter &Kaiser GmbH
    • +20.0% Pistol Damage
    • +15.0% Shield Skill Power
    • +10.0% All Resistance
  • Airaldi Holdings
    • +5.0% MMR Damage
    • +10.0% Headshot Damage
    • +10.0% Accuracy
  • Wyvern Wear
    • +7.0% Critical Hit Damage
    • +5.0% Headshot
    • +10.0% Critical Hit Chance
  • Sokolov Concern
    • +10.0% SMG Damage
    • +8.0% CHD
    • +10.0% CHC
  • Petrov Defense Group
    • +8.0% LMG Damage
    • +10.0% Turret Skill Power
    • +10% Skill Haste
  • Providence Defense
    • +4.0% Weapon Damage
    • +10% Skill Power
    • Providence Talent: Well Rounded: CHC Bonus for 6 seconds when completing a cover to cover move.

Besides that some of the former gear stats from the first game have been completely removed, such as Stamina, Firearms, and Electronics. Instead the sequel will offer gear talents that will come with or without certain requirements to your build.

Here's the complete list of all confirmed gear talents so far:

  • Devastating: +5% Weapon Damage
  • Insulated: +25% Hazard Protection
  • Rapid: 10% skill cooldown reduction
  • Surgical: +8% Critical Hit Chance
  • Vital: +20% HealthHardened: +10% Armor
  • Critical: +8% CHD
  • Empowered: +10% Skill Power
  • Striking: +15% DTE
  • Steady Nerves: Destroying Armor or Weak Points grants 50% Weapon Stability for 4 seconds. (Requires: No full auto weapons equipped)
  • Precise: +15% Headshot Damage
  • Hit & Run: Melee kills grant a speed boost for 2 seconds. (Requires: Under 70000 Armor)

All Weapon Changes in The Division 2

The biggest weapon change that comes in The Division 2 is the complete overhaul of the weapons modding system. This means that you will no longer need to grind for some specific weapon mod in a given loot pool or buy from specialized vendors.

In The Division 2 all you have to do is complete the main missions and as a reward you will be given weapon mods that will stay in your inventory forever, and at the same time they won't take up any slots just like skins.

On one hand, this simplifies a lot of things, so that you don't have to think much about getting this or that mod, but on the other hand, it takes away a huge chunk of gameplay that was actually quite exciting.

Nevertheless, this time new mods will not only boost the stats of your weapons, but also decrease them. For example, you could have a bonus added to the critical hit chance, but at the same time your accuracy will suffer. So in this regard, weapon mods become much more challenging than before.

Lastly, the pool of weapon talents has been reduced to only one talent per weapon, unlike in the first game, where weapons could have several talents at once.

Below you will find the complete list of all confirmed weapon talents in The Division 2 so far:

  • Pyromaniac: Damage done to targets on fire is increased by 15% (Requires: Over +10% Weapon Damage)
  • Lock and Load: Reloading from empty increases weapon damage by 20% for 5 seconds.
  • Close and Personal: Kills while close double next shot damage.
  • Hemorrhage: Killing a bleeding target increases critical hit chance by 25% for all group members for 10 seconds.
  • Unrelenting: Hitting enemies increase hit chance by 5%. This bonus stacks up to 10 times. Missing a target remove all stacks.
  • Kill Confirmed: Headshot kills grant +10% damage, stacks up to 10 times. All non headshots reset the bonus. (Requires: Over +140% HSD)
  • Sadist: Damage done to Bleeding targets is increased by 15%. (Requires: 15% CHC)
  • Cauterize: Damage done to targets on Fire for 5% of damage done.


That is all we know about The Division 2 for now, but be sure to come back soon for more updates on the game here at GameSkinny!

How to Hatch Eggs in Ark Mobile Tue, 19 Jun 2018 10:56:34 -0400 Ty Arthur

Making the leap to F2P mobile, now iPhone and Android users can get in on the dino taming action that is Ark: Survival Evolved.

If you want to survive on the dinosaur-infested island, you're going to need a stable of your own beasts to control -- and that's where egg hatching comes in. Let's get started breeding some dinos and incubating their eggs!

Wondering how to get tame adult dinosaurs in Ark mobile instead? Check out our beginner's dino taming guide here. You'll need at least two tamed animals in order to start hatching eggs.

Breeding Animals In Ark Mobile

Before any of your tamed creatures will be willing to mate, you must prevent them from following you by first enabling wandering mode!

Highlight the animal, then tap the dinosaur skull icon in the top-left corner of the screen (to the right of the creature's inventory icons). In the dino's menu, tap the "enable wandering" checkbox. Repeat the process with the second dino.

Enabling wandering on a level 19 Dodo in Ark Mobile Enabling wandering mode

To start breeding, you need two creatures of the same species (with wandering mode enabled). You'll need to put them in a small area, such as by building wood or thatch walls to create a pen.

Some small creatures like Dodos can be picked up and thrown in the pen. With your left thumb, swipe to the right to bring up the UI menu. If you have a small, tamed creature highlighted, a new option appears at the end of the menu to pick up the animal.

For larger animals, you will need to lure them into the pen by using whistle commands or setting their follow distances to the "very short" setting.

A player holds a dodo on a beach Carrying a Dodo to my thatch love nest!

Now you'll play the waiting game. Animals breed in their own time, and anything you do will probably just stop the process and make them start all over, so leave for a while and give 'em some privacy! You might get an egg in 15 minutes or in 3 hours -- it really depends on the dinos/animals and the circumstances.

You will know if they are mating because dark red heart icons will pop up above their heads and the bar beneath their names will change to "mating progress" with a timer.

Mating dodos in a pen show red hearts above their heads and  Mating Dodos

When the timer hits 100%, you will eventually get an egg. Before starting incubation, make sure the egg is labeled as a fertilized egg.

This is critical, as sometimes you will find eggs in the wild, but if they aren't the fertilized version, they won't hatch no matter how much incubation time they get.

A player's inventory in Ark Mobile Dropping a fertilized egg from your inventory

Incubating Eggs In Ark Mobile

A fertilized egg needs to be heated for a period of time in order to hatch, which means using heat sources to regulate the temp.

Temperature regulation has been simplified from the base PC/console version of the game, however. You no longer need to carry the egg between fire and the cooling water of the ocean. Instead, it just needs to sit next to a heat source for a period of time.

Air Conditioners are the best bet for heating, but you won't be able to reliably make those until much later on in the game. Instead, there's a poor man's version available from the very beginning by using several campfires to regulate the egg's temperature.

Craft four to five campfires and set them in a semi-circle configuration. Drop the egg between all the campfires -- be very careful not to accidentally eat it! You want to drop it between the campfires, not use it as an item. 

With the egg dropped between the fires, start lighting them one by one. Check to see when the egg's text changes "Egg Incubation 100%" which indicates the egg is now in the hatching process. If necessary, build more campfires, as the temperature required to hatch varies wildly between animal species.

A player holds an axe as they watch an egg nestled between two fires

While the egg is exposed to heat, the 100% timer will go down over time until the egg finally hatches. Once the baby hatches, highlight it and select the dinosaur skull icon, then choose "Claim" to immediately tame the new animal.

Make sure you have some food the dino will eat so you can quickly transfer it to the new baby's inventory, which gets the maturation process going. 

When you hit Level 61, you can unlock the Air Conditioner engram for 21 points. These devices automatically regulate the egg's temperature so you can place an egg in the air conditioner and just leave until the incubation is completed.

A baby dodo hatches near several fires in Ark Mobile A brand new baby Dodo!

That's all you need to know to get started hatching eggs in Ark's iOS and Android versions. Have you found any better heating or cooling sources we should try out for egg incubation? Let us know your method in the comments below!

How to Tame Animals in Ark Mobile Mon, 18 Jun 2018 16:56:44 -0400 Ty Arthur

Dinosaur survival game Ark: Survival Evolved has officially landed on iOS and Android devices and although the mobile edition is free to play, there's a steep learning curve for this game.

So if you're a new player, you will need to quickly get up to speed if you don't want to get eaten. Most of the core components of the game remain the same between the PC, console, and mobile editions, but there are big differences in the menu layouts, UI, and some of the crafting/taming/hatching systems.

Below we cover everything you need to know to get started taming animals in Ark's mobile edition.

Taming Animals in Ark iOS and Android

You can start taming dinos as soon as you learn the Level 2 primitive wood club or Level 6 slingshot engrams, but I recommend going through the introductory pursuits first.

By the time you've crafted your stone axe, built a fire, constructed a sleeping bag, and put together your starter hut, you will be in a much better position to start tackling dinos.

Later on, other weapons can be used for taming -- such as the bolo and stone or tranquilizer arrows for the bow -- but for now, the slingshot or club is all you need.

However, don't attack your target dino with your fists or a weapon like the pick or spear: you want to knock them unconscious rather than kill them. Instead you'll need something else. 

The slingshot is easily the better of the two, since you can knock out a dino at range. After learning the slingshot engram, you need these resources to construct the slingshot in the crafting half of the inventory screen:

  • Wood x 5
  • Fiber x 20
  • Hide x 1

A red arrow highlights the slingshot engram in Ark  Mobile's level menu Learning the slingshot engram

Knocking Out Dinos In Ark Mobile

After crafting the slingshot, switch to the inventory side of the screen. Double-tap the slingshot to add it to the hot bar, then exit your inventory.

With your right thumb, swipe left to switch to the slingshot in the hot bar. It can only use 1 stone ammo at a time, but so long as you have stone in your inventory, it will automatically reload when selected in the hot bar swipe menu. If you need more ammo, craft the axe and use it to hit any of the rock formations in the area.

To use the slingshot while it's equipped to the hot bar, double tap the screen and hold, then release your thumb to fire the rock. Any of the smaller creatures on the starting beach area will only take a few hits to be knocked out so you can begin the taming process.

There's some strategy here, as you don't want the creature to fight back. If at all possible, attack from up on a rock formation or cliff face, so they can't reach you to bite or trample in self-defense.

After they are unconscious, tap and hold the unconscious dino to open the animal's inventory screen. From there, place food in the dino's inventory just like when you are adding items to the campfire.

Each dino has several different types of food they will accept, with one particular food type each drastically decreasing the tame-time per dino.

Which types of food to use are pretty obvious -- herbivores want berries harvested from plants, while anything with sharp teeth probably wants meat. Dodos can be tamed easily with Tintoberries or Azurberries for instance, while carnivores will prefer various types of cooked meat from your campfire.

Unlike the PC edition of Ark, many of the dinos will show you what food they need if you highlight them without a weapon equipped, so there's less need to constantly reference a web guide.

A players knocks out a Dodo with a slingshot Starting a dino empire by taming a lowly Dodo

Which Animals Should I Tame In Ark Mobile?

If it walks, flies, or slithers, you can eventually tame it. To start out, however, you won't be riding a T-Rex or bringing a Brontosaurus into combat. You need to start small and work your way up as you level and learn new engrams.

Just how big a dino should you be trying to tame in the early game? There's a good rule of thumb: are you low level and are they bigger than you? If the answer to that question is yes, don't tangle with them yet. Even a Level 1 version of any of the bigger dinos will probably crush you in a few hits.

To start, Dodos are super easy to tame, but don't put up much of a fight. If you search the areas around the beaches, it shouldn't be too hard to grab a Dilophosaurus. These don't have so much health you can't take them down, but they will also be more helpful in keeping you alive when an aggressive dino attacks.

When you start getting into the 16-20 levels, your go-to tame should be the Trike, which requires the Triceratops Saddle engram at Level 16. While riding a trike, it can harvest massive amounts of berries for you just by walking over resources.

To take down these larger beasts (like the Trike), the slingshot isn't going to cut it, so you will need to learn the Narcotics, Mortar and Pestle, and Bow engrams.

With tranquilizer arrows in hand, larger dinos become much easier to knock out so you can begin the taming process. Keep in mind the bigger creatures take much, much longer to tame however, so you will need a steady supply of food and will want to complete other tasks in the area while the timer counts down.

A player knocks out a dilophosaurus with a slingshot on a beach in Ark Taming a dilophosaurus with cooked meat

What was your first tamed dino, and do you have any other tips for Ark: Survival Evolved mobile animal taming that we should try out? Let us know your dino taming strategy in the comments below!

]]> Cheats And Tips For The Beginner Mon, 18 Jun 2018 14:17:59 -0400 Ty Arthur

Another .io game? Yeah, they are a dime a dozen, but puts a bit of a twist on it - its meets Katamari Damacy in this city-swallowing time waster that can become quite addicting!

Your goal is to get the biggest hole and swallow everything in the city before your opponents, so the faster you eat everything in sight, the more likely you are able to hit that 1st place ranking. 

For those just getting started, its easy to lose momentum and constantly get swallowed by the faster players who know the best tips and tricks already. Ready on for a full guide on how to consistently make it to the top spot!

 Ready to hit 1st place in

Learning The Map

Every single object on the map can be consumed, so long as you are large enough to swallow it. Your goal at the early stage of the game is to grab as many small objects as possible to get larger at a faster rate than the competition.

How do you do that? Stick to areas where lots of small objects are clustered together. A sidewalk lined with street lamps or other such objects is great for quickly chowing down on a ton of points in a few seconds.

Who gets the most points fastest at the beginning will have a huge impact on the late game, so you don't want to waste your time chasing after single objects or people.

If an area only has a handful of objects you can swallow, move through the buildings as a shortcut (you can freely slide through them instead of following the streets) and find a new area.

The absolute best early game location is any park! These are packed with people and objects in a tiny space. Grab the fences around the park, then move in a square pattern to quickly grab up the trees, buildings, people, light poles, and anything else that's standing there!

 Enclosed parks are best for quick score boosts

Using Car Spawn Points

Once your hole is large enough to swallow cars, one of the best strategies is to simply park yourself on a busy street at a car spawn point.

You can chase them down if they get away, but if you are close enough to a spawn point, cars will simply come to you on both sides of the street and automatically fall in, very quickly netting you a huge score boost.

When you get large enough from this strategy, eventually buildings and other holes will become your best source of points to keep growing. Swallowing other players gives a big boost (and knocks them out of the running for a short time so they aren't competing for resources).

 Swallowing buildings in Android Scam

Everybody wants to play the android version, but sadly the real one doesn't exist yet at this point.

However, if you search in the Google Play Store, you'll notice a suspicious string of apps that are all spelled slightly differently yet seem to feature the imagery...

You'll notice that none of them are actually by developer Voodoo, and they all seem to have oddly low ratings. That's because they are copy and paste scams where someone took the images from the game and slapped it into a quick app that does nothing but show ads or try to get you to input your personal information.

You will get endless activation codes that never do anything and never actually be able to play the real game. Avoid these like the plague!

 These are scam apps that never should have been allowed in the Google Play Store

That's all you need to know to get started becoming a champ! What's your favorite tactic or best location to rack up points quickly? Let us know your strategy in the comments below!

The Top 10 Xbox One Steering Wheel Controllers Mon, 18 Jun 2018 13:10:59 -0400 Samuel Franklin

If you're looking to purchase an Xbox One racing wheel for your favourite racing games on the platform then this article features 10 great options from the Xbox One steering wheel controllers on the market (some of which can also be used on PC and PS4).

Even with the recent introduction of the Nintendo Switch to the console market, the Xbox One remains as the third most popular console in the world. In 2017, it sold more than 8.21 million units. If you were part of those units or a long term Xbox One owner you know that Microsoft has recently delivered a resurgence of upcoming console-exclusive games after being run over by the likes of Sony in recent years while also being plagued by game cancellations and delays.

When it comes to racing games like Antigraviator, you need to find an Xbox One steering wheel to ensure you get the full experience. It creates more immersion and makes racing titles more fast-paced and action-packed. But what are the top 10 steering wheels available in the market right now that you should be considering?

Thrustmaster TS-XW

#1: Thrustmaster TS-XW

The TS-XW is the newest wheel made by Thrustmaster. It packs the highest specs the company has offered so far. It has a brushless motor alongside a force-feedback system, and it can turn 1080 degrees in each direction with its dual belt-pulley system coupled with a metal ball-bearing axle.

With its three-pedal setup, this 1:1 replica of Sparco's P310 competition wheel is phenomenal. Take note that you need to buy the stick shift as a separate product however and with a price tag usually above the $500 mark for the wheel alone this is one for die hard fans only.

Thrustmaster TX

#2: Thrustmaster TX Racing Wheel: Leather Edition

The TX is the Xbox One counterpart of the PC-compatible T300 RS. When it comes to the quality of feedback and control, this steering wheel is amazing. While it isn't expensive as the first option on the list it can still set you back around $400. It is well worth the cash though with the TSA 3-pedal set and the TM Leather 28 GT 11" leather wheel that comes with it.

An extra bonus is that the leather wheel is universal--meaning you can use it for both Xbox One and PlayStation 4 consoles which is handy for a dual console owner. The main complaint you'll find around the web about it is that the leather stitching inside the wheel can rub against your thumb when using it for the first time.

Fanatec Forza

#3: Fanatec Forza Motorsport Racing Wheels and Pedals

The two options above pale in comparison to the cost of the Fanatex Forza Racing Wheel and Pedal combo.

Costing more than the console you'll use it for at well over $1,000. If you're able to spend that sort of cash on a console accessory you won't be disappointed with this product providing an absolutely sublime racing experience. A lot of experts see this as something you can compare to real racing car setups. Its force feedback is so realistic and it's built to last for years to come.

Logitech G920

#4: Logitech G920 Driving Force

The G920 is one of the best wheels out there if you're looking for versatility at around the $400 mark. A great thing about this wheel is that it's often sold at a discount because it's been around for sometime now so this is one where you'll want to wait for sales.

Despite its age, the G920 remains as a well-built product with its cadre of features like built-in vibration motors. It comes with a full three-pedal setup, 900-degree rotation, and leather grip. It allows you to use the optional gearshift if you're not fond of the paddles. Take note that it isn't included in the package price noted above.

MadCatZ Wireless Force

#5: Mad Catz Wireless Force

This Xbox One driving wheel provides an affordable option at around $100 (full price) if you want a simple racing game extension. Its design is unique compared to other third-party brands since it has a wireless design.

It comes with matching wireless pedals that makes it easier for you to immerse yourself in your racing experience and great for someone that hates cords in their gaming setup. Unfortunately stock will be your main issue due to it discontinuing production recently but that does mean any stock you locate should be available at a bargain price.

HORI Racing Wheel Overdrive

#6: HORI Racing Wheel Overdrive for Xbox One

Another more affordable option that you can use for the Xbox One which will set you back around the $100 mark. It does also come with shifter pedals for that price making it one of the most affordable options featured yet on this list. With sturdy suction caps underneath the wheel you have great flexibility around where you place the wheel for game use.

Logitech G27

#7: Logitech G27 Racing Wheel

Back to the more expensive hardware items in the steering wheel niche the Logitech G27 racing wheel approaches the $1,000 cost mark but does include everything with a gearshift and a set of pedals that makes it a great bundle to feel more immersed in your Xbox One racing games.

The G27 also comes with a responsive dual-force motor system to push that realism a little further. The feedback you feel from this steering wheel like the other expensive options here pushes an experience that almost resembles real life driving. It's compatible with both console and PC racing games so you can use it even if the Xbox One becomes outdated.

Fanatec CSL

#8: Fanatec CSL Elite Multiplatform

Another impressive Fanatec wheel on this list goes to show the strength of the brand in this hardware space. A bit cheaper than the other Fanatec featured here at around the $500 mark this is ideal for the multi-platform gamer due to it working across Xbox, PlayStation and PC. It allows 1080 degrees rotation as well as force feedback and you'll find no shortage of Xbox steering wheel reviews featuring it.

Thrustmaster Ferraria 458

#9: Thrustmaster Ferrari 458 Spider Racing Wheel

The TX 458 provides an authentic Italian racing experience by mimicking a Ferrari's steering wheel. It's still fairly high end despite a price tag at around $150 which includes it being wrapped in deluxe Italian leather that might remind you of a Ferrari 458 Spider in your racing games. Its feedback mechanism provides a highly-realistic experience. It comes with intuitive Xbox game controls placement within the steering wheel as well as pedals.

Thrustmaster TMX

#10: Thrustmaster TMX

Marking the fourth and final Thrustmaster on this list goes to show that Thrustmaster is really dominating in the racing wheel hardware space and it's hard to go wrong with purchasing any of these options. This TMX is another mid-market offering at the $200 mark and offers a similar experience to the other Thrustmasters but at a cheaper price. Just like the other Thrustmasters it has a sleek design supported by a 900-degree rotation that comes with a paddle shift. Unfortunately the pedals are where most of the cost savings have been realised with plastic ones as opposed to metal. Nevertheless, the force feedback is great and you can adjust the pedals to make it comfortable for you while you play.

Getting a steering wheel for your Xbox One racing games is all about taking the game immersion to the next level. That's why it's important to make sure that the feedback and the driving experience you get from these steering wheels are realistic. Of course budget and requirements are an important consideration as no two hardware items are the same which hopefully this list will help you with. 

Last Day On Earth: Survival Complete Dog Breeding Guide Fri, 15 Jun 2018 16:48:35 -0400 Ty Arthur

The apocalypse can be an awfully lonely place, especially when everyone you meet ends up trying to kill you and steal your resources! That's where raising some puppies to faithful hounds comes in on Last Day On Earth: Survival.

Through careful crossbreeding, eventually you can get some absolutely killer skills for your stable of dogs, from buffs for finding better items to the all-important True-Friend skill.

Below we cover absolutely everything you need to know to find a puppy, raise it to adulthood, and then eventually breed it through dozens of generations to the ultimate Rank IV hound.

Finding A Puppy In Last Day On Earth

To start raising and breeding dogs, first you need to grab a defenseless puppy (why the zombies don't eat them is unclear), which can be found immediately by leaving your home base and heading to a Green Resource Zone.

Your first puppy is guaranteed to spawn in any Green Resource Zone area if you haven't picked up a puppy before, so spend the energy to run to a Green location and explore around the area until one shows up. Usually they pop up within 30 seconds, but keep running around if you don't get one straight away.

 I may not have any pants, but I've got a puppy, and that's even better!

When you grab the adorable little puppers (just tap the same icon as though you were harvesting a resource), it will appear in your inventory as a Puppy In A Box, but you can't do anything with it just yet.

The "use" button for the boxed puppy will be greyed out, now matter where you go or what inventory slot you place it in.

You can't actually start raising a dog until reaching level 10, when the Dog Crate blueprint becomes available. You could also spend $4.99 - $9.99 to buy a Dog Crate ahead of time in the store, but honestly it doesn't take that long to hit level 10. To build the crate, you need these resources:

  • 20 Pine Logs
  • 7 Duct Tape
  • 15 Limestone
  • 10 Scrap Metal

Build the Dog Crate on a floor segment of any building and then you can finally use the Puppy In A Box to start raising the dog. Opening the box gives you a randomized gender and coloration (from least rare to most rare: brown, black sides, black back, tiger, full black, white).

 The Dog Crate blueprint unlocks for 1 point at level 10

After grabbing your first puppy in a Green Source zone, additional puppies can be found randomly at your home base area, Aid Drop areas (these have a very high chance of puppy spawns), Red Resource Zones, or Floppy Disk Coordinate locations.

They can also be bought for a bunch of resources from a Dealer (which frankly is not a very good trade), or purchased in the store if you've got some cash to burn on a freemium beta game and want a higher Ranking immediately.

Feeding And Raising Last Day On Earth Dogs

Puppies are invincible, although they can be released out into the wild. Full grown dogs on the other hand can die, although they will eventually respawn back at your home base.

For a puppy to reach adulthood and start earning Traits, you've got to feed them Raw Meat, Raw Turkey, or Dry Food. Without regular food, the puppy's growth meter stops. After 24 hours of being fed (or faster if you spend in-game currency), you get a full grown dog.

Note that the number of hours of food provided by each food type is divided by the number of puppies you have, so you will need to hunt down tons of resources when you have a large kennel! Keep in mind you also have to keep feeding the dog after reaching adulthood or they will go inactive.

Upon reaching adulthood, dogs are marked from Rank I to Rank IV, gaining a randomized Trait based on their Ranking. Dogs can't raise in Rank on their own, but the Rank number is still important to note for breeding.

Traits are equipped and active when you select the Walking on Base task at the Dog Crate. These Traits are available for your canine companion:

Rank I
  • Companion: Earn extra experience
  • Careful: Faster puppy growth speed
  • Hunter: More likely to find rare animals
  • Well-Stocked : Decreases the need for dog food
Rank II
  • Bloodhound: More likely to find rare items
  • Companion: Earn extra experience
  • Careful: Faster puppy growth speed
  • Well-Stocked : Decreases the need for dog food
Rank III
  • Companion: Earn extra experience
  • Guard: Can attack the horde
  • Leader: All dogs deal extra damage
  • Hunter: More likely to find rare animals
  • Witty: More likely to get a higher rank when breeding
Rank IV
  • Companion: Earn extra experience
  • Careful: Faster puppy growth speed
  • Well-Stocked : Decreases the need for dog food
  • True-Friend: Can be directly taken with the player (this trait is necessary to open the doggy doors at the Bunker Alfa location)

 Last Day On Earth Dog Traits

Breeding Dogs in Last Day On Earth

With a male and female dog of the same Rank, you can now select the option to Crossbreed, which will give you a brand new puppy, but also results in the two parents leaving your base! This means you constantly have to acquire and raise new puppies to reach the highest Rankings.

The new puppy will never be lower Rank than the parents, but there's a chance of getting a higher Rank, which is how you build up slowly towards the Rank IV dog with True-Friend, which is what you eventually want.

The chances of getting higher Ranks are as follows:

  • When breeding Rank I dogs, you will automatically get a Rank II puppy
  • Rank II dogs have a 60% base chance of producing a Rank III dog
  • Rank III dogs have a 25% base chance of producing a Rank IV dog
  • Rank IV dogs have a 5% base chance of producing a dog with the True-Friend Trait

Make sure to use the Inherit option and always breed a dog with a good set of Traits to a dog with a set of Traits you don't care about, that way the puppy will get the good Traits and keep that line of skills going.

When the puppy ends up a higher Rank than its parents, it then gains an additional Trait. By breeding bad to good and keeping good Traits, you can decrease the amount of time it takes to hit the end goal of Rank IV with True-Friend.

For the fastest breeding, you want to keep the Witty Trait on every single dog, as this will increase your chances of getting to Rank IV faster.

 Crossbreeding dogs in Last Day On Earth: Survival

What are you favorite dog Traits, and do you have any tips for quick breeding up to high Ranks? Let us know your strategy in the comments below!

Still need more help with this freemium post-apocalyptic survival game? Check out our other Last Day On Earth: Survival guides here:

Blinded By Science: How to get Science Points in Graveyard Keeper Fri, 15 Jun 2018 16:33:58 -0400 A. Web

While Lazy Bear Game’s Graveyard Keeper gives players the opportunity to curate specific skills through its technology trees, not all of the points for the technologies are so easy to get -- like Science. Each technology in the game requires a set number of points to unlock, either Red, Green, Blue or a combination of two or all of them.

Though Red and Green points are easy to obtain through farming materials and crafting items, Blue points and Science points are a bit more elusive and hard to come by. However, there are some tricks to help you boost your supply! So to spare you the pain of wasted hours, we’ve put together a small guide on farming all the Blue and Science Points you need.

Everything is Blue

As discussed in our Graveyard Keeper Beginner’s Guide, Blue Points represent your spiritual knowledge of the immaterial world. That means you can get most Blue Points through research and study. The catch here is that you can’t actually start researching things until after you’ve opened the church.

Once the Bishop has approved your cemetery overhaul and you’ve been tasked with giving regular sermons, you’ll find you have access to the Church Blueprint Board or Workbench as well as the Study Desk. From there, you’ll be able to do research and craft the items you need to help you get Blue Points.

But before all that, you need to get your first Science points.

Science points made easy!

Getting your first Science points in game can be a bit confusing, but is actually very simple -- you have to study and burn Clean Paper on the Study Table in the basement of the Church. However, before you can make Clean Paper, you need to build the Church Workbench.

How to make a Church Workbench

To build the Church Workbench, you need to unlock Research and Paper Crafting under the Book Writing technology tree. You will also need to craft an Anvil at your home to make Complex Iron Parts. The Anvil will take 4 Iron Parts to build.

Crafting Complex Iron Parts will take one Iron Ingot and one Simple Iron Parts (you can get the Simple Iron Parts from the Wood Anvil). Once you have 9 Fitch, 10 Nails, and 4 Complex Iron Parts you can make the Church Workbench.  

Getting those Science points

On the Church Workbench you will be able to take Human Skin and turn it into Pigskin Paper, which you can then turn into Clean Paper. This should give you 4 pieces of paper that you can take over to the Study Table in the Church, study, and burn. Voila! You should have your first Science points.

After that you can also get Science points from:

  1. The Astrologist: After you complete the Astrologist’s first quest, he should give you 2 Science points
  2. The Bishop: Complete the quest to give the Bishop 20 bowls and he will give you 5 Science points

Further Blue points

The Study Table can also be used to farm Blue points you want! You can study body parts and various other items at the table to get them. Just keep in mind that you can only study a type of item once, though some can be decomposed into Blue points. And if you find you’re still struggling, here are some extra ways to earn them -

  • Farm sand and clay to create glass, which you can also study
  • Buy books & science papers from the Astrologist to study
  • Craft Church benches


That’s all for this Graveyard Keeper guide, but be sure to stick with GameSkinny for more helpful guides like this. And if you're just starting out and haven't already, be sure to check out our Graveyard Keeper beginner’s guide for tips and strategies on starting off on the right foot!

Fallout Shelter Guide: How to Heal Mr. Handy Fri, 15 Jun 2018 16:16:41 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Wondering how to heal Mr. Handy in Fallout Shelter? Well, you've (definitely) come to the right place. 

Whether he's gathering caps from the wasteland or collecting resources in the vault, there will come a time when Mr. Handy stops his diligent butlering and goes Hulk on the wasteland adversaries invading your vault. 

Since Mr. Handy follows invaders until he kills them, he's sure to take damage no matter what you do. And since you don't want to lose your little helper, healing and repairing him will quickly become a necessity. 

But here's the rub: you can't heal Mr. Handy in Fallout Shelter. No matter how much damage he takes, there's currently no mechanic that allows you to heal him while he's still alive. Stimpacks do not work. 

You can repair him, but only after he dies. Currently, it costs 2,000 caps to repair Mr. Handy, which can be a pretty penny depending on your situation. 

The repair method works in both normal and survival modes. However, it's worthy to note that survival mode is known to have a bug that sometimes hides the "revive" button. If you run into this bug, just close the game and restart. The "revive" option should reappear when you return. 

And if you're wondering: No, Mr. Handy can't die in the wasteland because he doesn't take damage when exploring. If you're tired of looking at busted, half-health Mr. Handies, consider banishing them to the wasteland to collect caps. 


That's all you need to know about healing and repairing Mr. Handy. For more tips and tricks, be sure to check out all of our Fallout Shelter guides while you're here. 

How to Start Playing The Elder Scrolls: Blades Fri, 15 Jun 2018 11:48:08 -0400 Sergey_3847

If you've been carefully watching the E3 2018 conference, then you should be aware of the open pre-registration for the mobile version of The Elder Scrolls: Blades.

The game is free-to-play, and if you pre-register, then you will get an exclusive sword and helmet. But the best part is that you can play the game before everyone else. So follow our guide below, if you want to know how to start playing The Elder Scrolls: Blades early.

How to Pre-Register for The Elder Scrolls: Blades

Step 1: Create Bethesda Account

If you still don't have a personal Bethesda account, then do so by following this instruction:

  1. Go to
  2. Click Login/Signup in the upper right corner
  3. Choose "Create account"
  4. Enter your username, e-mail, and password
  5. Choose a security question and answer
  6. Confirm registration
Step 2: Sign Up for Early Access

There are two ways how you can register for the Early Access of The Elder Scrolls: Blades -- one for PC users and one for mobile users.

Follow these steps, if you want to pre-register using PC:

  1. Go to The Elder Scrolls: Blades website
  2. Sign in with your login and password
  3. Sign-up for Early Access
  4. Choose your mobile device
  5. Confirm registration

Follow these steps, if you want to pre-register using mobile device:

  1. Go to Google Store (for Android users) or iTunes (for iOS users)
  2. Click on "Pre-Register"
  3. Confirm registration

Now all you need to do is to wait for the early launch of the game, and you can start playing The Elder Scrolls: Blades right away.


Currently, The Elder Scrolls: Blades is only available for Android and iOS devices, but later Bethesda will release the game on all other platfroms. So keep your eyes open for more news about the game here at GameSkinny!

Fortnite Map Guide: Search Chests in Risky Reels Thu, 14 Jun 2018 06:35:10 -0400 Sergey_3847

With update 1.63 dropping this morning, we're officially on Week 7 of Fortnite's Season 4 challenges. And this week, you'll have to find seven chests at one of the poorest locations on the map -- Risky Reels.

As you know, since Epic Games fixed the location, it is getting really hard to find any loot chests there.

However, we've gone and done the hard work for you and listed all the possible Risky Reels treasure chests locations below. Hopefully, you'll be able to complete this challenge without much hassle at all.

All Chest Locations in Risky Reels

Looking at the map above, the first three chests can easily be found inside the building to the north. Break through the roof and you will see one in the attic. The second one is on the first floor, and the last one can be found on the ground one, so just break the floors from top to the bottom and quickly grab all three chests.

The barn in the eastern part of Risky Reels also has two chests, which are probably the easiest ones to get. Just hop inside and claim them right away. Check out the rest of the buildings as well, including the projector to the south, which hides one of the chests under the railing.

Some of the trucks scattered around the location may have a chest or two on their roofs, but don't bother checking the cars in the center of Risky Reels, as they aren't there anymore.

If you can't get all seven chests at once, be sure to either complete the game or get eliminated. Otherwise, the game will not count the chests you've already found and will make you gather all seven chests once again.


That's it for all loot chest locations in Risky Reels for this Week 7 Challenge. For other Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny, check the links below:

Fortnite Challenge Guide: Score a Goal on Different Pitches Thu, 14 Jun 2018 06:22:08 -0400 Sergey_3847

The hardest Fortnite Season 4, Week 7 challenge is scoring three goals in different soccer locations. You may think the best way to do it is to go to one of the giant stadiums recently added to Fortnite, and score the goals there.

But in fact, those stadiums will be extremely populated and you will get nothing done. If you want to finish this challenge quickly, then simply follow our guide for the three secret soccer field locations in Fortnite.

How to Score Goals on Different Pitches

Pitch 1: Risky Reels

The first secret field is located in Risky Reels. Just go to the northeastern part of the map and find the broken projector at the location (it's hard to miss). Go right under the projector, and you will see a small soccer field with a soccer ball ready to be kicked. Do it and claim your first goal!

Pitch 2: Containers/Crates

The second secret field is located in the area with containers and crates northeast of Dusty Divot. Just follow the exact location marked above in the screenshot and you will see the soccer ball near the crates. Kick it inside one of the open crates and it will count as a goal.

Pitch 3: Fatal Fields

The last one is quite ironic as it is located on one of the fields inside Fatal Fields, which is located in the southern part of the map near Moisty Mire. You will find the soccer ball in the northern field with a few scarecrows wanting to play soccer with you. So claim your third and final goal and grab your rewards for this hard challenge.


Now you can easily complete the soccer challenge in update 1.63 without too much trouble, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, check out the links below:

Fortnite Battle Star Guide: Follow the Treasure Map Found in Pleasant Park Thu, 14 Jun 2018 06:16:05 -0400 Sergey_3847

As you know, there's really no need to look out for the actual treasure map to claim each week's Battle Star. However, if you still need it, this week's treasure map can be found in Pleasant Park.

Surprisingly, the treasure map in Fortnite's 1.63 update is really easy to decipher, so just follow our guide below for the exact location of the Battle Star.

This week's treasure map will lead you to the Battle Star located on the top of the hill at Tilted Towers (see the screenshot above for exact location).

There's no doubt you know where to find Tilted Towers, but the exact hill you're looking for is positioned in the eastern part of the location, just at the edge of the city.

You need to land right on top of it and claim your Battle Star. Of course, Tilted Towers will be hot, so you might want to do this challenge as a squad. 

As you see, this Week 7 challenge is really simple (except having to navigate all the gunfire that's sure to light up Tilted Towers). Regardless, you should be able to finish this hard difficulty challenge in no time.

Hopefully, Epic Games will come up with some more exciting treasure map locations for the next week's challenge.


That's all for this week's Season 4 treasure map challenge. For other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, check out the list below:

How to Log Out of Fortnite on the Switch Wed, 13 Jun 2018 14:11:26 -0400 Ty Arthur

Switch players have been eagerly awaiting the launch of Fortnite on Nintendo's killer multi-platform console, but unfortunately, it's off to a bit of a rocky launch with a couple of big issues.

Many players are discovering an odd oversight on the Switch version -- an inability to log out of your Epic account and switch to another account. This can be a game-breaking problem if you accidentally pressed the option to log in as a guest rather than using your main account, or if, for instance, you have a separate account for another family member and want to switch back to your primary Epic account.

Note that this is a separate (but connected) issue to the problems with PS4 linked Epic accounts. The long story short there is that if you previously linked your Epic account to the PlayStation Network, then there is absolutely no way to use that account on the Switch. Full stop, no go. Your only solution to that problem is to create an entirely new account.

But that's not why you're here. So here's the solution for another frustrating problem.

How To Logout of Fortnite Switch

First and foremost, it's important to know that entirely deleting and re-installing the Fortnite app does not solve this problem. Your account details are saved on the Epic Games servers, not on your console, so deleting and re-installing doesn't do anything and won't log you out of the currently activated account.

There are a few possible workarounds with varying levels of dependability. The one solution most likely to resolve the problem is also the solution you are going to least want to try.

The (Crappy) Solution

To sign in with a different Epic account on Fortnite, you can always just create a new user profile on your Switch, then download Fortnite again for that profile. You will be prompted to either sign in as a guest or use whatever Epic account details you want to log in with.

While it's guaranteed to work, it isn't a very viable solution long-term, since it will mean constantly switch back and forth between profiles just to play one single game.

If that doesn't seem like a workable solution for you, then there's another option to try.

Less Crappy but Not as Reliable

Tap the home button on the Switch's right joy con, highlight the Fortnite tile, then tap the Y button to fully close the app.

Re-launch the program and take a look to see if you are still logged in. Some players are reporting this logs them out of the Fortnite servers, while others have stated it isn't working at all for them -- but it's worth a try since it doesn't take much time.

Your Final Option

Finally, you can head over to the Epic Games website and sign in with your Epic account. Hover over your account name and click the "Account" option in the drop-down menu. From there, click "Connected Accounts" on the left hand side of the screen. 

In the list of accounts, you can attempt to un-link your current Switch account, then re-link with whatever account you want to use. Like the previous solution, however, some players are having trouble getting this to work properly.

For now, creating a new Switch account is the only surefire solution until Epic adds a "logout" feature in a future patch, hopefully soon.

 Linking accounts at the Epic Games website

Have you found another solution for logging out of your Fortnite account on Switch? Let us know what you tried and what's been working in the comments below!

For those who are finally able to log on, be sure to check out our latest Fortnite guides for Season 4, Week 7 below:


How to Game In Comfort: Choosing the Right Chair For Under $100 Tue, 12 Jun 2018 11:47:50 -0400 Samuel Franklin

Are you ready to throw out that old gaming chair? The one with the worn-down cushion? Of course, you are. 

Whether you're a PC gamer or a console gamer, it's time for you to play in comfort and style again -- all without breaking the bank. 

Since sitting for hours on end comes with the territory, a comfy chair can easily make or break a gaming session. After recently going through a purchase to replace my own five-year-old gaming chair (and doing it on a budget), here are a few tips that helped me get a great chair and an even better deal.


If you want a chair that's going to last for a long time, you need to first choose the right material, since cheap material can easily fray, rip, or separate from the chair itself. And that's not to mention it just might not feel right.

So, it's best to do your research. If you have to spend a few extra dollars because the racer chair is made of higher quality materials than the generic PC gaming chair, then follow your heart and pay those few extra dollars and make a solid investment.

The best way to do this is to find a chair in-store. Being physically able to see and assess chairs provides a significant edge because you can get hands-on with the chair. If you can't find on in-store and have to resort to buying online, read as many reviews as you can and compare specs on official websites. 

Materials available for gaming chairs mostly break down into two categories: leather and fabric. These days, you can obtain both material types in a $100 budget chair with decent quality, making the choice mostly personal. 

However, there are some things that you can consider when making your choice. 

Leather is ideal for people who love to pair their game time with a beverage as it can easily be wiped down after a spill, etc. Meanwhile, fabric shines in hot and humid climates where it will reduce sweating (and sticking) for those longer gaming sessions.

Both are susceptible to frays or tears with time making longevity a draw for similarly priced materials. Personally, due to where I live, I value fabric over leather and haven't looked back after making the switch.


Speaking from experience, if you are a hardcore gamer, you will be sitting in your chair for dozens of hours -- at least. Nothing is worse than coming out of your game world to double over in pain because of a sore back. Similarly, you don't want to be uncomfortable for the whole session, constantly moving from side to side.

As comfort can be extremely hard to judge (especially for online purchases), you want to look for reviews on comfort and, if possible, visit a local retailer that stocks your ideal chair (or one of similar make) and take a seat for a few minutes.

The other main comfort elements to consider are: Do you want a neck/headrest? Or, do you want curved or flat armrests?

If you're tall, having a headrest will increase the ergonomic quality of the chair, giving your head something to rest on -- or if you prefer to play in a reclined position

Armrests are important for keeping your wrists healthy depending on your setup and height. If you're a PC gamer, armrests will be more important (based on your desk height, for example) than for a console gamer. The wrong armrests can even increase the likelihood of conditions such as carpal tunnel and lead to back and neck pain. 

Those shopping outside the $100 budget range will have the luxury of buying a chair with more levers to customize seat depth and even armrests. In our proposed $100 price range, these features are more limited in our proposed $100 price range. And although they are achievable, you'll have a harder time finding them and your selection will be much more limited.  


In addition to the chair, the physical aspects of the space you have is actually a vital consideration. A recent move left me with a chair that was too large for the space I had, making it awkward to get into and sit in.

You want to measure how much space you have in your gaming area. If you are dealing with a small area, it might be best not to spring on a huge chair with a wide profile. You want to be able to sit far enough away from your television or computer without giving yourself a migraine, hurt your eyes, or cramp your legs, the latter of which can negate all of the positive ergonomic effects of your new chair. 

You also have to think about getting your chair in the room/building it in the room you want it in. It might be a pain to do this if the space you're putting it in is too small to accommodate the chair. And obviously, this can lead to other injuries not even associated directly with the chair. 

Comfy Gaming Chair Recommendations

With these factors in mind, here are a few good chairs for gaming that continually came up while I was doing research. Some of these can serve as a good starting point for your own research.

Intex Inflatable Ultra Lounge Chair

This is a fairly cheap option, running around $24. This makes it one of the cheapest gaming chairs money can buy at the moment. It's comfortable and comes with an inflatable ottoman for you to prop your feet on while you game.

If that doesn't sell it, it has a cup holder as well. Obviously, the design is intended for the console player and perfect for a temporary solution, such as a dorm room or similar.

You can buy it on Amazon for $70.96

Crew Furniture 512090

This is a chair in the Rocker series of gaming chairs that is actually fairly inexpensive and an option for someone wanting leather. It's good for your budget and goes right on the floor, making it good for comfortable console gaming.

If you prefer to have your arms free as a console gamer, it's lack of armrests can cater to your requirements. Of course, this floor-based design makes it completely useless for computer gaming.

You can buy it on Amazon for ~$45

Merax High Back Gaming Chair

This chair will run you about $100 and is more suited to the PC gamer. It's fairly inexpensive for the quality it provides, and it helps you maintain a comfortable, proper posture while you play.

It gives you support all the way to your spine to keep pressure off your back and neck. Overall, it's a sleek and stylish option for the gamer that prefers to sit back and relax on a leather chair.

You can buy it on Amazon for ~$100

Modern Luxe Reclining Fabric Racing Chair

Finally, this is the gaming chair I ended up selecting to ensure I'm comfortable playing Fortnite and eventually Fallout 76. It helps that it met all my criteria: it comes in under $100; it's fabric-based; and it has flat armrests. It's extremely similar to the Merax featured above, and comes with neck and headrests, adjustable armrests, and overall great body support.

This is really the minimum I'd consider these days for a gaming chair since gone are the days of office chairs being used for gaming when amazing comfort is available at prices less than $100.

You can buy it on Amazon for $99.90


There's no reason to keep that old clunky chair with these inexpensive options on the market. You shouldn't have to suffer from a sore back or general discomfort from your current chair any longer. Alternatively, if your chair is simply falling apart or not ideal for your current gaming lifestyle, it's also time to look for an upgrade.

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more guides just like these: 

Realm Royale Class Guide: Best Builds For Duos Tue, 12 Jun 2018 10:58:21 -0400 Zack Palm

Realm Royale stands out from other battle royale games with the introduction of classes. These classes vary from one another, not only from their passives, but how they play with their unique legendary weapons and abilities.

Before you land into the Realm with your partner, you should know what classes work best together and how to get the most from your abilities. While a good build in Realm Royale can make the world of difference, a pair of teammates communicating together can change the outcome of any fight. Here's a series of builds you and your partner can use to claim the Crown Royale!

Hunter and Warrior

  • Weapons
    • Shotgun
    • Longbow
  • Abilities
    • Proximity Mine
    • Flare
  • Weapons
    • Heirloom Rifle
    • Throwing Axe
  • Abilities
    • Charge
    • Shielding Potion

This build focuses on getting the Warrior as close to your enemies as possible to deliver devastating damage, quickly. The one problem about this strategy lies in the fact that the Warrior lacks a considerable amount of range. While their Throwing Axe does a great deal of damage, it doesn't have the best range and they need to switch to their other weapon in order to remain vital. But, because they're charging in immediately they won't have time. 

To make up for it, the Hunter keeps the Warrior protected with their Longbow from a good distance away. As the Hunter highlights enemies using their flare, they can position their Proximity Mine close to the fighting. If you and your partner communicate fast enough, you two can use the Warrior's aggressive charge to lead enemies towards a well-placed mine to soften them up.

The Hunter's ranged barrage can keep them occupied, and the Warrior's shielding potion can keep them alive as they charge in to meet the enemy head on.

Warrior and Engineer

  • Weapons
    • Rifle
    • Heirloom Rifle
  • Abilities
    • Flask of Healing
    • Net Shot
  • Weapons
    • Plasma Launcher
    • Heirloom Rifle
  • Abilities
    • Barricade
    • Deploy Turret

If close range doesn't suit your needs, this build should allow you and your partner to stay a safe distance away from your enemies. When things start to go south the Engineer can place down use their Barricade ability to protect you. The great benefit of this ability is you're still capable of firing past the shield to pepper your enemies while their shots get absorbed by the shield. This ability also gives your team the opportunity to replenish your armor or health.

That's also a problem with this build: you don't want to remain in a single location for too long. You and your partner have to keep moving. To help with that, the Warrior can throw their Flask of Healing down behind the Barricade to give you both a rush of health. This means you can make recovering your armor a higher priority. 

Both classes will need to have a long range rifle equipped to get the most of this build, preferably the Heirloom Rifle. If your enemies get too close, the Engineer can always spawn a turret to supply some extra firepower and the Warrior can pull out the traditional rifle for some medium range engagements.

Assassin and Hunter

  • Weapons
    • Crossbow
    • Sniper Rifle
  • Abilities 
    • Concussion Bomb
    • Smoke Screen
  • Weapons
    • Hierloom Rifle
    • Long Bow
  • Abilities
    • Withdraw
    • Flare

When you trust your ally to have your back, you two can confidently dominant the competition from a safe distance.

This devastating combo features the Assassin's Sniper Rifle starting every engagement. Because this weapon features the only scope in the game, enemies won't know your location until its too late. The one downside is the Sniper Rifle takes a great deal of time to reload. As a result, the Hunter's Long Bow can keep up the consistent barrage while the Assassin reloads their rifle to deal crippling damage to anyone they hit with it. The Assassin better know how to aim!

And if your enemies do make their way over to you, both classes feature a great getaway ability, Withdraw and Smoke Screen. These abilities will confuse your adversaries for a time, but not for long. In order to make sure they don't sneak up on you, the Hunter's Flare ability will highlight anyone attempting to ambush you. Additionally, the Assassin's Concussion Bomb can push back any foe attempting to get in close. 

Engineer and Mage

  • Weapons
    • Shotgun
    • Hierloom Rifle
  • Abilities
    • Deploy Turret
    • Fire Bomb
  • Weapons
    • Stone Spear
    • Poison Pistol
  • Abilities
    • Ice Block
    • Explosive Flask

You may be surprised to learn the Engineer and Mage classes work well in close range engagements, especially when they use their abilities in sync with each other.

Any good engagement should start off with the Engineer throwing down a Fire Bomb to distract the enemy. The goal isn't to rely on this damage, but scare your foes enough to where they disperse and pull away from each other. Once they're separated, the Mage can use their Explosive Flask on a single target and slow them down. The Engineer can finish them off with some well-timed shotgun blasts, and their turret. Because the Explosive Flask slows down your enemies, the turret can make short work of them as they struggle to get away.

You'll have to be aggressive with this build. Because the Engineer can heal armor progressively out of combat, they can serve as the front line. If the Mage ever runs low on health, they can always pop their Ice Block ability and regain it back. But they're vulnerable once they pop out of this state. The Engineer will have to use their turret to compensate for the lost firepower during this time.

Assassin and Warrior

  • Weapons
    • Sniper Rifle
    • Hierloom Rifle
  • Abilities
    • Smoke Screen
    • Sensor Drone
  • Weapons
    • Shotgun
    • Throwing Axe
  • Abilities
    • Net Shot
    • Charge

This build works much like the Warrior and Hunter build, however the hard damage dealer in this build, the Assassin, needs a little bit more assistance with their long range weapon. Unlike the Hunter's unique weapon, the Sniper Rifle takes quite a bit time to reload. As a result the Assassin needs to make sure their shots count every time. The Warrior can make this less of a challenge.

During an engagement, the Warrior should rush into a fight using the ability Charge. When you've chosen a specific enemy to target, the Warrior hits them with their Net Shot ability, which slows them down by 50 percent for a short amount of time. This is where the Assassin takes advantage of that slow movement speed and hits them with their powerful Sniper Rifle. From there, the Assassin can switch to their Heirloom Rifle and continue to fire at anyone still alive.

The Assassin can use their Sensor Drone ability before entering a building to pinpoint all of the enemy locations. The Warrior can use this knowledge to plan their strategy before flushing them out. If things get hot, the Assassin can toss down their Smoke Screen to pull away. This ability always works great if you need to do a quickly reload any of your weapons.


These builds should serve you well as you work your way up the ranks in Realm Royale and continue to claim the precious crown! 

If you haven't already, check out our first impressions of Realm Royalealong with our beginner's guide if you're still trying to learn about the game. For more information on Realm Royale, keep it here at GameSkinny. 

Jurassic World: Evolution Getting Started Guide Tue, 12 Jun 2018 10:45:28 -0400 Fox Doucette

Jurassic World: Evolution is upon us, and as you load up the game, you may sensibly wonder to yourself where to begin.

The short answer is "see the movie"; a measure of familiarity with 2015's Jurassic World isn't required, but it will smooth out the learning curve big-time.

But after that, follow these simple guidelines and you'll be working your way from Isla Matanceros to Isla Nublar in no time, satisfying all the factions at InGen and building better dinos along the way.

Step 1: Remember the Laws of Nature

You will save yourself a lot of grief if you remember a simple principle; lions do not lie down with lambs.

Meaning there are two types of dinosaurs in Jurassic World: the ones that eat meat and the ones that ARE meat. Put them in the same enclosure and you're gonna have a bad time.

Or at least the herbivores are.

There's a fairly simple reason for this. Herbivore dinosaurs won't fight each other. They will peacefully coexist in an enclosure, and as long as you watch both the overall population size and the food supply while monitoring the amount of grassland and forest in the enclosure, the dinosaurs will stay happy.

Every dinosaur has a series of meters that can be accessed simply by clicking on it in the game world; this will tell you about the dinosaur's overall health, including whether it is hungry or thirsty, and will show all of its comfort factors.

A dinosaur needs a certain amount of grassland to roam around in, forest to provide cover, others of its own kind to socialize with, and not too much overcrowding from its own or other species.

On the other hand, there is the simple fact that meat-eating dinosaurs are hunters. They will try to kill and eat anything that is not of their kind. Like in nature in the real, non-dinosaur-populated world, there are predators and prey, and all mixing them accomplishes is to get the prey animals eaten.

This is complicated just a bit by the fact that a carnosaur will make decisions based on whether it thinks it has a chance against its foe. Furthermore, eusocial carnivores, like Velociraptor, will hunt in packs in herbivore enclosures and band together to keep other meat-eaters at bay. It makes for a bit of a metagame in their enclosures.

Just remember that as long as you keep the meat side hot and the veggie side cool like an old-school McDLT hamburger, you'll have most of this battle won.

Step 2: A Contract Is A Contract Is A Contract, But Only Between Ferengi

The 17th Rule of Acquisition governs the faction system in this game. In order to make progress through the missions that unlock everything in the game's world, you need to do contracts for the three factions, Science, Entertainment, and Security.

Trouble is, as Dr. Ian Malcolm would no doubt remind you, actions have consequences. Specifically, what pleases one faction is sure to anger the other two.

More specifically than that, the game will tell you before you take a contract exactly what effect each contract will have on faction reputation.

Some contracts are a win-win; they raise the reputation with the faction giving the quest and sometimes one or both of the other factions as well. You'll want to take contracts that satisfy more than one faction every time and prioritize them because they are downside-free progress boosters.

Other contracts pit one faction's interest against the others. In the movie, the science and entertainment divisions were at odds with each other; it was one of the central themes that drove a lot of the conflict. Science wants pure-strain dinosaurs, paleontological accuracy, and healthy, thriving dinosaurs.

Entertainment, meanwhile, wants to do genetic modification that would make Monsanto blush. Complicating matters, these GMO dinosaurs, with DNA from frogs and sharks and any other animal under the sun clogging up their genomes, tend to have better stats for the park at the expense of being in poorer health and far more dangerous if they break out of their pens.

Most of Entertainment's missions, then, will annoy both Science (who want pure-strain dinosaurs) and Security (who don't like it when park guests get eaten like the lawyer in the porta-potty from the original 1993 Jurassic Park film.)

Security, meanwhile, represents the faction in Jurassic World that had a stake in militarizing the dinosaurs and using them as weapons. Most of their missions involve dinosaur combat. You'll be asked to find carnosaur fossils, and when dinosaurs fight each other (but not the guests) it tends to make Security very happy.

So you can't just go taking jobs willy-nilly or all you'll end up with is everyone mad at you. And when factions get mad at you, they start doing things like sabotaging the power grid, causing merry mayhem just like way back in the first movie.

The best strategy is to avoid whenever possible playing one faction against another. It's unavoidable on some level; as your reputation with factions rise, you get both monetary rewards and extra missions, so sometimes it's worth risking the wrath of the other two factions to prop up your preferred faction's interests.

Plus, there's nothing in the game rules explicitly stopping you from picking a side. If you agree with a faction's ideology, adopting a ride-or-die mentality or even just role-playing a little is a perfectly viable way to play the game. Min-maxing your reputation and being hyper-selective with which missions you take just makes the game a whole lot easier at the expense of rapid, directed progress.

You will need to eventually please everyone, but trying to do it by just doing everything you're asked is a recipe for constant infighting. Learn how to say no.

Step 3: Guests Are Easy to Please

There is no particularly choice-based strategy to guest satisfaction. Click on the star rating in the main HUD and it will tell you exactly what your guests want. Specifically, the guest needs are divided into food, drink, fun, and shopping, and every guest building in the tab marked with a little burger icon will tell you exactly what needs that building fulfills. The star rating display will then spit out a result that tells you on a scale of 100% how well the need is being fulfilled.

You can decide what is being sold, how much it's being sold for, and how many staff, from one to five, operate the stall.

Choosing a low-price item attracts more guests, but the per-item profit on each sale is fairly low. A higher-priced, higher-margin item sells fewer units, but generally the margins are high enough to offset the lack of brute force sales volume.

And the game gives instant feedback when you change the price to let you know almost to the moment when you've edged the prices just a tick too high. There's a hidden pricing curve that's fairly easy to tease out through trial and error.

Staff size governs the number of guests who can use each facility; as your park gains more guests, you'll have to hire more staff. When your building is maxed out at capacity, build a new shop.

There's also a hidden-at-first attribute for overcrowding; when you build your first hotel, clicking on it will let you know how much of a drag crowds are placing on happiness.

In other words, it's a paint-by-numbers tycoon game with plenty of hand-holding.

Step 4: Dig, Research, Do Science

No matter which faction you're favoring, it always helps to send your expedition teams out to dig for fossils. The degree of completion of any given dino's genome governs its base viability (50% fossils is minimum to be able to clone one, 100% is as "accurate" as the game and the film universe allow. There aren't any feathered dinosaurs here; the film franchise has decided to go with "classic" dinosaurs and the game follows its license here.)

Actually digging and prepping the fossils is paint-by-numbers. Go to the expedition center and choose a dig site that contains the dinosaur fossils you want, then go to the fossil center and extract the DNA, and finally use that DNA in the cloning center both to make more viable dinosaurs and to unlock more slots for genetic modification.

Meanwhile, in the Research Center, there are a variety of visual tech trees; spend the money you earn here to unlock both dinosaur modifications and building upgrades. Time and patience are all that is required to know everything, and choosing what to prioritize depends largely on your mission or game goals.

Step 5: Disaster Preparedness

From the second island on, you'll get storms that temporarily knock out the park and break stuff. The game gives you a storm tutorial at the beginning of the second mission; as long as you follow it, you'll have the nuts and bolts of it.

What the tutorial doesn't tell you is that you should always be watchful. Press R to bring up the Ranger Station and you can either go into a third-person driving mode for the ranger jeep or otherwise simply automate it by using the task selector.

It also doesn't tell you that in order to have your island protected from storms, you need to complete the Entertainment division's mission in the first level.

This mission unlocks the storm-warning building, which casts an area-of-effect that prevents the worst damage to anything that building covers. You'll need those on islands with regular storms, and you will especially need them near power plants as an insurance policy against the worst-case scenario of having the power go out and knock out things like electric fences to keep the dinosaurs at bay and all your guest facilities in the park itself.

So to summarize; Do the first level's entertainment mission before leaving the first island, follow the tutorial in the second level, and stay vigilant by occasionally using the view offered by the ranger station to make sure the park stays in good repair and the dinos' feeders are supplied.

Step 6: Win the Levels

Keeping the guests happy is half the battle. Getting the dino rating up is the hard part.

Besides following all the rules in Step 1 of this guide, the keys to getting a good dino rating are as follows.

First, make sure your dinosaurs are healthy, well-fed, and have access to water. This will keep them both from dropping dead and from trying to break out and kill your guests.

Second, strike a balance between authenticity and genetic modification; more DNA accumulated through fossil research gives your dinosaurs a higher base rating, while genetic modification applies modifiers to that base rating to in some cases goose it quite high.

Third, give your carnosaurs something to kill from time to time. Every carnosaur that wins a fight gains "combat infamy" equal to half the rating of the dinosaur it killed. This can get expensive—dinosaur cloning is not free—but can, over time, lead to great champion dinosaurs that drive people to want to watch them fight.

Fourth, build viewing areas into the fences and, if you can, put feeders and water sources within the radius of the viewing area. That will increase the value of the dinos to your park's rating and also satisfy the guests' "dinosaur visibility" rating.

And fifth, there's a "variety penalty"; the more different species of dinosaur you have in your park, the more this penalty is mitigated until it reaches zero. Every island has different rules governing this, so click on the star rating and it will tell you how you're doing.

Of course, you'll also have to remember that some dinosaurs are social while others hate crowded enclosures; a dinosaur that feels packed in will try to bust out, while one that doesn't have enough friends around will also break fences in hopes of finding others of its kind beyond the walls.

Once you've got the basics down, the game will move you on to bigger things, and you can also come back to those old islands with new knowledge and unlocks to get secondary objectives for each island that bring their own additional unlocks and new horizons.

In Summary

Jurassic World: Evolution is, in its heart of hearts, a relatively simple resource management game. As such, once you learn how to manage your resources, there is nothing the game can throw at you that you won't be able to master.

Returners Beginner's Guide: Building the Right Pantheon Mon, 11 Jun 2018 15:29:58 -0400 Stephanie Tang

Known for expansive, gorgeous, and exceptionally grindy MMOs like Mabinogi, Vindictus, and Maple Story, Korean developer Nexon has in recent years hit the mobile gaming platform in force with games like Masters of Eternity and Durango: Wild Lands. Hardly tied only to the MMO genre, Nexon's latest hit Returners brings epic RPG storylines and fast-paced 5v5 PVP battles to Android's Google Play and the Apple App Store

In an unexpected side-step from the usual world building of new characters, Returners is stocked with heroes drawn (loosely) from real life as well as myth and legend (in a similar vein to Hi-Rez Studios' SMITE). Based on the free-to-play model, the game revolves around advancement and upgrades with two different types of currency (regular gold and premium gems). 

This guide will discuss how to get started in this game - and how to get going without dipping into your wallet!

(Looks a little different from your history book, doesn't he?)

1. Getting More Characters in Returners

Battling is fairly straight-forward in Returners; the fights are played out in real time and your characters attack automatically so your primary concern is to point their efforts in the right direction (i.e. target monster) either individually or as an entire team. You'll need to set your character formation, and keep track of your combat power and your Tactic Cards.

Note: Tactic Cards cannot be used in PVP play. In regular fights however, you can equip up to two of them for regular battles which give you abilities like taunts and heals which can be used as many times as needed (although on a cooldown timer). 

But who do you need to throw into the fight? There is a huge number of different characters in the game with more being added every so often, each with their own stats, abilities, and star ratings. They're all broken up into five different classes: Tank, Fighter, Ranger, Mage, and Support. Once you complete the tutorial, you will have one character from each class - and if you want more, you have a few options as to how you get 'em.

You can purchase them using your currency (some of the 1-star characters are available for summon in the store by paying $10k gold, but the majority of the more enticing characters require those precious gems). Don't waste your resources on just any hero or you'll find yourself paying real money for more gems!

A cheaper method by far is to acquire new characters by completing tasks during events or completing story chapters in the story mode. This, plus daily login rewards are also excellent ways for you to stock up on extra rewards. 

2. How to Get Free Gems

These are your early-game tickets to easier battles and better rewards - but don't spend them willy-nilly! The battle difficulty as you progress through the game is going to ramp up and you are going to want higher-quality heroes all the time. While your characters can be upgraded and improved, you're always going to want high-star ratings to make sure your A team is outfitted with the best.

Daily Missions and Achievements

The regular login rewards don't have any gem rewards, but there will often be events where the devs will throw some at you just for logging in. However, completing daily missions will earn you rewards that include gems. And if you complete enough of them, you'll also complete achievements (e.g. complete 5 daily missions, complete 13, etc.) which will earn you additional gem rewards. 

Finish Adventure Battles with 3 Stars

There's a bit of finesse when it comes to planning out your battles, but you're hard-pressed to lay on the smack down as quickly as possible. Completing the battle as quickly as possible will gain you extra rewards, and at the end of each 10, a special rewards chest will get tossed your way - the payout for which includes gems. 

3. How to Get 3 Stars in Every Battle

To finish with 3 stars, you need to down your enemies and finish the fight as quickly as possible

I didn't time it myself, but other sources suggest that the time limit is about 40 seconds. If you want to clean house in that amount of time, you're going to need to go hard on your offensive. Luckily, even if one of your characters dies in battle, if you can complete it within the time limit, you can still stock up on the star rewards. Fight to the finish!

After you complete the tutorial, you should have enough gems to trade for a good, solid 4-star character. After a few days of play, you should be able to introduce another few 3- and 4-star characters into your team roster. For those of you who are emotionally invested in certain characters (don't lie, we all have them) regardless of their star levels, rest assured that they can be upgraded even if they aren't quite up to snuff right from the get-go. 

(Note: If you're unsure about what characters you want, the game itself provides a kind of message board for each character that you can view when you look into them, discussing preferences and strengths and weaknesses. Definitely worth taking a look even if you know who you want.)

However, you should focus your efforts on your core team, no matter how many characters you end up acquiring. While you can switch them out as you like, you're going to want a solid group that is the best that you can make it.  

Equipping your Characters

While it is a little more time-consuming, once you begin to acquire a lot of different gear (and you will, among other rewards, the game will give away a new piece of gear ever 24 hours), you'll want to equip your characters individually rather than relying on the auto-equip. 

It's slower (I actually auto-equip and then fine-tune afterwards, swapping stuff around until it's all to my liking) but this way you'll be able to ensure that the best gear available is the stuff your characters are currently wearing. 

Upgrading Your Characters and Transcending

Remember what I said about hanging onto the characters you love? You can do it - and you can increase their star ratings as well if you're willing to put the time and the grind work into them. Equip them well, and then run them into battle, particularly the same Adventure mode battles, over and over again to level them up and gain experience. Keep upgrading your gear, upgrading your skills, and acquiring new Tactic Cards as well. 

Once you get a character to their maximum level, you will be able to let them transcend which allows that character to gain a star level. (Once you do this, their levels will reset so this will also be the best time to use an EXP book if you have one.)

Note: While on the subject of replaying, check out the rewards for completing specific levels as well, as this is the best way to earn upgrade crystals which you'll need for, well, basically everything. Upgrade weapons, gear, characters, each will require different upgrade crystals. 

Other Things to Note

  • Just because you have a core group does not mean you should ignore absolutely everyone else. There will be occasions where you don't need a fully balanced team (e.g. two DPS characters in a boss battle situation versus bringing a healer) so it's worth it to make sure some of your second string characters are still up to snuff. 
  • The above will also help you when you start taking on arena mode which is played with two character teams of 3 in two different rounds. What classes you choose to take into this mode will largely depend on how they're leveled and what they can do. 
  • Pick up characters with standout skills if you can (e.g. tanks should have good stun and taunt abilities, spell casters and DPS characters (ranged and melee) should have high ult abilities, etc.)


That's all for now! Stay tuned to GameSkinny for any new tricks, tips, and ways to keep on winning!

Fortnite Patch 4.4 - Where to find the Soccer Stadium & Patch Notes Mon, 11 Jun 2018 13:16:24 -0400 Ty Arthur

Apparently trying to grab headlines away from all those killer E3 announcements, we received a very unexpected and very large update to Battle Royale king Fortnite this morning.

Besides arriving earlier than normal, Week 7 of Season 4 shows off some major changes to the game, from a whole new area to a thermal scoped gun and sadly the disappearance of a cool item everyone loved.

Where To Find The New Fortnite Soccer Stadium

To land at the newly added soccer stadium in Fortnite, jump off the battle bus east of Junk Junction and north of Pleasant Park near the D2 square of the map. The stadium is clearly visible from the air just to the east of a hillside and it dominates the landscape, so you shouldn't be able to miss it while landing.

This area is absolutely massive, including indoor tight hallways for shotgun shootouts, wide open field to snipe, and shrubs and vehicles to use for cover, with plenty of random floor loot drops found all around the location.

The abundance of items and freshness of the location make this sort of the new Tilted Towers where everyone wants to land, so be ready for a firefight when you touch down. Your game here will either be very short, or you are in for a Victory Royale if you can take out all the wounded players who landed there first.

To go along with the new soccer stadium, no less than eight new Fortnite soccer skins are coming soon (four male and four female), which will create quite the hodgepodge of super villains and sport fans as Fortnite celebrate the World Cup in typically bizarre fashion.

 Coming in for a landing at the new soccer stadium (thanks to TheRafi for the screenshot)

Fortnite Patch 4.4 Notes

First and foremost, the awesome shopping cart vehicles have been temporarily disabled as they've been bugging out in odd ways. We've seen the same thing happen before with other new additions to the game like the guided rocket, so hopefully they won't be gone long. We'll update this article when an announcement is made about their return.

Next up, the thermal scope assault rifle has been added to the loot rotation, which is comes in Epic and Legendary variants and is going to change the balance of power in the game.

As you'd expect, it lets you see heat signatures of enemies hiding behind bushes or walls, and can even be used to see hidden loot chests, so keep it on hand to find lots of equipment! Expect tweaks to this weapon's damage and rarity to show up -- or for it to be removed entirely -- as it makes it very easy for a competent player to entirely dominate the match and take out any hidden enemies.

Some big changes have also come to the meteor landing site at Dusty Divot, so be sure to head over and check it out! It seems like something big is brewing there that will further alter the map in the ramp up towards Season 5.

Finally, we've got an entirely new area to explore with new loot drops and lots of opportunities for mayhem: a soccer stadium sprang up over night in the Battle Royale map!

 Overpowered? You bet it is!

Is the soccer stadium your new favorite place to land? Let us know your strategy for winning at this new location!

Still need help with some of the other weekly challenges? Check out our recent Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny below:

Survival 101: 10 Minecraft Tips You Might Overlook For Hardcore Mon, 11 Jun 2018 12:10:21 -0400 Samuel Franklin

When you're new to Minecraft, you may have difficulty learning how to survive and find the items you need. This learning base can similarly be overlooked for advanced players as they attempt their first hardcore run. Fortunately, we've compiled these helpful and overlooked Minecraft tips to ensure your hardcore run is fruitful. You'll be playing like a pro in no time.

With over 122 million copies sold, Minecraft is still going strong. Of course, if you're brand new to the game, the game's Survival mode can feel quite intimidating but even returning players may find themselves struggling due to the wealth of mechanics that have likely been added since your last game.

Not to worry, we're here to help! Here are 10 Minecraft tips to help you survive to build another day.

1. Download Seeds For a Headstart

While part of the fun of Minecraft is creating your own world, sometimes you don't have an afternoon to spend crafting and building. That's where Minecraft seeds come in handy. Downloading a seed grants you access to a starting point in a pre-existing world or lets you copy elements of another player's game world into your own. Maybe there is a particular element of the game you dislike (like hunting for a settlement or the long trek for monuments in the late game) which is where seeds can help eliminate these aspects.

2. Prioritize Wood Early

While materials like copper and stone are certainly important, when you pop into a game world, your priority should be finding wood given its flexibility in creating all manner of vital items. While an expert player might look for stronger resources early you can quickly find yourself blocked due to the lack of wood.

3. Ignore Enemies At First

As any Minecraft player can tell you, the game world is a much different place at night and definitely so when playing on the harder difficulties. Enemies spawn more frequently in an attempt to thwart your crafting efforts. It can be tempting to get some quick EXP from fighting them. But trust us, it's better to dodge them and keep crafting, at least until you get some stronger weapons.

4. Build Torches To Light Up Your World 

Terrible pun withstanding, torches really do make a huge difference in Minecraft. After all, you can't expect to hit an enemy if you can't even see them. Before the first night, make sure you have plenty of torches on hand so you can see your surroundings and place them strategically around your main hub.

5. Pay Attention To Your Surroundings

If you're new to the game it's easy to get lost. After spawning into a new game world, orient yourself according to the sun. It'll always set in the west and rise in the east. It may sound like one of those Minecraft tricks that won't come in handy all that often, but if you get lost, you can use the sun or moon to find your way back to camp.

6. Don't Dig Straight Down (Ever)

If you're trying to see how long you can last, falling into a hot pit of lava isn't a great tactic. If you must dig beneath your character, make sure not to dig too deep. At a certain point, you'll fall and perish.

7. You Can Go Underwater (And You'll Have To For The Water Monument)

You can search watery areas for extra materials like sand and ocean monuments. Make sure you keep an eye on your oxygen levels, as your character can drown if they remain underwater too long.

8. Lava Can Be Useful

If you touch it or fall into it, lava can cause a great deal of harm to your character. However, it's an essential component in creating obsidian portals, so stocking up on a few blocks of lava may not be a bad idea if you're careful.

9. Keep Extra Blocks In Your Inventory

It's always a good idea to keep some extra building materials on hand, especially if you're far away from your base. If night falls and you're lost, you can simply build a small makeshift base to keep yourself safe.

10. It's Okay To Use Cheat Codes

Minecraft is all about fun. If your idea of fun is using cheat codes to enhance your game, don't feel ashamed to use them! Adding a few extra blocks or turning on invincibility can take the stress out of Survival mode and allow you to sit back, relax, and enjoy the game.

Use these Minecraft tips to conquer the world one block at a time Minecraft is a ton of fun, but staying alive in Survival (and Hardcore) mode can be quite the challenge.

Make sure to follow these helpful tips to get the most out of your game and check out our other Minecraft guides here on GameSkinny!

Vampyr: Known Bugs, Glitches, and their Fixes Sat, 09 Jun 2018 21:34:11 -0400 Zack Palm

Been sinking your teeth into Vampyr and found the game biting you back?

A number of players have reported they've run into a series of bugs and glitches during their time in Vampyr, as they explore the dirty streets of early 20th century London. Many of these issues turn out to be game breaking, and something the developers, Dontnod, need to create patches for -- hopefully you can find a solution here!

Here's a list of known bugs, glitches, and their respective fixes, if any solution was found.

Stuck On Green Screen?

A number of players have run into a green screen upon loading in to the game. You might think restarting your game, or restarting your desktop, will fix the issue but this green screen continues to pop up. You'll find the problem doesn't stem from the game, but your desktop's graphic card.

This problem famously occurred following the Windows 10 Fall Creators Update. Many reported their displays appeared corrupted and the images on their screen began to flash green. NIVIDA learned about this issue and have offered a work around.

Here's the process of how you get around the horrid green screen:

  1. Open up your NIVIDIA control panel
  2. Go to the option that says "Change Resolution"
  3. Select your display
  4. Alternate your settings so you display uses NIVIDIA color settings
  5. In the "Output Color Depth" option, change it to 8bpc
  6. Save your settings

This should clear things up and the next time you launch Vampyr, you should not run into this issue. If you still have this happen, you may need to try updating your graphics card to see if this provides a better solution.

Infinite Experience Points Glitch

For anyone looking to check out some of the higher level Vampire abilities Doctor Reid can use, you can receive infinite experience without having to do too much.

One warning: don't do this if you want to keep your save file pure.

You can preform this glitch from your Active Skills menu. Here you should see all of the skills available for you to choose from. Click on any of the abilities in your menu, as if you were going to upgrade it. As you go to upgrade it, hold down the "O" and "P" buttons on your keyboard. You should see, in the upper right hand corner, your experience points shooting up at a fairly fast rate. 

You can do this for however long you like. When you have all of the experience points you want, you can freely purchase any of the Vampire abilities you want, and go to town on your enemies in combat!

This will definitely ruin your save file. Preforming this glitch doesn't ruin your information or anything, but it means you're fairly broken for the rest of the game.

If you're looking to keep the game as traditional as possible, you're better off trying it out once you've beaten the game. 

Expect a patch to take care of this glitch at some point in the future.

Blackmail in Whitechapel Quest Bug

This remains a fairly rare bug, but certainly worth mentioning as it does have crippling effect on the progress of your game.

The bug occurs during the Blackmail in Whitechapel quest, when you're at the part where you go to the Whitechapel district to gather more information about the nurse, Dorothy Crane, from Darius Petrescu. You speak to Petrescu about Dorothy, and then go through a cutscene, you do not receive any further instructions about how to proceed in the quest.

You can't reload the game to fix this bug. If you do reload it, the quest says you need to go and speak to Petrescu, even though you've already done that. You're essentially stuck.

Unfortunately, there's no solution about how to get around this. As of right now, the developers know about this and are working on a solution. The best thing to do right now is wait for a patch to come in to fix this issue -- because the developers know about it, expect one to show up soon.

Blinding Light Glitch During Fergal Boss Battle (Chapter 3)

You'll find this an extremely frustrating bug as you may mistake this for a game mechanic attempting to make this fight harder. That's not the case.

During the boss battle with Fergal in the sewers, in chapter 3, there's a light that can obstruct your perspective. No matter how you move or the angle you approach Fergal, the light follows you and makes it nearly impossible to see what's going on -- as a result, you may die during this phase multiple times.

When you die and continue to attempt to conquer this fight, you're showing up with less health and blood than you originally came in with. If you're running into this issue stop fighting. You'll only continue to frustrate yourself.

Unfortunately, there's no solution for this bug, yet. The developers are hard at work attempting to find a way to remove this light and make it easier to see Fergal during your fight.

In a forum, a number of players mentioned if you dodge Fergal enough times during the engagement the blinding light will disappear for a short while. Additionally, if you move your camera at the right angle, you can make it disappear. Sadly, it always returns after a period of time and remains a consistent problem. 

Occult Oculus Quest

During this quest, you're tasked with acquiring four different Braille pages to hand to Mason Swanborough. He acknowledges you giving him all of the pages, except for the last one.

When you go to hand him the fourth page, Mason makes a comment about you needing to find a laboratory -- though, the quest does not update and you're left wondering what to do next.

As of right now, the developers have not commented that they know of this bug or if a solution is being worked on. Should you run into this issue, make a blog post on the Vampyr forums. A community member on the page will likely see it and bring it up to the developers as quickly as possible.

Red River Investigation

Another game breaking bug you might find yourself running into. This one happens when you go to investigate the corpse during the Red River quest.

As you're investigating the corpse, you'll go through the prompts on the screen and the process you're already accustomed. However, you'll find yourself unable to get out of this screen. You're instead stuck attempting to investigate the body you've already combed over.

Many other players who have run into this issue have gone through a number of attempts to bypass it. Some have attempted to simply hard reset their consoles or desktops. Others have even attempted to uninstall the game, and reinstall it -- still, nothing. They cannot get past this part, and they're stuck attempting to learn more about the corpse!

As of right now, the developers do not have a solution ready for you. This remains a rare problem, so if you're experiencing this, make a post on the Vampyr forums to notify community members and developers of this issue.

Again, a solution for this problem will likely crop up in a series of patch notes in the future.


Experiencing a unique issue with Vampyr? Let us know in the comments, and we'll add your problem to the overall list! If there's a solution out there, we'll post it alongside your issue to assist you in continuing your game progress.

If you haven't already, check out our review of the game. For more information and Vampyr guides, keep it here with GameSkinny. 

Vampyr Guide - A Simple Token of Filial Love Sat, 09 Jun 2018 13:10:06 -0400 Autumn Fish

A Simple Token of Filial Love is one of many side Investigations found in Vampyr. You get it after talking to Seymour Fishburn around the southern edge of the Docks. He asks you to find a necklace that he lost -- one that he intended as a gift for his mother, Stella Fishburn.

In this guide, we'll cover everything from where to find the necklace, whether to give it to Seymour or Stella, and which dialogue options will offer up the most hints. Let's dive in!

A Simple Token of Filial Love Walkthrough

In order to find the necklace, start from where you met Seymour at the southern edge of the Docks, facing the pier. Head down the stairs and turn right. On the right you'll discover a narrow corridor with barrels blocking the path. Smash them with your weapon and continue inside.

To your left you'll find a locked chest and to your right you'll find a pile of bodies. Investigate the bodies and you'll come across a Bloody Necklace alongside a note intended for Seymour's mother.

At this point you can choose whether you want to bring it back to Seymour or deliver it to Stella yourself. However, if you want to earn the most hints from A Simple Token of Filial Love in Vampyr, you'll have to return the necklace to Seymour.

Upon giving the necklace to Seymour, you'll learn your first hint about him. Respond with "I want to try to understand" and you'll unlock the ability to ask him some more personal questions.

Go through the new personal questions to unlock another hint about Seymour and one about his mother, Stella. This unlocks a new personal question you can ask about his mother. Ask him about it and respond with "I understand her dilemma" in order to unlock a final hint about Stella.

Vampyr Hospital

And that's everything you need to do in order to complete and earn the most hints out of the A Simple Token of Filial Love Investigation.

Are you stuck on any more Investigations in Vampyr? Be sure to leave all your questions and comments down below!

Totally Accurate Battlegrounds: Beating Cheaters & Fixing Bugs Fri, 08 Jun 2018 14:57:18 -0400 Ty Arthur

As an unexpected smash hit, the sudden popularity of Totally Accurate Battlegrounds has seen the servers take a beating and bugs galore emerge from the shadows. Framerate drops, disappearing players, and very odd weapon behavior are all common issues.

Many of the biggest bugs can be resolved with newly-released patches (if you can get them to download properly) but other issues are being purposefully caused by nefarious cheaters.

Are you getting Totally Accurate Battlegrounds "Wrong Version", "Can't Find Game", or "Matchmaking" errors? We've got you covered with a rundown of how to fix most of the issues currently plaguing the player base.

Totally Accurate Battlegrounds Bugs and Errors

Landfall has already released a flurry of patches in the handful of days since the game has gone live, so you are almost certainly using an out-of-date version -- even if you have auto-update turned on through Steam.

The auto-updates won't always applying correctly without a manual restart. If you are getting error messages, can't connect to a match no matter which server you pick, or the game is just generally running poorly, then entirely close and restart Steam.

When the Steam client comes back up, click the "X of X Items" text at the bottom of the screen to bring up the list of available updates, and then click the arrow on the right side of the Totally Accurate Battlegrounds slide to start the update immediately.

 If there's an arrow instead of an X, click it to start the patch update

If you continue to have the same problems after the download finishes, then the update likely didn't apply properly and needs to be fixed.

Right-click Totally Accurate Battlegrounds in your Steam library and choose Properties, then tab over to Local Files. Click Verify Integrity Of Game Files to find out which file you are missing that is causing the problem. You may need to manually restart Steam again after this process.

Dealing With TAB Cheaters

A final word of warning for Totally Accurate Battlegrounds newbies. As you play, you will most likely notice people who don't seem to be affected by the weird physics of the game, have weapons immediately when they land, fly at warp speed, have perfect aim, and so on.

Yeah, those are the cheaters, and they are a problem already. I don't know why they'd want to ruin the fun of a game that's meant to be absurd instead of competitive, but they are here and have to be endured until an anti-cheat measure is implemented.

The developers have stated an anti-cheat system won't be implemented until the bugs are fixed and the game is more stable, so we may be in for a long wait. 

The issue is that major elements of the game, such as weapon recoil, movement speed, damage, and ammo can be edited on the client side by hackers who mess with the code. 

At the moment, there isn't a clear fix to this cheating problem. When we find a reliable method for dealing with them (or an anti-cheat patch comes live) we'll get this article updated.

However, before taking to the boards to vent your frustration, keep in mind that some of the issues that appear to be cheats are actually bugs meant to be dealt with in the next patch.

Specifically, sometimes players appear in the wrong location or are invisible (or may appear to "teleport" due to server lag), which aren't cheats but give the appearance of a cheating player.

Have you come across any other Totally Accurate Battlegrounds bugs or error messages you need help with? How do you feel about the game's cheaters? Let us know what problem you are having and we'll look for a fix!

Be sure to check out our other Totally Accurate Battlegrounds guides while you're here! 

Totally Accurate Battlegrounds Guide: How to Find Weapons Fri, 08 Jun 2018 13:38:51 -0400 Ty Arthur

The biggest battle royale hit was not at all what we were expecting! Move over Paladins, PUBG, and Fortnite, because the April Fools joke that was and is Totally Accurate Battlegrounds is actually the best BR game out right now!

Since it was supposed to be somewhat of a spoof, some of the systems are currently wonky and many elements of the game aren't explained well, leaving many players wondering where to find weapons (and how to use them!).

Don't worry: we've got you covered with everything you need to know about killing 39 poor ragdolls in hilarious poofs of smoke.

Note that the tips below are for those who aren't experiencing the "can't find game", "wrong version", and "no matchmaking" errors and are now actually taking part in the 40 man deathmatches.

If you haven't been able to get into a match yet or aren't sure how to work the basics like healing items and attachments, check out our Totally Accurate Battlegrounds beginner's guide here instead.

Best Weapons Currently in Totally Accurate Battlegrounds

This is a game where you really want to spend time in the Shooting Range before joining a match. Due to the purposefully odd physics, weapons behave in very strange ways and you want to have a handle on them before playing against other people who are probably already better than you.

Most notably -- grenades go off at completely random times. One grenade might go off immediately (RIP: you) or it might not go off for a full minute and a half. It's a gamble that makes the grenade launcher hilarious, but effectively useless in most situations unless you're desperate and have no other option.

A player looks at their inventory screen and their avatar in Totally Accurate Battlegrounds It looks cool... but is more likely to kill you than the enemy

On the other end of the spectrum, swinging your fists isn't as pointless as it sounds, especially since other weapons aren't reliable. Getting into a slap fight with someone trying to flee and find a gun is not only good, silly fun, but it's also a decent way to rack up a kill against a newbie.

Oddly enough, melee can be the best way to go in a match. The battleax is probably the best weapon in Totally Accurate Battlegrounds, as it usually kills in 1 hit, which is much, much more reliable than the nonsense guns. On top of that, it isn't hard to take out a squad of three players who are expecting to destroy you with rifles and pistols.

A player holds a red battleax as they approach another player on the shore The battleax: God's perfect killing machine

The ballistic shield is another overlooked gem since it protects you from harm and can be used to bash enemies as you get up close. Just don't go under any trees while holding it! The weird physics will warp your body and turn the shield sideways, making it useless.

If you don't come across a killer battleax, then be on the lookout for attachments, as they make the guns much more manageable. A loaded up P90 or sniper rifle can turn you into a killing machine if you find the right attachments.

A player with red arms holds a riot shield in front of them Shield bashing is a fun and unexpected way to take out an opponent!

Finding Badass Weapons In TAB

Just finding a single weapon can be a huge ordeal in your first few matches, as the spawning is currently quite problematic.

You can search 10 houses in a row and find nothing... then run across a gun, some ammo, and a scope stuck under a rock out in a field or inside a tree stump.

When checking buildings, keep in mind that sometimes weapons, armor, and attachments spawn in hidden spots, like behind chairs and doors, so you have to search a little more thoroughly.

A player searches an empty wooden house for loot Expect to see a lot of empty houses on your search

A good rule of thumb is that if you hit three houses in a row and come across nothing, move on to the next area and search around outside while you are traveling.

You can mitigate some of this, though, by changing up your landing zone and hitting Chaos, Ruins, or Military Place first, as those areas tend to have more equipment for the taking than other TAB landing sites.

Also(!), always try to avoid the edges of the map. When the walls start closing in, there isn't currently enough time to make it to an outpost without dying if you land too close to the edge.

A player with red arms holds a riot shield in front of them a looks at a flintlock pistol stuck in a tree in TAB Yes, that is a flintlock pistol hiding INSIDE the tree


Know where to find secret stashes of guns? Or found a totally accurate way to get more kills? Let us know your strategy below, and we might just add your methods to this or any of our other Totally Accurate Battlegrounds guides

Realm Royale Beginner's Guide: Becoming a Battle Royale Ninja Fri, 08 Jun 2018 10:57:45 -0400 Zack Palm

Realm Royale from Hi-Rez studios is the newest battle royale on the block. Currently in alpha, now's the perfect time to jump in and figure out the best winning tactics -- and how the game works -- before servers get overloaded (Ninja's playing it, so that probably won't be long).

The game does have several differences from PUBG and Fortnite. You're not building anything complex in which to defend yourself, and you're not taking bullet drop into account. You're playing a new, unique experience where you won't know every little detail as soon as you jump in.

Knowing that, here's some advice to consider the next time you find yourself making your next superhero landing into the Realm!

Always Have A Supportive Ability Equipped

The five classes in Realm Royale have four different abilities you can choose from, and you can have two abilities equipped at all times. While the classes have unique powers, many of them have supportive abilities designed to keep you and your team alive. Some classes have more than one supporting ability, so discuss with your team what you need to equip to optimize your team composition.

A warrior holds a pistol and kneels behind a shield in Realm Royale

Here's a class list of supportive items you'll want to keep your eye out for:

  • Flask of Healing: Throw a healing flask on the ground and give health to your allies in a small area. This works great during an active firefight if someone needs heals, and they can't disengage to pop a potion. It also works for yourself, too!

    Shielding Potion: Like the Flask of Healing, you throw a flask on the ground to grant your allies, or yourself, a shield for a brief period of time. Again, another optimal ability to have up your sleeve in the middle of an engagement. It doesn't last long, though, so keep that in mind. 
  • Barricade: You deploy a shield to block enemy fire. This is an excellent ability to cover a building's entrance and give your teammates a few seconds to recover their health or armor.

    Healing Totem: This places a totem down and heals your allies for a few seconds in the immediate area. If you double this with the Barricade ability, your allies can focus on using armor potions and save their health potions for later.
  • Sensor Drone: You toss a small drone that sticks to a surface and reveals any nearby enemies for five seconds. Every team will want an Assassin to have this equipped so they move against any well-positioned enemy squad.
  • Wall: This summons a protective wall up from the ground. It works similarly to the Engineer's Barricade ability, but it doesn't provide as much cover.
  • Flare: You fire a flare and reveal enemies in a large area. This works just like the Assassin's Sensor Drone, though it covers a larger area.

Remember, while Realm Royale is a battle royale game, the developers want you to work with other classes in your squad! Communicate with your teammates and figure out what abilities you want to grab. Every ability provides an opportunity to tip fights in your favor.

Use The Forge And Craft Multiple Items

There are multiple forges all over the Realm Royale map, and you need to take advantage of them to get the edge on other players. You can carry up to 200 shards at a time. 

The forge options menu shows choices, their forge times, and shard costs

When you get there, use as many shards as you have on you. However, make crafting your legendary weapon your top priority, because while armor helps a lot, you don't want to give your enemies the chance to fire back at you! 

Once you get the first item going, don't stop there. How many shards do you have left? What else can you craft? A forge can have multiple items going at the same time at a single location. Craft your items within seconds of each other! But remember, you can only craft one of each item at a single forge - so don't stick around once you've finished everything!

It's important to note that potions take 30 seconds to make and the other items take a full 60 seconds. If you have to rush out of there, at least leave with a handful of potions.

You do not have to sit at the forge fire to craft your items, either. You can wander around the building as much as you'd like. Use this to your advantage, because your enemies may be drawing closer. 

When you craft an item, smoke lights up from the top of the forge and gives away your position. Rally your teammates to cover the entire area -- and make sure you're ready to grab your items at a moment's notice!

Realm Royale Fake Out!

Use the smoke from the forge as a strategic call sign!

As the storm circle gets smaller and smaller, coordinate with your teammates to continually gather shards throughout your journey. This way, when you're all geared up and have the best items at your disposal, you can set a trap at the final forge by crafting a bogus item. This way you'll trick other players into revealing their positions.

When they run in to rush your position, ambush them -- they'll never expect it.

A Mage looks up at the smoke coming from a forge

This tactic won't always work since the circle remains a random mistress, but keep this in mind the next time the circle wraps around a small city and you see a forge somewhere inside it. However, be careful, your enemies might think of the same ploy.

Do your best to patiently approach any situation to ensure you're the last team standing.

Jump Down On Your Enemies and Damage Them

The superhero landing in Realm Royale not only looks cool, but it serves an excellent purpose in the game. You can use it as an attack and deal a lot of damage to your enemies.

You do this by optimizing your character's jump ability. Not every class can do this, though. Only the Warrior, the Engineer, and the Mage can.

So how do you pull off a superhero landing? Essentially, you'll want to perform a basic jump, and then at the full height of it, activate your jump ability. This sends you straight up into the air, and if you don't hit anything on the way down, you can land on enemies and do some damage.

A mage performs a superhero jump down

Keep in mind, however, that there are several disadvantages to performing this attack. When you land, you'll find it takes about a second to recover from the impact. A skilled enemy may use this opportunity to hit you with a melee weapon or an ability if you didn't turn them into a chicken first.

Another is the fact you're probably away from your allies.

Picking a time to execute this air assault is critical. The best moment to do this is likely when you've already hit your enemy several times from afar and they're now attempting to disengage from the fight. Definitely reserve this attack for a finishing move or an ambush where your allies can support you.

This attack is not a good idea when you're playing alone.

You Cannot Shoulder Swap

You'll find this as frustrating as you find it in FortniteRealm Royale does not have a shoulder swap button, and there's no way to perform one.

As a result, you need to plan your long distance engagements against other players. They'll have a different perspective of you, and you don't want to leave yourself exposed. If you suddenly get shot and you can't locate the shooter, it's better to pull away. You can find plenty of potions to patch yourself up and return later -- if you survive. 

A hunter kneels in Realm Royale building as she aims a rifle toward mountains in the distance

There's no worse feeling than dying to someone who barely had you in their line of sight. Sometimes you can't see them because an obstacle obstructs your vision and they get the better of you. 

Check your sights constantly and never give your enemy an advantage over you.


These tips should keep you and your squad alive longer in Realm Royale -- or better yet, secure a win. Because the game was just released, you can expect these tactics to change as the developers tweak weapons, abilities, and mechanics. 

For more information about Realm Royale's development, keep it here at GameSkinny. 

How to Play Totally Accurate Battlegrounds: A Beginner's Strategy Guide Fri, 08 Jun 2018 10:12:10 -0400 Ty Arthur

You had to know this was coming: the official Battle Royale parody is finally here! Totally Accurate Battlegrounds plays something akin to a (slightly) less ridiculous Octodad... but in a huge deathmatch setting.

The game is currently free for 100 hours after launch, at which point it will retail for $4.99 -- so now is the time to download it if you don't want to pay for it. 

Unfortunately, all those people taking advantage of the free pricing are overloading the servers, making it difficult to even start a match right now. However, if you do get in, you might want to know how to actually play the game, since it is a tad different than other Battle Royales currently on the market.

Don't worry: we've got you covered with a guide and some strategies for staying alive!

 Flying car? Don't question anything in
Totally Accurate Battlegrounds.
Just get in.

Solo Matchmaking

The most common issue you are going to run into is the "Totally Accurate Battlegrounds wrong version" error message. Currently, it's plaguing everyone.

Thankfully the fix is already here, but it won't update immediately while the app is open.

First, fully close the game and wait for Steam to download the update (if it doesn't start, click the "0 of 1 items" link at the bottom of Steam and then click the arrow icon on the right side to manually begin the download).

Restart Totally Accurate Battlegrounds and click "Ready" to wait for an available match. If one doesn't show up in a few seconds, switch to the alternate US2 or US3 servers using the button in the top left corner (I'm having the most luck getting into games straight away on US3 at the moment.).

if you want to play Totally Accurate Battlegrounds in duos or squads with friends, choose "Invite" instead of "Ready", although at this point, it might be better to just wait as the servers are taking a pounding and it's hard enough just to get into a solo match.

Totally Accurate Battlegrounds Is Mostly Familiar

As a battle royale clone, TAB plays remarkably like PUBG or Fortnite: you'll pick the right landing spot, listen for enemy footsteps and gunshots, and search houses for equipment.

However, buildings tend to be sparser than other battle royales, so expect to search more before finding a decent weapon -- and be prepared to use different weapon types, as you will likely find yourself with a grenade or a battle ax instead of a rifle.

 That grenade sure looks concerned about what I'm going to do with him...

Best Landing Spots (Currently)

First and foremost, do not land in the water, as it turns your screen blue and then stays that way for the duration of the match. It's unknown if this is a bug or one of those obnoxious glitches set in place on purpose.

The creatively named Military Place -- found on the island at the southwest corner of the map -- is hands-down the best landing spot at the moment. There's guaranteed to be a vehicle found on one of the roads at the outskirts, along with lots of buildings to search for weapons and armor. Whether you like close quarters confrontations or sniping, there's terrain here to fit your playstyle.

Military Place also features plenty of hiding spots and elevated buildings to snipe opponents who break from cover, and with all the tunnels and corridors you can effectively hide and take out enemies with melee weapons if you haven't found a gun yet.

 Totally Accurate Battlegrounds Landing Map

Using Items and Weapons in Totally Accurate Battlegrounds

The F key is used for interacting with the environment and picking up items, but the layout is different than many battle royale games you may be used to playing.

Hit the Tab key to access your inventory and then right-click to use items like bandages and healing kits. Don't move while using them though, as the timer seems to stop if you go backward or forward.

Critically, guns don't come pre-loaded, so you have to hit R to reload a weapon as soon as its picked up or you'll just get a click, click, click when you need to fire.

 Accessing the Totally Accurate Battlegrounds inventory

The scroll wheel also doesn't change your equipped weapons, so you have to manually press 1, 2, 3, or 4 to select your next gun, and even to switch to a grenade (which is the 4 slot). Pressing nearly anything -- like M for the map or F12 for a screenshot -- will unequip your weapon, so be ready to tap the number keys again.

When you do finally find a weapon, be sure to use the absurd physics to your advantage. For instance, you can equip a gun with a high recoil like a shotgun, then aim at an angle into the ground or a wall and jump while firing to fling yourself up to flank enemies.

 Have fun avoiding explosive death in Totally Accurate Battlegrounds!

Have any other Totally Accurate Battlegrounds tips and tricks we should try out to hit the #1 position? Let us know your Battle Royale strategy in the comments below!

Fortnite Poster Locations Complete Challenge Guide Thu, 07 Jun 2018 16:39:46 -0400 Ty Arthur

The Season 4, Week 6 challenges for Fortnite arrived a few days later than normal after the actual v4.3 content patch was released, leaving the fan base wondering what was up with the new challenges.

After that brief delay, all the Week 6 challenges are now here to test your knowledge of the map and see how well you can find hidden locations while avoiding bloodthirsty players!

This week's big challenge is to find and spray paint seven of the Fortnite Omega posters scattered around the area. There's far more than seven of them that have been discovered so far, so with a little pre-planning, you can probably get all you need in a single match... if you don't get sniped or swallowed by the storm.

 Spray painting a Fortnite poster (thanks to Hicko for the screenshot)

Fortnite Week 6 Poster Locations

This one has more of a prerequisite than many other challenges in the past since you need to have unlocked the spray paint emote already by reaching the Season 4 Battle Pass Tier 3 before you can even take part in the challenge.

With that unlocked, you can start tracking down the Carbide and Omega posters plastered on walls inside buildings. Be sure to search around, as sometimes they are in basements or have to be accessed by destroying walls or floors.

When you find one, pull up the emote wheel and select the spray painting option while you are directly facing a poster. It should automatically spray paint over the correct area as long as you are facing the right direction.

As with most challenges, make sure to actually complete the match (by dying or making it to a #1 Victory Royale) for the challenge to be ticked off your list. If you don't get them all before being gunned down, they will go towards your total of seven and can be finished in a later match.

Here's all the Fortnite poster locations that have been uncovered by the player base so far:

  • Inside the large house at the center of Loot Lake (landing directly here and then heading either in a clockwise pattern east or a counter-clockwise pattern south lets you hit most of the posters before being herded into the middle of the map)
  • Inside the main building of Junk Junction
  • Between two doors in the tunnel south of Tomato Town
  • At the exact same site as the disco dancing challenge in the Haunted House southwest of Pleasant Park
  • On the first floor of the house at the top of the mountain near Snobby Shores
  • Underneath the stairway at the southeast edge of the Tilted Towers area
  • At the bridge south of Shifty Shafts, head to the bottom of the stairs at the west side
  • Near a dumpster at the southwest side of Retail Row
  • Inside the destroyed prison at the far east end of Moisty Mire
  • In the building between Junk Junction and Anarchy Acres
  • In the area north of Salty Springs and southwest of Dusty Divot
  • At the area west of Dusty Divot and east of Tilted Towers

 All Poster Locations in Fortnite

This is just one of the quests currently available, with these Season 4, Week 6 challenges now up for grabs:

  • Search Supply Drops (3)
  • Deal damage with Shotguns to opponents (1000)
  • Search Chests in Loot Lake (7)
  • Spray over different Carbide or Omega Posters (7)
  • Search between a Playground, Campsite, and a Footprint (1) (HARD)
  • SMG Eliminations (3) (HARD)
  • Eliminate opponents in Retail Row (3) (HARD)

Still need help with some of the other challenges? Check out our recent Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny below:

Dragon Nest M - Level Unlocks and Beginner's Guide Thu, 07 Jun 2018 15:41:37 -0400 Littoface

Dragon Nest M has come to the West, and it's brought its authentic MMO goodness with it! Whether you're a veteran of the game from its PC years or you simply stumbled onto it while browsing new mobile games, no doubt the unique style and strong community have drawn you in.

Feeling lost and confused? Need a few pointers before you dive headlong into this addictive mobile action game? You've come to the right place!

In this beginner's guide, we'll go over some combat basics, a few general tips, and all the level unlocks you need to know about up until level 15.

Ready, set, attack!

General Tips for Dragon Nest M

Before you begin, here are a few things you should know about the game:

Character selection

Players can have one character from each class, but items can't be transferred between characters. Each class has its own unique playing style, and the prologue gives you the chance to try them out with all their top skills, so check them out and pick the one you enjoy the most.

You can't change the general appearance of characters, but you will have the option to customize them with outfits, sprites, mounts, and lots more, so the more you play, the more uniquely you the character becomes.

At first, your character's name will be randomized, but don't worry -- you'll get the chance to change this name at Level 5.

Semi-automatic gameplay

For passive playing, Dragon Nest M has a few automatic features, but these are only partially autonomous.

You can run towards quests and quest destinations by tapping on them -- to stop, simply walk in the other direction.

Characters attack continuously if you hold down the attack button, and most longer attacks can be canceled by dodging and redirected by moving the character (so if you find your attack about to miss because the enemy moved, just change direction and land that hit!).

UI and camera settings

You can also change how the camera behaves by switching between 2.5D (fixed) and 3D (trailing), and you can even alter the sensitivity through your character menu (tap on your icon).

Don't want the UI cluttering up your screen? You can hide most of it! Just click on the arrows in the upper right and left corners to make the quest menu and the various event and activity icons disappear.

Find the hidden goodies!

The daily rewards here are plentiful and not always as in-your-face as other games, but they're worth finding, so take the time to find them. Every time you unlock a new feature, explore it thoroughly!

Equipment and skill distribution

Don't worry about how you distribute your skill points: You have infinite free skill point resets until level 30 (yes, you can use it multiple times, not just once!).

Equipment is fairly straightforward, but it can be easy to forget about it, so we felt it worth mentioning: Don't forget to actually equip your equipment!

Community features

One of the best parts of Dragon Nest M is the community feel of it. In the spirit of the PC MMO that it stems from, the mobile game is strong on community interactions and has a vibrant and talkative user base (there's even an option for voice chat!).

Here are just a few things to keep in mind about it:

  • If you have any questions, ask! Someone will be happy to help. The community, at least on the server we tested, is extremely noob-friendly.
  • In the chat, clicking on a user's icon allows you to look at their guild, challenge them to a sparring match, invite them to a party, and more.
  • As soon as you can, join a guild! Be on the lookout for recruitment notices, or just check out the guild list (once you unlock it) for a guild that seems to suit your playstyle. Guilds give you special perks (you can increase your attributes, which carries over even if you leave) and give you access to more daily rewards and the slightly disturbing minigame of Clown Poker (just… why?).
  • Certain special events encourage player interaction. For instance, currently, the Charisma event has players giving each other roses for helping out, being nice, or just because.
  • You have a limited amount of free times you can use the World Chat per day (presumably to prevent spamming), so use them wisely! Some players will respond to a question via DM, though, so you can still get plenty of help.
  • You can even customize your chatbox with special items if you feel like being fancy!

In short, be friendly!

The Beginner's Guide to Level Unlocks in Dragon Nest M

Now that we've gone over the basics, you're ready to play.

But wait, where are all the options? Shops? Crafting? The aforementioned guilds?

Don't panic, you're not confused.

Dragon Nest M has a unique way of introducing players to the game. Instead of bombarding you with all the different options, shops, and special menus, you begin with the very bare bones of the game. As you level up, you unlock new features.

This process goes on until the high levels -- for instance, cooking isn't unlocked until level 32!

Below, we've put together a beginner's guide to leveling and what it unlocks up until level 15. Here are all the important unlocks you'll need to know:

Lvl 1

In the very beginning, all you can access is the options menu (by tapping on your icon) and the character menu (by tapping on the icon on the bottom right).

Lvl 2

Unlocks the skills menu.

Lvl 3:

Unlocks auto-attack.

Lvl 5:

Unlocks your first piece of equipment, the first daily reward (in the upper right-hand corner), and the ability to change your character's name (tap on the character's icon).

Lvl 7:

Unlocks your first sprite, which fights alongside you and offers special buffs.

Lvl 9:

Unlocks the closet, which allows you to equip outfits (appearance-changing equipment).

Lvl 10:

Things pick up from here. This level unlocks:

  • The "Mall," which gives you access to certain shops and markets.
  • "Benefits," where you can get daily free rewards.
  • "Rewards," where you can collect achievement rewards.
  • The "Sprite Shop," where you can collect daily free food, summon new sprites, buy goodies for them, and more (access it by clicking on the sprite icon on the bottom right).

Keep in mind that the rewards and events change, and some of the items that you can get now may only be here for a limited time.

Lvl 12:

Unlocks your first team buff and the Team Abyss, which is a team dungeon where you can get crafting items and a lot of EXP, as well as the following features:

  • Daily events, which you can complete for special rewards.
  • "Strengthen," which acts as a sort of checklist for strengthening your character (go here if you're having trouble in battle).
  • The Daily Carnival, a limited-time event which allows you to complete a certain number of quests in order to unlock a fabulous sparkling llama mount. (It's so fabulous.)
  • The auction, where you can buy from and sell to other players.

Lvl 13

Unlocks crafting. You can now also enhance or dismantle your equipment.

Lvl 14

Unlocks the option to join a guild and spectate (but not participate in) PvP matches -- the ability to participate in matches is unlocked at level 16.

You also get access to the current temporary events (at the time of writing, this is the Charisma Expert quest we mentioned earlier, a Guild Contest, and a Nest Challenge). This is also the place where you would go to input gift codes received from other players or social media.

Lvl 15:

Unlocks class specialization, which allows you to choose a path for your character.

Note: Your initial choice is irrelevant!

During the Trial, you'll have the chance to try both paths and see how each path plays. Following this fight, you can choose whichever path you prefer.


Now that you know what to expect, get going and play the game! And stay tuned to GameSkinny for all your Dragon Nest M news, guides, and updates.

Fortnite Map Guide: Loot Lake Chest Locations Thu, 07 Jun 2018 08:21:13 -0400 Sergey_3847

Week 6 of Fortnite's Season 4 once again brings you a brand-new set of challenges. One requires you to find seven chests in Loot Lake -- one of the worst locations for such task.

But don't worry: just follow our quick guide below for all the possible chest locations in Loot Lake. For your convenience, we've included the map with exact locations, so refer to it as your main guide.

Where to Find Chests in Loot Lake

Map showing Loot Lake Chests

Obviously, the hottest spot for chests in Loot Lake is the central island with a house on top of it. There you will find at least three chests:

  • one on the bottom of the cave under the building,
  • one on the outside of the house on a small platform,
  • and one in the attic of the house.

But be very careful, since lots of people would want those chests and it's definitely going to be highly populated. So maybe you'd want to check out other, lesser known spots instead.

For example, go to the little factory area to the west of the central island, where you will find the caged area with one chest. Also, be sure to search for chests inside the factory building itself. There's usually one chest on the ground floor and another one at the top of the stairs.

Another great place to look for chests is the watchtower on the northern lake shore. And if that's not enough, you can always check out boats near islands that usually also spawn chests.


That's it for all loot chest locations in Loot Lake for this Week 6 Challenge, and for other Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

Fortnite Blockbuster Guide: Search Between a Playground, Campsite, and a Footprint Thu, 07 Jun 2018 08:20:47 -0400 Sergey_3847

This week's Battlestar is located not too far from the last week's spot: this one's in Greasy Grove. And the hint is to search between a Playground, Campsite, and a Footprint.

To find it, just head toward the western coast of the Fortnite map and check the location marked in the screenshot below. When you find the Battlestar, just walk up to it and interact with it, and the challenge for Season4, Week 6 will be completed.

Where to Find Week 6's Battlestar

Fortnite map showing the battlestar location for week 6

The first clue that we have for this week's challenge is the Playground. There is only one such spot in Fortnite, and that is the playground outside the Durrr Burger restaurant in Greasy Grove.

The next one is the Footprint. This one is definitely the giant dinosaur footprint, which is a part of the film set located a bit to the west of the Durrr Burger location. Just walk up the hill, and you will see the footprint on the ground. It's not hard to miss!

The last clue is the Campsite, which is located on the top of the hill to the north of Durrr Burger. This means that the Battlestar should be in the middle of the triangle, which is exactly under the hill with the campsite.

As always, you will find a patch of land with no grass, and that's where the Battlestar will be waiting for you.


That's all for the Season 4, Week 6 search challenge, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, be sure to visit the links below: 

Congratulations, You're the New Undertaker: A Beginner's Guide to Graveyard Keeper Wed, 06 Jun 2018 16:18:27 -0400 A. Web

If you’ve ever played Stardew Valley, then the basic processes behind Lazy Bear’s new game, Graveyard Keeper, should be more than familiar. The only difference is that between growing crops, mining ore, and fighting vicious green goo, you’re maintaining a graveyard and burying bodies -- lots of bodies.

In Graveyard Keeper, you are what the title suggests, and your main mission is to keep the local cemetery looking nice. However, as simple as it sounds on the surface, graveyard maintenance is actually a pretty complicated job that requires completing several tasks, building new technologies, and bringing in funds from visiting townsfolk. Before any of that, though, your main mission as a beginner is to collect points to get new technologies that will help you reopen the church, and that means you’re going to need materials.

Getting Materials and Learning New Technologies

Almost everything in Graveyard Keeper can be broken down to farm different materials: trees, shrubs, rocks, even the wooden barrels in your cellar. Each item will also require a different tool to remove. For example, you can cut down a tree with the axe, but to remove the stump, you will have to use your shovel. In using tools, you’ll not only be expending your own energy (you have around 100 Energy), you’ll also be adding to the degradation of each tool, which means you’ll find them breaking later on (fortunately, you can get a whetstone from the local blacksmith and repair them at your home). When you first start, you might also notice that some of the items scattered about the world have little locks when you go to break them down. This usually means you haven’t hit a certain point in the game to start farming them, or that you haven’t completed a required task that makes them available.

When you break down different items in the game, you will also notice different colored points that look like coins: red, green, and blue.

Red Points represent your handcrafting skills and ability to work with materials. You can get red points when you use any of the work benches you build to craft items like wood crosses or gravestones. You can also get Red Points for mining ore and breaking down rocks.

Green Points represent your knowledge about the nature of things and nature itself. You can get these points through digging up dead shrubs, planting crops, etc. These are some of the easiest points to get when you first start out.

Blue Points represent your spiritual knowledge of the immaterial world -- so anything you “research” or “study” in-game should get you Blue Points. However, you probably won’t be able to get these points until AFTER you open the church. The Bishop will grant you the ability to farm sand and clay, which will allow you to create glass to get Blue Points. Also, if you have the ability to craft paper from human skin (this is done through the blueprint board in the church) or buy books from the Astrologist to study, these will get you Blue Points, too. If you're still struggling, though, bring bat wings or body parts to your work bench to study for some quick points.

These points are what you will use to upgrade certain “technologies,” which are kind of like your skills. The types of technology are broken down into six categories:

  • Anatomy and Alchemy
  • Theology

  • Book Writing

  • Farming and Nature

  • Smithing

  • Building

There are no specific rules for which technologies you have to pick up first, but keep in mind that certain ones are necessary for task completion -- like cleaning up your graveyard. As a beginner, focusing on Building, especially with wood, and Theology to build crosses and fences for your graveyard is likely to do the most for you with early tasks.

Taking Care of Bodies

Outside of the local plant life, you also have the ability to break down bodies. From cutting out chunks of meat to removing skin and bones, you will be able to autopsy each of the bodies left outside of your morgue. While the meat is important, as you can eventually sell it to the tavern, most of the other items you can extract are only good for one-off tasks in the beginning, so don’t worry about harvesting everything each time at the beginning of the game.

Another important thing to remember is that each of the bodies has a time limit. The local donkey brings new bodies every time you bury or get rid of an old one, and he usually comes at sundown. The earlier you pick up a body -- say, between 100%-90% -- the better it is for anything you harvest from that body. The state of the body is also vital for keeping your graveyard nice because as a body decays, it starts to lose its rating. These ratings affect the overall rating of your graveyard. For example, if a body is really decayed, it might be impossible to get the grave past 0. It’s all dependent on the number of skulls you see when handling the body and working on the gravesite.

Here’s a simple breakdown of what to look for:

White Skulls: These are the basic symbol for corpse quality, and the more of them you see, the better. When you look at a grave, you should see a bar with a number of white skulls. The number of skulls represents the quality level that grave can get to. For example, if you have a grave with a single white skull, that grave can only get to a +1 in quality, whereas a grave with 5 White Skulls will be able to get to a +5.

Red Skulls: These skulls represent corrupted or bad skulls. For each Red Skull in your grave, there is a -1 rating. This means that if you have a grave with 2 Red Skulls, it will have a -2 rating. In addition, Red Skulls are counted before any White Skulls, so regardless of how many White Skulls you have, or how you’ve fixed up a grade, it will still get the deduction of any Red Skulls.

Green Skulls: These skulls represent corpse degradation. They’re basically the same as Red Skulls and can’t really be fixed.

Fortunately, there are some easy workarounds to delay corpse decay or get rid of really decayed/negative-rated bodies:

(1) Place a body in a grave without burying it. This stops corpse decay indefinitely until you decide to bury the body completely. It’s also a great way to stall the donkey from bringing you new bodies.

(2) Build pallets in the morgue to leave bodies on. Putting bodies on pallets also stops corpse decay and buys you some time.

(3) Throw the body in the river. If you’ve forgotten about a corpse too long and it’s decayed beyond hope, you can throw the body in the river to get rid of it. This will spare you tanking your graveyard rating.

Don’t worry too much, though; you can usually get through a day or one sleep cycle before a body decays beyond hope.

So now that you know what to look for with each body, it’s time to look at how to bury them.

Fixing Up the Graveyard

Your very first task in Graveyard Keeper is from the Bishop, who requests that you fix up the local cemetery. This means fixing or replacing most of the gravestones and fences around the graves. It also means making sure any new bodies you put into the graveyard aren’t too decayed and that each grave has its own decorations.

In the beginning, you’ll be given some Wood Repair Kits as well as some Stone Repair Kits, but they likely won’t be enough to fix every grave and get a +5 rating. This is where building new technologies and crafting items comes in.

To fix up the graveyard, you need to have the Wood Workbench and Stone Cutter, which will allow you to craft new repair kits. You can build both of these crafting stations by accessing the blueprint bench to the left of your house. Once you have these built, you will also want to pick up the Saw and Wood Processing technologies from the Building category, as well as the technology to create Wood Crosses and Fences from the Theology category.

While you should be able to unlock the ability to craft stone gravestones, you likely won’t be able to create Stone Repair Kits until after the church is opened. So just focus on working with wood. Also, if you run out of nails, buy them directly from the Blacksmith -- you’re going to need a bunch!

Once you are able to regularly craft repair kits, wood crosses, and wood fences, getting your graveyard to a +5 rating or above should be a cinch! But just in case you need a little more help, here are some extra tips to keep in mind.

  • When getting tasks, pay attention to the day symbol! Certain quest givers are only in some areas for a limited time.
  • If you need extra money, you can farm as soon as you get the certificate/deed from the bartender at the tavern. Just buy some seeds from the farmer located south of the Wheat Fields.
  • Bodies will lose 1% every 30 seconds, and once they drop below 90%, they will start accumulating negative effects.


That wraps up this Graveyard Keeper guide, but be sure to stick with GameSkinny for more helpful guides like this!

Might and Magic: Elemental Guardians Creature Tier List Tue, 05 Jun 2018 16:10:38 -0400 Ty Arthur

Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians offers up a whole new way to experience the franchise as a freemium brawler that will have you collecting hundreds of monsters in your menagerie.

With so many options, the question becomes which one is the best, and how do they rank against each other? Because each creature can evolve in various ways, level up, increase skills, increase rank, and so on, it isn't always possible to have a straightforward hierarchy of "creature A is unquestionably better than creature B."

Obviously, higher-star creatures tend to be better than lower-star ones, but due to the unique abilities each creature has and the ability to evolve in different directions, some are much better at glyph farming, while others can dominate in PvP or the Tower of Trials, which is where the tier ranking comes in.

If you want to know which creatures to use where -- and how to upgrade them -- then read on for a full breakdown of every single creature currently available in the game.

Elemental Guardians Tier List

This tier list is arranged by class type in order of attacker, defender, saboteur, and support. Within those classes, each creature is ranked by usefulness in each area of the game, from S tier -- meaning it's completely indispensable and essentially the best at that category -- down to A, B, and finally C tier -- meaning it's mostly garbage at that category.

Note that the Region Farming column is averaged. Some creatures, for instance, will be slightly better or worse at the Benefit/Wrath/Strength sections of the Glyph Dungeon, but overall will fit within that tier ranking whether you are hitting the Glyph Dungeon or farming areas of the Elemental Towers. 

The final column includes a suggested best evolution when upgrading that creature to ensure it lives up to its full potential, whether in the Tower of Trials, region farming in normal battles, or fighting in the PvP Arena mode.

Creature Role Tower of Trials Region Farming PVP Best Evolution
 Young Griffin 
Griffin /
Blazing Griffin
  Attacker  C  B  C Drain enemy health
 Young Griffin 
Griffin / Winter Griffin
  Attacker  C  C  C Drain enemy  health
 Young Griffin 
Griffin / Storm Griffin
  Attacker  C  C  C Drain enemy health
 Young Griffin 
Griffin / Mountain Griffin
  Attacker  C  C  C Drain enemy health
Serpently / Fire Dragonfly
  Attacker  B  C  B Remove helpful effect
Serpently / Icy Dragonfly
  Attacker  B  C Remove helpful effect
Serpently / Thunder Dragonfly
  Attacker  B  C  B Remove helpful effect
Serpently / Mountain Dragonfly
  Attacker  B  C Remove helpful effect
 Deva / Flaming Asura   Attacker  S  A  B Mute enemy ability
 Deva / Winter Asura   Attacker  A  A  A Mute enemy ability
 Blackfang Rogue / Blazing Assassin   Attacker  A  B  B Poison enemy
  Blackfang Rogue / Mountain Assassin   Attacker   B   B  B Poison enemy
 Wolf Cub
Wolf / Icy Silverback
  Attacker  B  B  B Drain enemy health
Daimyo / Flaming Shogun   Attacker  C  B  B Recover turn after attack
Daimyo / Silver Shogun   Attacker  A  A  S Recover turn after attack
 Daimyo / Adamant Shogun   Attacker  S  A  S Recover turn after attack
  Raksasha / Blazing Rakshasha Raja   Attacker  B  B  B Decrease speed, increase damage
Raksasha / Freezing Rakshasha Raja   Attacker  A  B  A Decrease speed, increase damage
Raksasha / Storm Rakshasha Raja   Attacker  A  B  A Decrease speed, increase damage
Raksasha / Mountain Rakshasha Raja   Attacker  A  B  B Decrease speed, increase damage
   Kabuki Ninja / Blazing Ninja   Attacker  C  C  Sleep effect
Kabuki Ninja / Mountain Ninja    Attacker   C  C   Sleep effect
  Bunruku Samurai / Flaming Samurai    Attacker  B  B  A   Stun effect
 Bunruku Samurai / Freezing Samurai    Attacker  B  B  B  Stun effect
 Bunruku Samurai / Thunder Samurai    Attacker  A  B  S Increase damage
 Bunruku Samurai / Adamant Samurai     Attacker  B  B  B Increase damage
   Succubus / Blazing Lilim   Attacker  B  B  A Increase attack based on speed
 Succubus / Ice Lilim   Attacker  B  B  B Increase damage
 Succubus / Tempest Lilim   Attacker  A  B  B  Increase damage
 Succubus / Mountain Lilim   Attacker  C  B  C Increase attack based on speed
Lava Dragon / Ruby Dragon       Attacker  B  B  B Increase attack based on speed
  Basilisk / Flaming Basilisk    Attacker  B  B  B Increase attack based on speed
 Basilisk / Freezing Basilisk    Attacker  S  S  C Increase speed
 Basilisk / Lightning Basilisk    Attacker  S  A  B Increase speed
 Basilisk / Hulking Basilisk    Attacker  B  C  Increase speed
Giant / Lava Einherjer    Attacker  C  B  B Decrease attack / stun
Giant / Winter Einherjer     Attacker  B  B  C Stun effect
 Witch / Winter Sorceress   Attacker  B  B  B Poison enemy
 Witch / Storm Sorceress    Attacker  B  B  C Poison enemy
 Blade Dancer / Blizzard Dancer   Attacker  B  A  B Stun effect
  Blade Dancer / Storm Dancer   Attacker  B  A  C Stun effect
 Imp / Breeze Familiar   Attacker  B  B  C Chance to lower max HP
 Imp / Forest Familiar   Attacker  C  C  C Chance to lower max HP
Thunder Crusher / Alabaster Dragon    Attacker  B  A  S Remove beneficial effects
Centaur / Mountain Centaur    Attacker  C  B  C Stun effect
 Rune Sentinel 
Rune Guardian / Fire Warden
 Defender  B  C  C Chance to recover turn
 Rune Sentinel 
Rune Guardian / Earth Warden 
 Defender  C  B  C Chance to recover turn
  Rune Sentinel 
Rune Guardian / Icy Warden
 Defender  C  C  C Chance to recover turn
  Rune Sentinel 
Rune Guardian / Tempest Warden
 Defender  C  C  C Chance to recover turn
 Shieldguard / Volcanic Guard  Defender  C  C  C Increased attack
 Shieldguard / Winter Guard  Defender  B  B  C Increased attack
 Shieldguard / Tempest Guard  Defender  C  C  C Increased attack
 Shieldguard / Mountain Guard  Defender  C  C  C Increased attack
 Stoneguard / Fire Knight  Defender  C  C  C Taunt enemy
Stoneguard / Ice Knight   Defender  B  B  B Taunt enemy
Stoneguard / Silver Knight   Defender  C  C  C Taunt enemy
 Stoneguard / Iron Knight  Defender  B  C  C Taunt enemy
 Mini Golem
Golem / Lava Golem
 Defender  B  B A Increase attack based on health
 Mini Golem
Golem / Frost Golem
 Defender  B  B  B Increase attack based on health
 Mini Golem
Golem / Tempest Golem
 Defender  B  B  C Increase attack based on health
 Mini Golem
Golem / Stone Golem
 Defender  C  C  C Increase attack based on health
Treant / Ember Treant   Defender  A  A  B Poison enemy
Treant / Winter Treant    Defender  A  A  B Poison enemy
 Treant / Forest Treant   Defender  B  B  B Poison enemy
 Masaru Monk / Flaming Masaru  Defender  B  B  B Blind effect
  Masaru Monk / Freezing Masaru  Defender  A  A Blind effect
  Masaru Monk / Ethereal Masaru  Defender  B  A  B Blind effect
  Masaru Monk / Forest Masaru  Defender  B  A  C Blind effect
 Minotaur / Volcanic Minotaur  Defender  B  B  B Poison enemy
  Minotaur / Ice Cave Minotaur  Defender  B  B  A  Poison enemy
 Minotaur / Storm Minotaur   Defender  C  B  B Poison enemy
  Minotaur / Mountain Minotaur  Defender  C  C  C Poison enemy
 Crusader / Ardent Paladin  Defender  B  B  B Stun effect
 Crusader / Serene Paladin  Defender  B  B  B Stun effect
 Crusader / Adamant Paladin  Defender  C  C  C Stun effect
 Juggernaut / Burning Ravager  Defender  C  C  B Counter-attack
Juggernaut / Frost Ravager   Defender  B  B  A Counter-attack
 Juggernaut / Storm Ravager  Defender  B  B  A Counter-attack
 Juggernaut / Rocky Ravager  Defender  C  C  B Counter-attack
 Cyclops / Burning Cyclops  Defender  C  C  C Damage shelter
  Cyclops / Oceanic Cyclops  Defender  B  B  C  Damage shelter
  Cyclops / Thunder Cyclops  Defender  B  B  B Damage shelter
  Cyclops / Forest Cyclops  Defender  A  A  C Damage shelter
 Mauler / Fire Crusher  Defender  B  B  B Increase critical chance
 Mauler / Ice Crusher   Defender  B  B  B Increase defense
  Mauler / Thunder Crusher  Defender  B  B  B Increase defense
  Mauler / Forest Crusher  Defender  C  C  B Increase defense
 Colossus / Fire Titan  Defender  B  A  S Prevent beneficial effects
  Colossus / Frost Titan  Defender  A  S  B Prevent beneficial effects
  Colossus / Storm Titan  Defender  B  A  B Prevent beneficial effects
  Colossus / Adamant Titan  Defender  B  A  B Prevent beneficial effects
 Ebon Knight / Fiery Death Knight  Defender  B  B  C Taunt enemy
 Ebon Knight / Freezing Death Knight   Defender  C  C  B Stun effect
  Ebon Knight / Lightning Death Knight  Defender  A  A Stun effect
  Ebon Knight / Granite Death Knight  Defender  A  A  B Stun effect
Sphinx Kitten
Sphinx / Lightning Sphinx 
 Defender  C  C  C Decrease enemy defense
 Vampire Knight / Ethereal Lord  Defender  B  B  B Drain enemy health
 Angel Zealot / Exalted Justicar  Defender  B  B  A Confuse effect
 Mountain Dragon / Emerald Dragon  Defender  C  C  B Decrease enemy accuracy
Sprite / Blazing Queen
 Saboteur  B  B  B Prevent enemy healing
Sprite / Winter Queen
 Saboteur  C  C  C Prevent enemy healing
Sprite / Storm Queen
 Saboteur  C  B  B Prevent enemy healing
 Gargoyle Whelp
Gargoyle / Lava Gargoyle
 Saboteur  C Petrify enemy
  Gargoyle Whelp
Gargoyle / Icy Gargoyle
 Saboteur  B  B Petrify enemy
  Gargoyle Whelp
Gargoyle / Silver Gargoyle
 Saboteur  B  A  C Petrify enemy
  Gargoyle Whelp
Gargoyle / Stone Gargoyle
 Saboteur  B  B Petrify enemy
 Sphinx Kitten
Sphinx / Fire Sphinx
 Saboteur  B  B  B Decrease enemy defense
  Sphinx Kitten
Sphinx / Frost Sphinx
 Saboteur  C  B  B Decrease enemy defense
  Sphinx Kitten
Sphinx / Stone Sphinx
 Saboteur  C  C  B Decrease enemy defense
 Djinn / Flaming Djinn  Saboteur  B  B  C Decrease enemy resistance
  Djinn / Forest Djinn  Saboteur  B  B  C Decrease enemy resistance
 Ghost / Darkfire Spectre  Saboteur  B  B  B Poison enemy
  Ghost / Chilling Spectre  Saboteur  A  B  B Poison enemy
  Ghost / Howling Spectre  Saboteur  A  B  B Poison enemy
  Ghost / Crypt Spectre  Saboteur  B  B  C Poison enemy
 Harpy / Flame Fury  Saboteur  B  A B Decrease enemy attack
Harpy / Hail Fury   Saboteur  C  C Decrease enemy attack
 Imp / Flaming Familiar  Saboteur  B  B  B Reduce enemy's total health
  Imp / River Familiar  Saboteur  A  B  C Reduce enemy's total health
 Arcane Bird
Arcane Eagle / Flaming Simurgh
 Saboteur  A  A A Heal self
Arcane Bird
Arcane Eagle / Frost Simurgh 
 Saboteur  A  A  A Heal self
 Arcane Bird
Arcane Eagle / Storm Simurgh
 Saboteur  B  B  B Heal self
 Arcane Bird
Arcane Eagle / Earth Simurgh
 Saboteur  C  C  C Heal self
Manticore / Fire Scorpicore
 Saboteur  B  B  B Poison enemy
Manticore / Icy Scorpicore
 Saboteur  B A  B Poison enemy
Manticore / Lightning Scorpicore
 Saboteur  A  A  B Poison enemy
Manticore / Mountain Scorpicore
 Saboteur  A  S  B Poison enemy
 Witch / Fire Sorceress  Saboteur  B  B  A Poison enemy
 Witch / Earth Sorceress  Saboteur  C  C  C Poison enemy
 Blade Dancer / Flame Dancer  Saboteur  B  B  A Stun effect
  Blade Dancer / Vine Dancer  Saboteur  B  A  A Stun effect
 Vampire Knight / Darkfire Lord  Saboteur  B  A  S Confuse effect
Vampire Knight / Chilling Lord   Saboteur  A  A  A Confuse effect
Vampire Knight / Crypt Lord   Saboteur  A  A  A Drain health
 Goblin Shaman / Flaming Hexxer  Saboteur  A  A  S Remove beneficial effect
 Goblin Shaman / Forest Hexxer  Saboteur  A  S  S Remove beneficial effect
Necromancer Disciple / Fire Deathlord   Saboteur  B  B  A Lower turn bar
Necromancer Disciple / Ice Deathlord    Saboteur  C  C  B Mute enemy effects
 Necromancer Disciple / Thunder Deathlord   Saboteur  A  A  S Lower turn bar
 Necromancer Disciple / Venom Deathlord   Saboteur  A  S  A Lower turn bar
Faceless / Blazing Faceless   Saboteur  S  S  S Remove beneficial effect
Faceless / Winter Faceless    Saboteur  B  B  A Remove beneficial effect
 Kabuki Ninja / Freezing Ninja  Saboteur  C  C  C Increase damage based on speed
Kabuki Ninja / Thunder Ninja   Saboteur  B  B  B Sleep effect
 Ice Dragon / Sapphire Dragon  Saboteur  A  S  A Decrease speed
 Daimyo / Frost Shogun  Saboteur  A  A  A Get a second turn
 Soulless Marionette 
Soulless Strider / Thunder Stalker
 Saboteur  B  B  C Decrease enemy resistance
 Blackfang Rogue / Lightning Assassin  Saboteur  B  B Poison enemy
 Deva / Thunder Asura  Saboteur  A  S Mute enemy effects
 Deva / Earth Asura  Saboteur  B  B  A Mute enemy effects
 Lesser Elemental
Elemental / Forest Elemental
 Saboteur  C  C Increase beneficial effects
 Spirit Cub
Spirit Fox / Flaming Kitsune
 Support  B  B Shield self
 Spirit Cub
Spirit Fox / Icy Kitsune
 Support  A  S  B Shield self
 Spirit Cub
Spirit Fox / Storm Kitsune
 Support  B A  B Shield self
 Spirit Cub
Spirit Fox / Vital Kitsune
 Support  B  B  A Shield self
 Bright Fawn
Sun Deer / Flaming Patriarch
 Support  B  B  B Lower turn bar
 Bright Fawn
Sun Deer / Frost Patriarch 
 Support  C  C  C Lower turn bar
 Bright Fawn
Sun Deer / Ethereal Patriarch 
 Support  C  C  C Lower turn bar
 Bright Fawn
Sun Deer / Forest Patriarch 
 Support  B  B  C Lower turn bar
 Unicorn Foal
Unicorn / Flaming Unicorn
 Support  B  A  C Lower turn bar
 Unicorn Foal
Unicorn / Frost Unicorn
 Support  C  B  C Lower turn bar
 Unicorn Foal
Unicorn / Lightning Unicorn
 Support  A  A  B Lower turn bar
 Unicorn Foal
Unicorn / Forest Unicorn
 Support  B  B  C Lower turn bar
 Nymph / Flaming Muse  Support  A  A  A Decease enemy accuracy
 Nymph / Water Muse   Support  B  C  B Decease enemy accuracy
 Nymph / Thunder Muse   Support  C  C  C Decease enemy accuracy
  Nymph / Earth Muse  Support  B  B  C Decease enemy accuracy
 Holy Sister / Ardent Priestess  Support  A  A  B Mute enemy abilities
  Holy Sister / Serene Priestess  Support  S  S  A Mute enemy abilities
  Holy Sister / Exalted Priestess  Support  B  A Mute enemy abilities
  Holy Sister / Adamant Priestess  Support  B  A  C Mute enemy abilities
 Druid / Flaming Druid  Support  B  S  A Heal self
 Druid / Winter Druid  Support  B  B  B Increase speed
 Druid / Storm Druid  Support  A  A  C Increase speed
 Druid / Forest Druid  Support  B  B  C Increase speed
 Angel Mystic / Ardent Hierophant  Support  S  S  A Increase attack based on enemy health
 Angel Mystic / Serene Hierophant  Support  S  A  S Increase attack based on enemy health
 Angel Mystic / Exalted Hierophant  Support  S  S  S Increase attack based on enemy health
 Angel Mystic / Adamant Hierophant  Support  B  A  B Increase attack based on enemy health
 Angel Zealot / Ardent Justicar  Support  B  B  S Health shield
 Angel Zealot / Serene Justicar  Support  B  B  S Health shield
 Angel Zealot / Adamant Justicar  Support  S  S  S Health shield
 Goblin Shaman / Freezing Hexxer  Support  A  A  A Remove beneficial effect
 Goblin Shaman / Tempest Hexxer   Support  S  S  B Remove beneficial effect
 Harpy / Storm Fury  Support  C  B  C Decrease enemy attack
 Harpy / Mountain Fury  Support  C  C  B Decrease enemy attack
 Crusader / Exalted Paladin  Support  A  A  S Stun enemy
Faceless / Emerald Faceless   Support  A  A  B Remove beneficial effect
Faceless / Tempest Faceless   Support  B  A  B Remove beneficial effect
Sprite / Forest Queen
 Support  A  B  C Prevent enemy healing


What do you think of our Might And Magic Elemental Guardians tier list? Would you rearrange any creatures to place them higher or lower on the list? Let us know your favorite creature grouping and best Elemental Guardians strategies in the comments section below!

Still getting a grip on all the game's different elements and creature types? Be sure to check out our Might & Magic beginner's tips and strategy guide.

Take to the Skies With the Fortnite Bouncer Trap Tue, 05 Jun 2018 15:32:22 -0400 Ty Arthur

After the arrival of the ludicrous shopping cart push vehicle last week (you just knew this game couldn't have a normal, non-absurd vehicle, didn't you?), things are about to get even more crazy in Fortnite with the Bouncer Trap!

The sky's the limit now (literally) with a trap that will bring to mind your fondest memories of using the impulse grenade improperly to explore the air above the Battle Royale map.

This new and improved Bouncer Trap was just added in the Fortnite V4.3 content update today, which may be one of the smallest updates so far, with an extremely short patch notes list.

We've already had launching pads exactly like this in Save the World mode since the game's very earliest days, but now the Trap makes its way into Battle Royale for (presumably) a limited time to spice up solo and squad play.

Where to Find the Bouncer Trap

Bouncer Traps are a Rare-rated item drop found in stacks of three and can be picked up as randomized floor loot in any of the normal floor spawn locations, as well as in gold treasure chests, supply drops, and even supply llamas.

In other words, anywhere you normally find treasure, a stack of 3 Bouncers has a small chance of spawning. They take up an inventory slot just like any other weapon or usable item, and they are placed on the ground just like you were building a floor tile with normal resources.

Once set down, the Bouncer provides a jump boost upward (or in a cardinal direction if you placed it horizontally on a wall tile). The applications here are endless, from bouncing up and over a fortress wall to getting off a few pot shots to rapidly pushing unsuspecting enemies away from an area.

Strangely, they don't seem to have anything to do with the Season 4, Week 6 challenges, although they sure can turn a map into a wacky fun house of carnage when used in conjunction with those shopping carts.... Placing a Bouncer vertically on a wall tile and then throwing a shopping cart into the trap can lead to some seriously high-speed hijinks.

 Coming across a Bouncer Trap on the ground (thanks to DooM BigFoltz for the screenshot)

Although the regular update day has arrived, the Fortnite Season 4, Week 6 challenges haven't actually gone live yet, but as usual, they have leaked ahead of time.

These new challenges for Battle Pass holders are expected to go live shortly now that the new trap has officially arrived in the 4.3 patch:

  • Search Supply Drops (3)
  • Deal damage with Shotguns to opponents (1000)
  • Search Chests in Loot Lake (7)
  • Spray over different Carbide or Omega Posters (7)
  • Search between a Playground, Campsite, and a Footprint (1) (HARD)
  • SMG Eliminations (3) (HARD)
  • Eliminate opponents in Retail Row (3) (HARD)

The Loot Lake chests challenge should be fairly easy, as well as getting eliminations in Retail Row if you stay hidden. The others will take a bit more effort, however. Stay tuned for our full guides on searching out the hidden playground/campsite/footprint area and spraying over the Omega posters as soon as the challenges go live!

What do you think of this new version of the Bouncer Trap, and how are you going to use them to land a #1 Victory Royale win? Let us know your Bouncer strategy in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny:

FFXIV Ridorana Lighthouse Raid Guide Tue, 05 Jun 2018 15:04:29 -0400 Sergey_3847

The Ridorana Lighthouse is the latest 24-man alliance raid in Final Fantasy XIV, which is a part of Patch 4.3, Under the Moonlight. It requires level 70 and has a time limit of 120 minutes. It can be unlocked by progressing through the Return to Ivalice storyline after clearing the Royal City of Rabanastre.

The entire raid consists of four bosses of various difficulty, and if you manage to beat all four of them, you will get rewards after each boss. Follow our guide below for all the essential tips on how to beat all the bosses in the Ridorana Lighthouse raid.

Boss 1: Famfrit, the Darkening Cloud

The first boss of the raid is Famfrit, the Darkening Cloud, who represents the zodiac sign of Aquarius, the Water Carrier, and desires to "flood" the world with darkness.

Famfrit mostly uses AOEs and stacks them up as the battle progresses. The biggest threat he will pose is Tsunami. He will fill up his vase with water and turn it around above his head. When he stops, he will spill out the water from the vase in the direction the water came from.

Keep an eye on the direction of the vase at all times. When he's done casting Tsunamis, he will switch to Dark Ewer, which will make whirlpools of water fall through an entire arena, from one side to another in a straight line, so stay away from this as much as you can.

Dark Rain is his ADD trick. You can split the alliance into groups and let each fight one of the Rains. The longer it takes, the more AOEs Famfrit will cast, to the point that it will get really hectic. But if you have enough heals and shields, you should be able to survive this.

Famfrit, the Darkening Cloud rewards:

  • 10x Allagan Tomestone of Creation
  • 1x Treasure Coffer

Boss 2: Belias, the Gigas

Belias mostly uses Fire and Time AOEs to disrupt your company. The Fire IV spell sends a whirlwind of fire all around the arena, so it's pretty hard to evade. However, his second skill, Time Eruption, divides the floor into squares and sets up time bombs that tick on each of them. All you need to do here is to stick to the bombs that tick slower, and when the faster ones explode, then jump to the safe spots.

Later on, Belias will split into two clones and charge across the battlefield in a straight line. Again, just follow his marker and move to the opposite side. This way, you will be able to avoid his charges.

In the second phase of the battle, the boss will activate Hand of Time, which will slow down all players affected by its tethers. This means that the safest zone is on the edge of the arena, where the AOE can't reach you.

Lastly, he will summon three Gigas that can be easily defeated if you split your alliance and take care of each of them. After Gigas, you may also find yourself against several Time Bombs, but those shouldn't be a problem either.

Belias, The Gigas rewards:

  • 20x Allagan Tomestone of Creation
  • 1x Treasure Coffer

Boss 3: Construct 7

The beginning of the fight against Construct 7 involves a lot of running around, as he will use Accelerate and Pulverize AOEs to try to burn you down. So just move along the edges of the arena and avoid his markers.

Then, Dismissal and Dispose will follow when Construct 7 starts jumping across the room and wrecking everything in his path. At one point, he will land and charge a cone-shaped AOE in front of him while rotating in all directions. In this case, you simply need to always find yourself behind the boss.

If you manage to survive all this, then Construct 7 will start a mini-game -- Computation. This will set the HP of all players to single-digit numbers. Pretty fun, huh? But don't worry, the boss will summon four AOEs that will have numbers from 1 to 4 above them. He will then provide you with a computation task.

For example, you might be required to step into one of the circles so that the value of your current health plus the value of the circle can be divided by four. This means that if your health is 1, then you need to step into the circle with 3. This will bring your life total to 4, which will complete the computation.

There will be several such computation tasks, and in-between, your party will be sucked into portals to fight three other constructs. When you're done with the constructs and all the computations, you will finish off this boss.

Construct 7 rewards:

  • 30x Allagan Tomestone of Creation
  • 1x Treasure Coffer

Boss 4: Yiazmat

The final boss is hard! He will start with a few circle- and cone-shaped AOEs, which you can avoid by going behind him. But then he will throw White Breath, which basically covers the entire arena, so the only escape route is under his belly.

One of the most exciting mechanics used by Yiazmat is the Magnetic Lysis. This AOE separates the room into two polarities: positive and negative. If you get hit by either a positive or negative charge, just try to stay on the side of the room with the opposite charge to yours.

The problem is that during this phase, the boss will cast other AOEs, so it'll be harder and harder to avoid those and stay on the right side of the room. When this phase is over, he will initiate a Cyclone that will pick up all players and turn them around in a whirlwind.

As if this wasn't enough, Yiazmat will summon demons that have to be separated before you can kill them; if they're stacked together, they'll be invulnerable. But if you manage to kill them, the boss will reveal his heart and lose tons of HP. Now you can kill him easily!

Yiazmat rewards:

  • 40x Allagan Tomestone of Creation
  • 20x Allagan Tomestone of Mendacity
  • 1x Gougan Coin
  • 1x Cracked Cluster
  • 2x Treasure Coffer


That covers how to beat all the bosses in the Ridorana Lighthouse raid, and for other Final Fantasy XIV guides at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

A Beginner's Guide to Cultist Simulator Tue, 05 Jun 2018 13:37:44 -0400 Zack Palm

Not every game hands you the keys to the front entrance. And in Cultist Simulator, the developers want you to look under every rock to find the hidden key they've placed for the entrance.

This challenging game invites players to try a new method and go forward with a different approach to discover success on their own terms. This guide offers some helpful tips for anyone getting stuck in Cultist Simulator or who wants to improve their chances of surviving.

Note: The developers encourage experimentation in this game. Much of the advice shared here may contain spoilers.

Read the Aspects of Your Cards

You'll find these at the lower right-hand side of every card you click on. You should understand what these symbols mean and how they work together with the other Verbs that pop up on your board. 

This means spending a lot of time starting your game paused and reading through the aspects attached to your starting deck. Don't be afraid to read as much as you can -- the more you read, the more likely you are to immediately know what cards go together.

Make sure to do this even if you experience a loss. Take a moment to read the aspects of the Verbs you were given, as well as the cards you have on your board. This will give you a better idea of why you lost and how you can correct it for next time.

Know How to Reliably Acquire Resource Cards

The start of the game may seem forgiving by granting you a healthy pool of personal stats, such as Health, Funds, Passion, and Reason cards. These remain difficult resources to gather throughout your playthrough of Cultist Simulator, and you'll consistently find a excuse to keep these items in stock. The best way to keep them around is to know the easiest and quickest ways to acquire them.

  • Health - This may prove the toughest resource to acquire. You're going to want to stock up on Vitality cards. You can acquire these by placing Health cards in the Study slot. It will take two Vitality cards to gain another Health, and this can take some time; make sure you do this earlier rather than later. To increase your Health further, you'll need at least four Vitality cards at once to gain another; the same goes for Passion and Reason, for which you'll need Glimmering and Erudition respectively.
  • Funds - You'll find this the easiest personal stat to acquire, and you'll have the most of it. You can use your other personal stats, such as Health, Passion, and Reason, to acquire more of it. You replenish this from the Work Verb. You'll want to have a lot of Funds as this stat can help you upgrade your other stats, and it remains a useful tool to advance the game!
  • Passion - If you place Passion in the Study Verb, you'll find that you can acquire Glimmering. When you add enough Glimmering (along with funds) to the Study Verb, you can add more Passion to your overall pool. Other cards, such as Fascination, can pop up from studying Glimmering. You can use Fascination with the Sleep Verb, add Dread to it, and acquire more Passion.
  • Reason - Much like Passion, you can use a Reason card with Study to acquire Erudition. With Erudition, you can use it with the Study Verb, add a Fund card, and receive an upgrade in Reason. If you draw a Dread card, use it with Sleep and add Contentment to it to increase your Reason pool.

In Cultist Simulator, there's no surefire way to receive a card when you use it with a task. There's always a small risk you're going to receive a negative aspect, but that's a part of the game. If you want the biggest rewards, you have to prepare yourself to handle the risks associated with them.

The Glover and Glover Position

Of all the jobs available to you in the game, the Glover and Glover career can provide you with the most funds. If you plan on going this route, don't get stuck at the junior position. You want to earn more funds and expand your career by earning promotions.

You can earn promotions by adding Reason when you place the Glover and Glover Junior Position into the Work Verb. Because this occupies your Reason card, it's best to do this when you have at least 2 Reason in your pool.

Once you receive your promotion, you'll notice your boss, Mr. Alden, starts demanding you work overtime. He'll continue to demand this from you, and if you don't comply, he'll dock your pay.

To get the most out of this career path, you have to take out Mr. Alden. You can do this by placing a Health or a Follower Card in the Explore slot. This may take several attempts. Eventually, you should receive some hired help to handle Mr. Alden.

When you're ready, place your hired help card in the Talk slot and then add your Job card to it. They should eliminate Mr. Alden. This may take you several attempts as you can fail this opportunity. With Mr. Alden gone, you can continue working as you normally did, and over time, you should gain another promotion.

The Senior Position is not the highest level you achieve at Glover and Glover. Much like how you eliminated Mr. Alden, you can take out one of the seated chairmen of the company in the same fashion. Again, this may take you some time as you can fail this opportunity. Once you've taken out the younger Glover, you'll find yourself with a seat at the Glover and Glover company.

For those just starting out, this is a secure position to play the game. 

Avoid Using Health on Work If You Can

By throwing a health card into the Work Verb, you're performing manual labor. You'll find this a great way to make money in the short run, but this doesn't bode well for your long game. Use this option sparingly and only if you have health to spare.

If you're in a pinch, sure, this is a great option if you need a quick burst of funds. But when you do this too much, you run the risk of potentially acquiring the Injury card. You'll have to use funds to turn this Injury card back into a Health card. So, if you were doing this to receive funds in the first place and you drew the Injury card, you're out of luck.

Only use Health in the Work Verb if you have available funds to bail yourself out.

More Followers Always Helps, and How You Use Them

When you're not using your Talk verb for anything in particular, optimize this empty section and try to locate followers. The more you have on your side, the more options you'll have during the mid-to-late game. 

It's important you also understand you'll likely find two different types: named followers and Hangers-On. Hangers-On are lower on the power pole compared to named followers, and you can only upgrade them once to the level of Pawn.

You can upgrade named followers three times. They start out as Acquaintances, and you can turn them into Believers, and later, Disciples. A select few can turn into Exalted. This can only happen if they are associated with the core principle of your Cult.

Of the two, use a Hanger-On in a ritual to gain a benefit as they do not matter as much as the named ones. Additionally, if you upgrade a Hanger-on to the level of Pawn, you can use it as a scapegoat when the Suppression Bureau start to catch wind of you.

Because you're reserving your named followers for real tasks, only assign them to tasks you want to get done right. Believers have a 30% chance to succeed, Disciples have a 70% chance, and Exalted have a 100% chance.

Do Not Let Expeditions Use Up All of Your Followers

You have three outcomes when it comes to completing an expedition:

  • You succeed (great!)
  • You run out of money
  • You run out followers

Of the three, running out of followers is the worst because these were the most difficult to acquire, and once you lose them, they're gone. You can earn back money. Not people. If you see your expedition is not going well, the best thing to do is let it run out of money -- do not keep throwing followers at the problem!

If there's something you're still having trouble with, or if you have a particular question, let your voice be heard in the comments below.

For more Cultist Simulator guides, keep it here at GameSkinny.

How to Play Hours of Darkness Far Cry 5 Tue, 05 Jun 2018 13:07:30 -0400 Ty Arthur

Whether you're still reeling from the wonderfully bleak and disturbing ending to Far Cry 5 or still making your way to its climax, it's time to jump into a different kind of fray with the game's first official DLC: "Hours of Darkness." The add-on shifts away from the backwoods of Hope County, Montana to the jungles of yesteryear Vietnam.

Getting there can be a bit of a challenge, though, as the DLC doesn't seem to auto-download as it should, and the option to start the "Hours Of Darkness" campaign is buried in a hidden menu.

Can't figure out how to start this first Far Cry 5 DLC? We've got you covered with a quick explanation of how to get into its stealth jungle-killing action right away!

 Welcome to the jungle, baby!

Accessing the DLC 

If you have the Far Cry 5 season pass, "Hours Of Darkness" won't automatically put itself into your console auto-updates as it should. Don't select the DLC entry manually in the Xbox Marketplace or PlayStation Store, as this will prompt you to buy it as a separate purchase.

Instead, navigate to the season pass item in the store/marketplace, which you should already own. From there, scroll down to the items included with the pass and select "Hours Of Darkness," then choose the option to start the installation.

Once the download is complete, fully close Far Cry 5 if it was open (don't just navigate back to the Xbox One or PS4 dashboard), then restart the game. In the main menu, you should now have the Add On Packs option available.

Open that up and you can start a new game in the "Hours Of Darkness" DLC.

Where to find the DLC in the menu

This is just the start of the Far Cry 5 DLC explosion: next up we get to fight against zombies and Martians in two impending expansions!

Still playing through the base game or taking part in the weekly live events? Be sure to check out our other Far Cry 5 tips and tricks guides here:

Jurassic World Alive Beginner's Guide Fri, 01 Jun 2018 21:57:01 -0400 RobotsFightingDinosaurs

It seems like every day there's an AR phone game trying to ride the white-hot coattails of Pokemon GO. The newest entrant into this real-world gaming genre is Jurassic World Alive, but if you think the game is just Pokemon GO with cool dinosaurs, well, you're only kind of right. Jurassic World Alive has a whole bunch of features that set it apart from its brethren in the real-world gaming space, and even if you're an old pro at Ingress and Pokemon GO, some of the systems can take a bit of getting used to. Luckily, we've put together a Jurassic World Alive beginner's guide so that you can harvest dino DNA with drones and create horrific dinosaur hybrids (yes, these are things you do in the game) like a pro!

Jurassic World Alive Beginner's Guide

Getting Started

At first blush, Jurassic World Alive will look very familiar to anybody who has any experience with AR gaming. There's a map (colored with varying shades of blue, natch), complete with supply drop locations and dinosaurs scattered all over the place. You also have a small circle around your current location that shows you how close you have to be to a supply drop in order to collect it.

This, however, is where the similarities to Pokemon GO end. It's surprising, but you can actually get a lot of mileage out of the game just by sitting on your couch. As long as you're within 500 feet of a dinosaur, you can attempt to take it on. Instead of gyms, Jurassic World Alive has a simple turn-based player-versus-player battle system. You can combine and evolve dinosaurs to create more powerful ones and build your battle team.

Yeah, we're kind of salty too. It's everything Pokemon GO should have been. Anyway ....

Tips on "Catching" Dinosaurs

The first thing you'll want to do when you open up the game for the first time is build your dino-squad. You'll be tempted to do this from your couch, but it's actually very helpful to get as close as you can to the dinosaurs before you start any encounter. The game never tells you this, but the closer you are to the dinosaur you're trying to obtain, the more time you'll have to shoot it with darts from your little drone thingy. You can estimate the amount of time you'll have in the encounter using the battery icon at the top of your screen.

Once you're in the encounter, the goal will be to bullseye the dinosaur with darts in order to harvest its DNA. You'll then use that DNA to create your own version of the dinosaur, and you'll receive more DNA the closer you get to the bullseye indicator. It's important to remember that the encounter doesn't properly start until you fire your first dart, so take your time to line it up and ensure that you get a direct hit. After that, the dino will start moving and things will be much more difficult. Don't be discouraged if you don't get that much DNA from the dino at first; you'll get the hang of it soon.

After the dinosaur starts moving, keep in mind that you'll have to lead your shots. Look at where the dinosaur is heading, and aim a bit ahead of the bullseye on its path in order to score a direct hit by the time the dart reaches the dino. Keep in mind that the dinosaur will move more quickly as you hit it with more darts, so you'll have to lead your shots more as well.

Oh, and as a final pro tip, be careful firing off a final shot as time expires. If it doesn't hit the dinosaur before the encounter ends, even if you fired it beforehand, it won't count and it'll be a waste of a dart. 

Building Your Team

When you start the game, Chris Pratt will give you a starting dino, but you'll need at least four to get into battle. If you click the skull icon, you'll be taken to your dinosaur collection, where you can check your progress in gathering DNA to bolster your team (and later, modify your dino-strike team!)

Most low-level common dinosaurs only need 50 DNA to create, while rarer dinosaurs cost 100 or 150 DNA to create, so keep that in mind. You likely won't be able to snag a T-Rex for yourself in only one encounter, so adjust your expectations accordingly. In most cases, a rarer monster is indeed more powerful than a common one, but not always. As you take part in more encounters, you'll also be able to evolve your dinosaurs, leveling them up to become stronger. A good indicator is the amount of DNA needed to evolve or create a dinosaur. If you've sunk 250 DNA into leveling up a dinosaur, it will likely be stronger in battle than a rarer dinosaur that costs 150 to create (though if you're just getting started, both deserve a spot on your battle team).

As you collect and encounter more dinosaurs, you'll see that your collection screen will expand with purple dinosaurs in the "Not Collected" section. These are dinosaurs that can be made by combining two higher-level dinos that you already have. These dinosaurs are incredibly strong, so create them as soon as you can!

Evolving and fusing dinosaurs takes coins, which luckily, are plentiful both in supply drops and free incubators. Speaking of incubators ....

On Incubators

Whereas supply drops replenish your stock of darts and coins, incubators do that too but with a bit extra on top.

Depending on the rarity of the incubator (basic ones are available for free on a timer, though you can earn rarer ones by battling), you'll also get a varying amount of dinosaur DNA, sometimes even for a rare dinosaur.

You can check what kind of DNA you'll receive from battle incubators, while standard incubators seem like more of a crapshoot. That said, you can always check the shop page; it'll always tell you the minimum DNA you'll get from purchasing them, even though there's obviously a whole lot of randomness at play here.


So the first thing to know about battling is that you don't really get to pick your team. Once you get more than 8 dinosaurs to choose from, you'll be able to put together a battle team of 8, of which 4 will be chosen randomly to enter battle. Battles themselves are fairly straightforward affairs (Chris Pratt gives you a pretty darn helpful tutorial once you've unlocked battling), and it's really worth doing because you'll earn a new incubator with every single win!

As you rise through the ranks, you'll unlock new arenas, which is handy because each new location will come with its own dino DNA that you can collect, and of course, more advanced locations come with more and more powerful dinosaurs. 

Have you been enjoying Jurassic World: Alive? Let us know in the comments! We'll be busy grinding to snag that Indominus Rex and hoping that Niantic is paying attention to how to actually make a turn-based alternate-reality RPG!

Might and Magic: Elemental Guardians Beginner's Tips and Strategy Guide Fri, 01 Jun 2018 21:31:23 -0400 Ty Arthur

From turn-based strategy to first-person RPG and even onto collectible card game, the Might & Magic franchise has been through just about ever genre out there. With Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians, the series now makes the inevitable jump to freemium mobile brawler as well.

If you've ever played Summoners War or Iron Maiden: Legacy of the Beast, then you already know the ins and outs of how this game will work. The exact same ideas are all present here, just with Might & Magic creature names tacked on.

There's all the same tropes you are already used to juggling -- summoning randomized units from crystals, upgrading with groups of runes, leveling/evolving creatures, and so on. For the most part, if you've got experience with any kind of creature-summoning mobile RPG, then you can jump right in and do fine.

There are a few key differences that can be used to get an edge up, however, and that's what we're going to focus on here with these Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians tips.

Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians Battle Strategy

Landing random high-star creatures, of course, is the best way to get ahead, but focusing on opposing elements will keep you going when your stable of creatures is tiny and filled only with 1- and 2-star weaklings.

This isn't immediately apparent, but you can actually see the specific makeup of each wave of enemies ahead of time when choosing a mission, meaning you should plan your unit groups based on what enemies you face. On the Team Selection screen, always make sure to tap that View Enemies button in the lower-right corner!

Once you build up a large stable of creatures by grinding a few missions, it becomes incredibly easy to put together a group composed of opposing elements to annihilate each wave.

 Viewing enemy types before a battle

During a mission, units don't heal between waves, so having a creature  that can directly heal, apply a regeneration effect, or increase defense in every team is critical if you can't take down a wave in one or two turns.

While choosing your team lineup, poisoning attacks are incredibly useful in nearly all missions or PvE situations, so work on leveling those types of creatures, such as the Basilisk, when you get them. If you manage to nab a creature who can poison multiple creatures at once, that should be your go-to monster.

Glyphs and Farming

As you progress and get more units and items, glyph placement can be the difference between victory and failure. Putting haste glyphs on your healers is helpful, as is keeping accuracy glyphs on your debuffing creatures, while life -tealing glyphs work wonders either on big, tanky creatures or any monster that deals area effect damage to all enemies.

There are many different types of drops to farm in missions, with creature drops the rarest of all, so pay attention to the symbols on the right side of the screen when picking a mission.

In particular, note that books start dropping at level 3 of the Elemental Fire Tower and level 3 of the Tower of Houses on the Dragonmist Isles. They also drop more frequently in levels 8, 9, and 10 of the Tower of Houses, so those are great farming locations. 

Books are a rare resource that give upgrades to creature stats, so make sure to use them on creatures you intend to keep using long term rather than upgrading lame 1-star monsters. Due to their rarity, you want to make every book count.

 Checking drop availability in a mission

Those are all the basic Might & Magic: Elemental Guardians strategies you need to know to get started completing missions and competing in PvP. Do you have any other good starting tips and cheats for newbies? Let us know your best strategy in the comments below!

Moonlighter Green Monster Guide Fri, 01 Jun 2018 15:50:32 -0400 Zack Palm

When you're running through dungeons in Moonlighter, you'll find it difficult to resist the compulsion to explore every room on a floor. Who can blame you? You need to acquire all of the loot and get it to your shop!

But be warned. Eventually, you'll find yourself face to face with a fearsome, one-eyed green foe. This ghastly green monster comes equipped with the power to end you with a single blow, and it will chase you until you find the floor's exit!

How Did This Happen?

If you were greeted by this large monstrosity, you're probably thinking it's a regular monster in your dungeon, and this means you've tried to fight it. This does not go well. It takes no damage! If it takes no damage and eliminates you with one hit, this green monster must be a bug, right?

Be warned, it shows up in every dungeon, and it is not a bug. But what is it?

It's the developers' way of motivating you to move faster through the dungeon. If you stay too long on a floor, you'll notice a little green eye icon with a timer attached to it popping up on the lower left-hand part of your screen. This icon indicates that the monster is on the hunt for you -- you better get moving!

What Can You Do?

Try as you might, no matter how many arrows or well-timed slashes you successfully hit on this creature, you will never kill it. It is invincible, and it will one-shot you for 500,000 damage.

You're left with only one option: Get to the next floor!

Though the monster destroys you with one hit, it doesn't move quickly. Use this to your advantage to move on. 

If you get cornered by it, keep dodging! You can avoid taking any damage if you effectively dodge the green monster's attacks.

Some people may never run into this creature. I waited for it to spawn on the first floor of the first dungeon, and it took about six minutes for it to finally show up. Not a lot of time, but definitely enough for me to find the door to the next floor.

Alternative Ways the Green Monster Spawns

Other than motivating you to keep moving, the green monster does show up for another reason: when you steal its favorite book!

You can find this sacred tome in one of the secret rooms. How do you find the secret area?

You need to keep your eyes open. The game indicates a secret area with a small twinkling in the dark abyss of a room with a large chasm. It's really easy to miss this twinkling! It only shows up when you enter the new room. When you know you've found a secret room, you roll down into the hole, taking no damage.

When you land on the secret floor, you'll find a few items on the ground, along with a rope to take you back up. Floating in the middle of the room will be the floating tome -- take this tome at your own risk!

As soon as you grab it, the green monster appears. You can take the rope back up to your floor, but it will still chase you! The only way to escape its gooey clutches is by running to the exit to the next floor. However, if you choose to leave an item in its place, the green monster will not spawn. When you find this floating book, prepare to part with an item you do not value!

If you're feeling a bit lucky, stay an extra couple of minutes on a dungeon floor and see what you find. But beware, the developers don't want you feeling too safe. The green monster awaits anyone willing to risk it in order to discover the finest of prizes. 

For more on Moonlighter, keep it here at GameSkinny.

Slashing, Piercing, or Blunt: A Dauntless Weapons Guide Thu, 31 May 2018 14:10:26 -0400 A. Web

If you’re looking to hunt a behemoth, you’re going to need a weapon. Fortunately, in Phoenix Labs' new co-op action RPG, Dauntless, you have the option to trade out between five of them: sword, hammer, chain blades, axe, and war pike. It really just comes down to your playstyle.

Though you start with a sword automatically, completing the in-game tutorial and killing your first behemoth grants you access to the hammer, chain blade, and axe shortly thereafter. The war pike you won’t be able to get until much later, after you’ve completed a good amount of hunts and have managed to upgrade/smith enough weapons to get your Weapon Master title to level 4. But don’t worry, your starter weapons should be more than enough to tide you over until then.

So let’s take a look at some of the Dauntless weapons basics:

Dealing Damage

Each of the weapons in the game can be broken down into three categories based on their damage: slashing damage, blunt damage, and piercing damage.

Now, you might be questioning why the type of damage each weapon does is relevant, but when it comes to taking down a behemoth, the kind of damage you’re inflicting matters. In fact, outside of the three basic damage types that weapons do, there are also four types of damage a behemoth can take.

Basic Damage: This is general damage a behemoth takes when you hit it. It’s usually done through slashing damage and indicated by green numbers.

Part Damage: This is damage done to PARTS of a behemoth, not to be confused with partial damage. So, for example, when you’re hacking off a behemoth’s tail, that’s part damage and will usually appear as yellow numbers. This can be done by any weapon, though slashing-damage weapons are the only ones that can deal the final blow to take off tails.

Stagger Damage: This is any damage done to a behemoth that staggers or knocks them down. You can stagger most behemoths by hitting them in the head or on their legs. This damage appears in blue numbers and can be done by any of the slashing-damage weapons. However, the blunt damage of the hammer works best.

Wound Damage: When you hit a behemoth, you may notice a cut or small wound appear on their body. These cuts, along with red numbers, indicate wound damage, which means that any other hits you land in that area will have their damage increased. (You’ll also likely see blue aether flow from these wounds, which can help power-up your lantern).

So now that we’ve covered the basic damage types, let’s take a look at exactly what each weapon can do:

Choosing Your Weapon

As stated earlier, when you first start the game, you will have access to four separate weapon types -- all with their own distinct playstyles and abilities. Each weapon will have two main attacks (regular and heavy) as well as a specialized move you can unleash for combo finishes. Really, you can almost think of the weapons in Dauntless as part of your character class, so it’s best to pick just one to move forward with and upgrade as you go along. With that in mind, it’s important to understand what each weapon can do and to test them to see what works best for you.

Sword (Slashing Damage): The two main attacks for the sword are its regular attack and heavy strikes. While heavy strikes allow you to deal more damage in one blow, they can be hard to land on an opponent that’s moving around a lot. Regular attacks, on the other hand, not only allow you to hit faster, but will also build up your specialized elemental blast gauge more quickly. This specialized move releases a magical projectile attack that allows you to hit a behemoth from a distance.

Hammer (Blunt Damage): This is probably the slowest weapon in the game, though it hits the hardest and may be one of the most versatile. The hammer has a cannon built into its shaft, accessible under the weapon’s “heavy hit” button. Though it only shoots a few times before needing to be reloaded, the specialized attack for the hammer is actually its refill. And don’t worry about needing to build up a gauge for it like with with the sword or chain blades; there’s no meter involved.

Chain Blades (Slashing Damage): These semi-long-distance weapons are currently the closest you can get to a ranged weapon in Dauntless outside of the Hammer’s cannon. They hit fast, though they do less damage than some of the other weapons in the game. They are also great for those who want more mobility in a fight, as their specialized move means you can either use your blades to pull yourself closer to a behemoth or use them to push yourself away.

Axe (Slashing Damage): While still a bit cumbersome, the axe offers more fluidity than the hammer. You can attack either vertically or horizontally. The only downside is that charged attacks require you to stand and charge your weapon before you strike -- which can mean you’re left vulnerable to attack. But hitting a behemoth with charged attacks can help fill the gauge for your specialized attack, which activates a buff to boost your damage. And yes, it’s stackable.

War Pike (Piercing Damage): This is one of the most versatile weapons in the game. Not only does it allow you to attack from a distance, but it gives you the ability to both pierce and slash. To top it off, its specialized attack is long-range ammunition aimed at breaking behemoth parts.

There’s really no right or wrong weapon to play with. The only thing that matters is that it works for you and you know how to use it. This is not only important for soloing hunts, but vital when you’re in a group. Everyone should “know their role” and where to hit to deal the most damage. But feel free to try them all in the meantime.


That wraps up this Dauntless guide, but be sure to stick with GameSkinny for more helpful guides like this. If you're just starting out and haven't already, be sure to check out our Dauntless beginner's guide for tips and strategies on starting off on the right foot!

How to Fix Controller Issue in Minecraft VR Windows 10 Edition Wed, 30 May 2018 17:44:50 -0400 Skykat30

Shortly after I bought my Windows Mixed Reality Headset, I wanted to play Minecraft VR in Windows 10 with it. The game looks great, but I could not get my Xbox controller to work with it. Some of the buttons would work, like the “A” and “B”, but nothing else. So, I couldn’t craft or pull up the inventory. This was a game-breaking problem because you cannot play it that way.

I tried talking to Xbox, Mojang, and Microsoft to fix the problem. Xbox told me to contact Mojang, and Mojang told me to contact Microsoft. Also, I searched the web for a solution myself. After much frustration, I found the answer to my problem.

To fix the controller issues with Minecraft VR, you need to run the game, go into the settings option, go to video options, and turn off screen animations. You might want to restart the game if it doesn’t work. After you run it again, your controller should work correctly, with all buttons functional.

So there you go! You can now play Minecraft VR with your Xbox controller. Have a great time -- I know I will! 

SMITE Chernobog Build Guide Wed, 30 May 2018 16:49:51 -0400 Zack Palm

Chernobog, the Slavic God of Darkness, is the latest addition to SMITE. This winged hunter comes with an arsenal of deadly abilities, along with an ultimate that allows him to travel across the map.

For those interested in traversing the shadows with Chernobog, this build guide will give you the best chance to dominate the duo-lane and sweep the late-game competition.

Everyone’s Favorite

Items: Warrior's Tabi, Transcendence, The Crusher, Jotunn's Wrath, Deathbringer, and Qin's Sais

  • Basic Attack - 378
  • Physical Power - 290
  • Attack Speed - 1.61
  • Penetration - 15%
  • Critical Chance - 25%

This build starts off with you purchasing Transcendence. This item gives you a healthy reserve of mana for the abilities, namely your Crystallized Curses and Vicious Barrage.

Once you've finished Transcendence, you'll want to purchase The Crusher. This item gives you a much-needed attack speed boost, and when you activate Vicious Barrage, you’ll have your standard attack speed increased all the way up to 2.27 for five seconds.

Following The Crusher, you'll want to work on finishing Jotunn’s Wraith to increase your mana pool, but more importantly, you'll receive an increased cooldown on all of your abilities. This item allows you to optimize Vicious Barrage because it remains activated for five seconds and only goes on cooldown for eight seconds.

This means you only have a 1.61 attack speed as you wait for Vicious Barrage to return off cooldown. You’ll have to be on your guard during this time!

You’ll want to reserve purchasing Qin’s Sais until later in the game, making it your second-to-last item. This way, you can use this item’s passive far more effectively. It gives you bonus damage against any opponent with over 2,000 health. This grants you the opportunity to capitalize on your tankier opponents finishing their builds as the game draws closer to the end.

The last item you're going to want to purchase is Deathbringer, a standard final item favored by many hunters to round themselves out. You’ll receive a boost to your critical chance and physical power, making you a formidable opponent during team fights.

One reason this standard build is favored by hunters is the way they can change out their items during the game based on how their opponents build. An example for this is being able to swap out The Crusher for Titan’s Bane if you’re having trouble taking down the most defensive of tanks. The drawback is you’ll lower your attack speed, and Vicious Barrage will cap at 2.08 a second, but you’ll penetrate through physical armor far more easily.

Additionally, you can also swap out The Crusher for Brawler’s Beat Stick if an opponent’s healing causes you and your team problems.

While this build strays close to the nearly standard hunter build everyone uses, it works for Chernobog exceptionally well, especially when he’s facing down sturdy guardians and warriors looking to make short work of him.

Knock Out the Squishes

Items: Warrior’s Tabi, Transcendence, Asi, Deathbringer, Malice, and Wind Demon

  • Basic Attack - 334
  • Physical Power - 246
  • Attack Speed - 1.61
  • Penetration - 10%
  • Critical Chance - 70%

Did your opposing team plan to outdamage you at every turn? Optimize on how few of them will have defensive items with this build. This time around, you're going to focus on boosting Chernobog's critical chance up and rely even more on your basic attacks. 

You won't notice too big of a change yet because you're going to stick with Warrior's Tabi and Trascendence for your first items. After you finish building those, instead of The Crusher, grab Asi and you’ll find yourself with a decent amount of lifesteal. 

Because Asi doesn’t give you the biggest amount of lifesteal, you'll want to pull away from an engagement as quickly as you can if things start to go sour. Don't get overconfident.

Following Asi, you’ll want to start working towards buying Wind Demon. With this equipped, your basic attacks will start hitting more frequently, and you’ll see these attacks have a small chance to land a critical. Also, for those wondering, you’re buying Wind Demon for its important passive, which increases your attack and movement speed each time you land a critical strike. Unfortunately, Wind Demon’s passive doesn’t matter all too much until you’ve purchased your last item.